Home

General family Documentation System – GDS – Version 7.0

image

Contents

1. ccccccccssssssssssssccccccssssssssssscccsscscsssssscsccsoees 228 13 1 Integration of two GDS Databases ceeccccccccceeeceeeeeeseeeeseeeeeseeeesaeeesaneeeeees 229 13 2 Export of data to a text or ExCel file 2 0 0 cecccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeeesseeeaes 233 H ol OTT AD DUONG a an Giuer nnd veaiete E ETE 239 oo INE GEDCOM FIG Seiser e O 237 15 3 Import of a GEDCOM Ne wens iets to ceetoenen Nicene toes cates 238 13 322 EX port O a GEDCOM Meierin 240 13 4 Integration of duplicated Individuals in the Database cccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 245 13 4 1 Concept of potentially duplicated Individuals eseeeeeeeeeees 246 13 4 2 List of Individuals potentially duplicated 2 0 0 ececccccceeceeesseeeeeeeeees 247 13 4 3 Panel of Analysis of two Individuals potentially duplicated 251 13 4 4 Dynamic repository of pending actions of Integration Workflow 253 13 5 Creation of GDS Databases as subset of the current Database 254 14 Printing of Reports or creation of PDF TIF or TXT files cccsssseees 256 TAS PINUNO REDOING wicked waretcec evens a Sia ria iecelad pia eiae Sica wie oie 256 14 2 Configuration of the printer or file to create ccc eeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 258 14 3 Printing or file creation of large format repoOrts cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 260 144s Viitual printer PDF T
2. ccccececeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 63 TE o Mee aC EEE I E EE A E A E A E A E ETA 64 70 22 Sede Mne Senerdl S ana E eas Oded eeaet se 66 LOS SCaren Dy Name ANG SUMMON G secerneren E E 66 04e Search by Number Of Control 33 ai cuecdiadinavetcunianiatini vl nuactaiadeiaret wuniasaelaan et 67 7 6 5 Search by Number of Sousa Ahnentafel ecccccccceccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeens 67 1 0 NAST OF di ViIdUalS wast fanart a Acai tee ne hase cae ei lorena hy 68 PO NEW Sea ee a a r 69 7 6 8 Direct relation from the Panel of the Individual cc eeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 69 7 6 9 Being named many GDS report cerniere eee eed ee 69 7 6 10 Being shown in a photograph seeeeesessssseeensssssssseeersssssssssereressssseeeeeees 69 7 6 11 Advanced search of Individuals 2 0 0 ccccccccccccecessseeseeceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeaeas 69 7 6 12 Getting to the register of an Individual cc eeeecesecccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 71 7 6 13 Selecting a collection of Individuals for some advanced functions 72 7 7 Connecting with other Individuals Or DOCUMENIMS cccceececeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeees 73 1 1 1 Connecting with other Individual x scccciievecntenstacees loi ceicvsnideediateauieuseuane loves 73 Thor 1 Ne NeIWOLK OF DOCUMEN S A soea sean senshi T Dudedeeates 73 7 7 3 Linking any digital Document to the Panel of the Individual 73 7 8 Updating data of the INCIVIGUAlL cccccceecece
3. Figure 109 Selecting a photo to be included in the Individual Panel Full display Basic Inf Additional Int Birth List of ancestors Joseph N Jones Graphic of ancestors Gender Male Bom Saturday February 3rd 1945 at San Francisco CF Side Graphic e aa Eg Figure 110 The Individual Panel with the chosen Photo Second method From a particular photo either by clicking with the right button of the mouse at the moment that the mouse is signaling an Individual of the Database and then clicking on Assign to panel of Individual that photo is assigned to the Panel of him her Page 187 foom Change the Full screen option Full screen Ctrl Q Fit on Screen Ctrl Fit on Width Ctrl W Print Update Assign to Panel of individual X Delete Crop Assign this page to the thumbnail of this document Send an e mail with this image Export the image to a different folder or external disk Properties Close Figure 111 Assigning a Photo to the Individual Panel from the own Photo Follow the instructions 9 7 12 12 Assign a fraction of the photo to the Individual Panel In the case of you want to assign only the face of an Individual to the Individual Panel and this face is part of a photo with more Individuals you have the possibility of doing it by A First extracting a rectangle from the image and B Second assign the extracted image to the Panel of the Individ
4. Portrait Descendants of Joseph N Jones and Marilyn lt Equivalent size to printer Landscape Width 2337 3292 Height 2337 High quality m Format of choice Marilyr A V Separators Left fi Top fi Let fo S Re Right i yl Rowe i l m Dimensions of report Columns ig m Printer margins in millimeters 142 m Primaries Adic multipage Joseph Jones N 23397 mm Down 5 z 3254x4659 millimeters m Pages to print Number of pages Print all t 4 CFom f o 14 Create the ie Cancel Figure 158 The Options of creation of a PDF or TIF file In this case you can specify the Directory Folder of destination and the name of the file of destination However these spaces can be left unchanged since GDS creates names and will indicate you on the name chosen To see the Preview at Full Screen click and hold the left mouse button on the image The preview will be presented with low quality but occupying most of the screen Releasing the button resets the Situation When you are ready click on Create file Page 259 14 3 Printing or file creation of large format reports GDS supports large format Printing of Reports You can also create large format PDF TIFF or TXT files Depending of the report with single or multipage characteristics Finally any Report can be sent as attached file in an e mail directly from GDS Graphs Reports The following Rep
5. Date of mariage O Comments Ea e mail Total Characters g7 101 See Preview Restore Create the i Cancel Figure 174 creation of a TXT file of the list of Individuals The printing of the list of Individuals will have the order of Individuals that has been given in the Original list that has produced this report See List of Individuals 7 6 6 Page 273 15 GDS and Internet GDS is using Internet with the following functions Sending Reports by Internet See 15 1 Sending an E mail with the Photo or Document attached See 15 2 Creating a Web with your Database See 15 3 Creating an HTML file with the information of an individual See 15 4 Connecting to Internet from the Individual Panel See 15 5 Sending the Database by E mail to Marshall System See 15 6 Communicating with Marshall System See 15 7 Access the web of Marshall System and other friendly webs See 15 8 sending a list of Individuals by E mail See 15 9 LOAMNGOVS N 15 1 Sending Reports by Internet From GDS you can send Reports by Internet See the chapter 8 Reports and Graphics The Reports are of three types A Reports of Text B Photos and Documents C Graphs and Others A Reports of Text These are List of Ancestors See 8 3 Descendants List See 8 7 Analysis of Surnames See 8 9 Statistics of the Database See 8 12 List of errors of start B Photos and Documents See 15 2 Single Photo
6. Figure 171 Printing a list of Individuals selecting the fields to print Page 271 From this window you chose the fields that you want to print or move to the TXT file Clicking on the control See Preview the curtain moves to the right to show the preview The situation is recovered clicking in lt lt lt lt lt or moving the mouse to the free area of the window _ Preparation of the printing of the individual list DF or TIF Column characters Output ta TT T Control 4 Certainty Hal T smart 6510 series Aed Iw First Name J5 Also named Throne name M Sumanme Father Roose Printer W Sumame Mother Portrait E Seii d quality Landscape Governance pernod Nickname Width 210 Gender Height 297 T Nobiliary Titles inch T Dynasty T Lineage nter preferences Iv Birth date Birthplace Country of birth Hew M Death date l Death place T Country of death Cause of death _ Date of mariage Comments E e mail Total Characters g7 4 101 f Print all Ts S ew f fis Frint Cancel i Orientation ERER PAE Ss b reer Sits ratte aie carrie IRH i Pu cl ji oft z h pne d seid ppp Si ii Figure 172 Moving the Panel to see the preview Preparation of the printing of the individual list Column characters O Control 4 Certainty T Prefix Kind of descendant I First Name 25 _ Also n
7. In any Photos and Documents Album See the Browser 9 4 select the Photos and Documents that you want to submit to one or more of the functions described above Mode of selecting several Photos and Documents Option 1 Keeping pressed the Ctrl key click with the left button of the mouse one of the thumbnails of the Browser This will be selected the background will be changed to blue Repeat this as many times as desired Option 2 While holding down the Shift key click with the left button of the mouse on one thumbnail If this is the first time it will be selected background in blue as if that was done with the Ctrl key Option 1 Next time you press the left button with With the Shift key pressed in any other thumbnail all images from the first to that one will be selected The two Options are compatible That is you can use as many times as you want the selection Option 1 and 2 up to the point you select all the images that you want Page 145 As shown in the image below two controls appear 1 Do something with the xx selected images and 2 Free the xxx selected images Do something with the 15 selected images Free the 15 selected images DEMO284 DEMO260 DEMO261 DEMO230 From the image 1 to the 32 Image 31 DEMO257 u se the right button of the mouse to act on the selected images Figure 83 Selecting several photos from the Browser To cancel the selection click on Free the xx selecte
8. Uncertain dates Between two dates Known date f Date unique circa C Between two days before Centu Between two months y after Century Between two years little before Tela cher Between two dates doubtful Compute Special unkown I aNat Not special destroyed disappeared soy Include _ doubtful month O Da Year doubtful year Month All doubtful day and month Include doubtful day and year Day ear doubtful month and year Month T All F A A H a z A W A Figure 38 Introducing Dates during the transition from the Julian to Gregorian calendars 1582 to 1929 In this panel you indicate in which zone that date belongs and then GDS knows if this date is Gregorian or Julian General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 7 8 4 Creating digital links In any tab of the Individual Panel in the Display of Marriage in the Data Source panel or in the panel of Surnames you can link as many items of the following Insert File link Create document Lreate recording Lreate Photography Connection to a thematic album Connection to a Data Source Figure 39 Creating Digital links Mode of operation When you see the Figure above means you can make the Function of creation of links Always get to them through a process of update whether of the Individual the data of Conjugal union the Data Source or the Panel of Surname e Place t
9. e le e e e ie e e al ete je i doubtful month and year Figure 37 Introducing Dates The panel always indicates the reason of the entry General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Any date in GDS can be expressed of the following ways e Exact Date in this case is entered the day the month and the year e Date uncertain Accompanies any date indicating the level of uncertainty about the date e Between two Dates Can express one date that is between two days up to 9 days of separation between two months two years or between two certain Dates e Era Dates To enter before the Christian era put Pressing the button B C e Century If only knows the century can be introduced pressing the prompt e Include parentheses or brackets If you want to put parenthesis or brackets surrounding the day and or the month and or the year or well around all the date only possible with the Dates of Birth and Death Special Special indications for Birth and Death See the list in the own panel e Computation Year of the Birth or Year of the Incarnation To see how the internal format of the Dates is in GDS See Internal dates format See 12 1 In the case of the entry or modification of the date of death it opens the option of entering only the age at the moment of the death and in the case that there is the date of birth the year of death is approximately calculated This is useful for those cases
10. e Press the F2 key 7 3 Information about birth The data shown in this tab all of it extracted from the Database are the following Information about birth e Date place institution civil register and book of register Information about the baptism e Date official church Complementary Names godfather godmother and sacramental book e Free space to introduce any information or link to any external file To update the Data contained in this tab you have three methods e Click the icon Update See 7 8 1 e Click on the menu What can I do now and after click on Introducir or cambiar Data of the Surname xxxxx See 6 3 e Press the F2 key 7 3 8 Information about will The data shown in this tab all of it extracted from the Database are the following Information about will e Date notary escritoire church book of wills and Codicils e Free space to introduce any information or link with any external file There are three methods for updating the Data contained in this tab General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 e Click the icon Update See 7 8 1 e Click on the menu What can I do now and after click on Add or change Data of the Surname xxxxx See 6 3 e Press the F2 key 7 3 9 Information about death The data shown in this tab all of it extracted from the Database are the following Information about death and burial e Cause of Death date of burial place of burial cemete
11. scccceececeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeceueeseeeseueeseueeseeesaneenaes 44 5 2 The Windows r SOUICES cccceececeececeeeeeceeceseeeeeseueeseueesseueeseeessaeeeseueessaeeesaas 45 5 3 The name of the inserted fileS ccccccccseecceeeceececeeeccececeueecseeceusessueeseeessueessess 45 94 TNE dates CONVENON scssi 46 5 5 The size of the buttonS n nnannannannanoenoannnnnnnnnnrnrrnrrnrrrrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnernernernene 46 5 6 The menu bar and the dynamic ICONS ccceeceseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeaaes 47 Oise NS MC AU Da E T A T E A AT 47 5 6 2 The dynamic icons bar Buttons sssoeeessssssseoseerssssssssserrssssssssserrrsssssssses 50 5 7 The background color cccceccceeccceeeceececeuceceecsucecueeeueeceusesseessusessuesseeessasesagss 51 5 8 Choosing the language ccceccceececeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeesueeseueeseessueesueeseeesaneesanes 51 5 9 Changing languages without exiting GDS ce cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneeeaeeenees 51 5 10 Changing the naming convention without exiting GDS ccccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeees 51 OSS TU soe cease sae E E E 52 6 1 Help during GDS operation ccccceecccseececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeesseesseeeeseeeesaeeesaes 52 6 2 Using F1 at any point Of GDS 20 eee cecccceeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeesaeesaeeeseesaeeesaees 52 623 What can MOO NOW secdcadsd ceendadecd ia a aa aia aie dae e aeai 52 DIOL MOY S cap n c
12. sssssssscccsssssssssssscccooees 292 18 Backup OF the Database soccsssssceeeccccssssceccocccsssscececossssssscecocosssssseceesosssssseeeosso 295 18 1 Function of Backup of the Database cccceccceeccceeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeaes 296 Moving GDS to anew PC seiceanna ee aea aaea EAEN 299 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 19 1 Moving GDS to a NEW PC 20 eee cc ceccccceececeeeeceeeeecaueeceueeeceuseseaeessueeessusessueeesaas 299 19 2 Maintaining GDS in tWO COMPUTES cceececeeccseeeceeeeceeeeaeeeseueeseesaeeeseeeeaaes 299 20 Frequently asked questions sscssssssceceococssssscccocccsssssececcsossssccceeccossssseecososssssseee 301 Zle Miscellany ceesre ennerien E 307 21 1 Documents from your word proceSsSoOr ss ssssssserserrrerrrrerrrrrrrtrererrrerrrerennt 307 21 2 The voice from the microphone of your PC ccc cceccceececeeeeeeeeseeeeseeteeeeneeeeaes 307 21 3 Addresses and Maps sriniiseenicrunnieor eni a a 308 214 EMUCTING Addres SGS aa S S 308 PANES DIS PAV Toxa uit ieerdaat yal uneliainanementanety 309 2O lS Olay ltl Oloras nat ctrce Sant E sie raditaice veennauutecsdaaaratuoraduoauereennaemecumanes 309 21s NE SOUNG WINDOW sxisimtestenanta sr umimuatevanl E deeamtuatevantdecemmteled 310 2120 GAlONO ANS estas sgecentidansusteneaaaseuedesaueeansmaua E EAEE 311 21 O21 Gre cOriam Calendar cenean bates maces eadees mata nda naes 314 2M Gee Su
13. 7 6 8 Direct relation from the Panel of the Individual Moving the mouse to any related Individual in the Individual Panel and Pressing the left button of the mouse it appears the Panel of this Individual This includes the Father the Mother the siblings the children the spouses and also the midwife of the birth the officiant godfather and godmother of the Baptism the witnesses of the Marriages the Notary of the Marriage Chapters and the Notary of the Will if any of them are also Individuals of the Database 7 6 9 Being named in any GDS report From any report of GDS provided you pass the mouse over of an existing Individual in the Database may Pressing the left button of the mouse it accesses to him her 7 6 10 Being shown in a photograph Moving the mouse over a photo provided that an Individual of the Database appears ina defined rectangle double clicking on the rectangle the Panel of this Individual will be shown 7 6 11 Advanced search of Individuals In this panel the user can choose the advanced search method according to the following criteria e Search by fields According to the Contents of the Data of the Individual All Individuals depending of the origin of the call e One Individual Depending of the origin of the call Page 69 e Ancestors of an Individual e Ancestors and collaterals of an Individual e Descendants of an Individual e First cousins of an Individual e Second cousins of
14. A Add the father and or of the mother if not already exist See the chapter Add a new Individual 7 4 B Add the child if not already exist C Have the Panel of the child Panel open You may already be in it since you have added him her just now The assignment of parents can be done at the same time you are adding this Individual assuming that the parents already exist in the Database D Go to the Tab of Parents and assign them following the instructions that GDS will show If during the assignment of parents GDS cannot determine in what place is this child in the list of siblings of the father or mother then a new panel of assignment of order in the list of siblings will appear This occurs when in the list of siblings there is one or more that do not have the date of birth assigned so GDS cannot determine the suitable place where to place the sibling in the list If the parents were not linked by any conjugal union then GDS will direct you to a panel to determine the information about this assignment of spouse Page 77 7 8 2 Updating other Information From the panel of Update of the Individual you can update all the basic and additional Data Here we describe the update of the Additional Data These are Additional Information Information of Surname Information about education titles and professions Information about birth and Baptism Information about the Marriages Information about will Infor
15. Being this manual an attempt to explain in some detail the operation of GDS your reading may not be done sequentially since we have made every effort to try to group the themes in a way that is easy to get to the one of your interest GDS is in continuous development so that the System can be downloaded multiple times from our site www gdsystem net updating your installation in a very easy way so you can always have the latest revision provided that is of the Same Version In the case of change of Version Version 7 0 has appeared four years after Version 6 0 but that Version has had 43 revisions that the users of that Version were downloading freely during that period there is always a special rate of migration from any previous Version so that your maintenance is in any case very economical It is recommended that at the same time of reading this manual you maintain GDS installed and running and accessing it in any case of need This facilitates the understanding of every paragraph Receive my warmest Welcome in the hope you will enjoy this manual This manual in its sixth Version contains the description of the functionality and the instructions of use of GDS up to the review 7 0 00 Future revisions or versions of GDS will be incorporated in subsequent versions of the manual so the version you are using in this moment may contain some functionality that is not contained described here Joaquim M Casals de Nadal President P
16. Save the edited data Figure 1 Display of the GDS Register That data are used by GDS just when communicating with Marshall System either through Internet or when printing a page to be sent by E mail or FAX GDS maintains all the other data and options that you have been decided in the computer registry But these are not used for anything other than the daily use of GDS For more Information about Registering GDS please go to the chapter Registration Panel See 3 3 For more Information about acquisition of the Database key please go to the chapter How to Acquire GDS See 3 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 3 2 The Database License You can create your Database at any moment and add people immediately At the moment you have one Individual introduced you will be able to register the Database but you can delay the registration as long as you introduce up to 50 Individuals All functions of GDS are available in any case so you can play with GDS without any other limitation GDS can work with as many Databases as you want However you can work with one Database at a time All Databases can be used free of charge up to limit mentioned in the previous paragraph A Database license is necessary for each Database A registered Database can be freely copied to another PC without need for reregistering it Please read 3 3 Registration Panel to understand the process of getting your Database register
17. This is the initial option when the image is open e Adjust the width to fit the window Sets the image to the width of the window e Zoom in x 1 5 Zoom the image by a factor of 1 5 e Zoom out 1 5 Reduces the image by a factor of 1 5 e Select a rectangle to show Select an area of the image for performing a zoom as per the area e Magnifying effect Lets to see specific areas of the image of a way as if they were watching from a magnifying lens e Return to normal state e Additionally in the bottom of the image there are indications of existence of an associated text file an associated voice recording of whether indication of existence of rectangles and indication of the existence of an address capable of showing a map If any of these signs are active clicking on them produces the desired effect See below the Content Content What includes a Photo or Document See also Contents of a Photo or Document 9 7 2 The information available when a Photo or Document is displayed is the following e The image itself In the case of multipage all the pages e The Title e The date of the Photo or Document e Up to 1000 rectangles with information about the contents of the image The information may be related to an Individual of the Database or the description of the rectangle The rectangles are acceptable in all the pages of a multipage document See 9 7 12 4 and 9 7 12 5 e A bar of information at bottom left with
18. Attention How does the Descendant Tree work For the realization of the Descendant Tree GDS requires the creation of the List of Ancestors of the Individual that the user wants to connect with ANY of his her Ancestors To do that the user has to ask for the ancestors of that Individual with any of the Reports of Ancestors List of Ancestors See 8 3 Graphic of Ancestors See 8 5 or Side Graphic of Ancestors See 8 6 This will cause the creation of the list ancestors of this Individual After that just accessing ANY of the ancestors the Descendant Tree can be requested To Print or create a PDF or TIF file both single page as multipage go to the bar icons Print Page 109 To See the details of the printing options access Printing of Reports or creation of PDF TIF or TXT files See 14 and subchapters To send an e mail with an attached PDF or TIF file with the contents of this list go to the icons bar Send this report via E mail See Sending Reports by Internet 15 1 8 To see the details of configuration of the file to attach access Configure sending a Graph by E mail See 15 1 1 To get large size prints or files access Printing or file creation of large format reports See 14 3 Clicking Preferences you will be able to change the characteristics of the graphic Preferences Text at bottom Author GOS Version 7 0 MARSHALL SYSTEM Athos away gdsystem net Font Text Bottom Lett Erase Font
19. Figure 80 Options of the Sequential Display of Images Carrousel From which you can control the process You can adjust the display according to your wishes So you can change the interval between Images in seconds indicate the first image to represent and if you want to see the Images at full screen do it with some adjustments To start the Carrousel click one of the two arrows indicating whether you want to go forward or backwards The Photos and Documents are represented one after another with the range indicated Clicking Stop the following panel appears General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 on DO oo Cancel 4 gt First image fq Full screen Real size at 100 Fitto screen And the process stops At this point you can change the parameters specified the interval and the way in which you want to see the Photos and Documents in Full Screen You can also ask the Carrousel to go in one direction or in its opposite namely chronological or anti chronological Carrousel in Full Screen If you decided to see the Carrousel in Full Screen for a few seconds up to the left of the Photos and Documents appears the following If you do nothing the box disappears To make it appear again move the mouse over the image The box states that you can stop the Carrousel when you want as well as change its direction If you stop the Carrousel the picture changes to From t
20. Page 197 The reading of TWAIN documents can be done from the Photos and Documents Album and in any of the panels of Individual at the moment of their Update Origenes EPSON Perfection V500 3 77 32 32 HP Photosmart PS6510 TWAIN 1 0 32 32 WIA EPSOWN Perfection V500 1 0 32 32 WIA HP Photosmart 6510 series NE 1 0 3 Figure 117 Specifying Scanner or TWAIN device 9 8 3 Choosing the format of the scanned file Escanning one page or multipage One page Photo of document of one page C Multipage Document Contract etc Format of the file to be created JPG Joint Photographic Experts Group POF Portable Document Format Adobe TIF Tag Image File Format Cancel Figure 118 Format of the scanned file From this panel the user choose whether the document will be of single page or multipage In case you choose the single page the file is saved in JPG format In the case of multipage the file is saved in PDF or TIF format according to your choice General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 8 4 Showing the thumbnail to accept the scanned image Appears immediately after the scanner returns control to GDS once the scanning operation is completed Turn SOF counter Clockwise Width fat pinels Height 1203 pixels Figure 119 Accepting a scanned image From this window you can perform the following settings e Turn the Photo or Do
21. To do this press the right button of the mouse when it is over the photo and choose the option Send an E mail with this image or do it from the menu Internet In the case of sending an e mail with the Photo or Document you can choose to send it in its real size or adjust its size reducing it to a given window so that the transmission will be faster See Sending an E mail with the Photo or Document attached 15 2 and Reduce the Image size before sending it 15 2 1 Print a Photo or Document To Print the image one page or the pages you specify go to the icon of Print To see the Options of Printing access Print a Photo or Document See 9 7 13 Page 161 9 7 2 Contents of a Photo or Document A Photo or Document contains the following elements A The image in itself the image is contained in a BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF file Whatever be the introduction of the image from scanner or by importing from another folder is never altered by Exception is the rotation and transposition of JPG files e B The Title this is the information that appears in the top of the image e C The Date of the image appears in the top of the image See Introducing Dates 7 8 3 for understanding the possible formats e D Rectangles of information the user can describe the contents of up to 1000 rectangles in the image Every one of the rectangles may contain a link to an Individual of the Database or an arbitrary text
22. above Note in the case you want to work with two or more computers read the section Maintaining GDS in two computers See 19 2 19 2 Maintaining GDS in two computers Once a Database is registered you have authorization to install it in more than one computer For example it is common to have GDS in a desktop and also in a laptop In any case the license is for a single user lt is important to note that there is no module of synchronization between Databases So the user should be aware that the updates should be made in one of the computers and transfer the Database to the other computer If you change two Databases then you will be not able to get the Data synchronized Therefore there are two options GDS has to be installed in both computers in any case A Two or more computers with internal hard disks Modify one of them and then copy the entire Database to the other or others In this situation access the section Moving to a new PC See 19 1 and follow the instructions expressed there Be careful with the indications done in the second paragraph above B Two or more computers with an external disk Both computers will use the same Database placed in the external disk In this case the limitation expressed above does not exist as it always modifies the same Database Anyway do not update the Database simultaneously in both computers so ensure that there is always only one GDS active at any time when you use a common external d
23. an extensive help system is available in any time Clicking in the menu Help Help Index or Pressing Ctrl F1 the in line Help Index appears Also clicking Help GDS Manual the full manual of GDS in PDF format will be open This manual is the most thorough information about all the functions of GDS Changing languages without exiting GDS See 5 9 will get you to the dynamic change of language Changing the naming convention without exiting GDS See 5 10 allows you to change the Convention of Surnames to the successive Individuals 6 2 Using F1 at any point of GDS E It is equivalent to click on the Help icon Immediately shows the page of Help for the open window 6 3 What can I do now During the implementation of GDS the use of this title of the menu allows the user to make available the list of the actions you can take constantly updated At any moment clicking on that title appears the list of things you can do The list is active also so if you click on one of the items of the list the Function will be performed or will tell you what to do This facility does not replace but complements any other system of reaching the GDS functions The access to any function by any means makes GDS do the same with no difference by the method of having reached it See the Hot keys See 6 4 The menu bar and the dynamic icons See 5 6 to understand the different systems of performing the functions of GDS General Family Doc
24. e B From any folder outside of the Data Directory A Creation of Multipage Documents from the scanner From the Photos and Documents Album call the Introduction from the chosen device Immediately the system asks if you want to make an acquisition of a single page document or on the contrary you wish to acquire a document with several pages The scanner will be in place and after examination of every page will ask to continue The size the quality and any other parameters can be chosen in every one of the scans The obtained file will have as many pages as scans we have made preserving its characteristics The file will be saved in PDF or TIF format specified by the user with the equivalent compression chosen for JPG If on the contrary you choose to make the acquisition of a single page document the system will create a file in JPG format In both cases the file will be placed in the Photos and Documents Album prepared for the adding the additional Information See the section Adding Photos or Documents from scanner See 9 8 1 B Creation of Multipage Documents from any external or internal folder This can be done from 1 the Photos and Documents Album or 2 directly from Multiple selection of Photos and Documents of any album of thumbnails Browser 1 From the Photos and Documents Album access to one or multiple Import of Images As with the acquisition from the scanner the system will ask if you want to create a multipage fi
25. its panel appears 5 New image Choose TWAIN device Choose Prefix of the name of new files Explore from EPSON i Perfection V500 Import from one to multiple images Specials ee Images without title Images without date assigned Select by individual Search an individual Selection by special condition The 35 images Images without any related individual Images without neither Date nor Title Advanced search for photos and documents Unclassified Images Selection by Date Images of given dates Between A given date C Before C After Selection by text 4 given Photography Full word Images with a given title o gt See list Images with a given text in a rectangle ee gt See list m By years o Astronomy 1 E amp Portraits 17 seo There exist 35 images in the PHOTO AND DOCUMENT ALBUM t Thematic albums Thematic index Alphabetical list of themes Search gt gt gt gt gt gt Astronomy 1 Children 4 at Portraits Portraits 17 Tourism 5 A Children 4 A Tourism 5 Figure 69 The Photos and Documents Album The panel of Photos and Documents Album contains the following sections to enter and view Photos and Documents Page 125 Adding new Photos and Documents New image e Choose TWAIN device From this control can be chosen the device from whi
26. lENCATIC SLE Ji i l3 L a y Ersio Ms Bi E EA Lc Individuals Equivalencies Photos and Documents Data Soul g Assign or change the Database directory folder Ctrl D Play with the DEMO Database analysis and statistics Ctri E Print Preview Print Ctrl P Update F2 Specify Scanner or TWAIN device Import Merge two Databases Export Backup of the Database Registry of the Database Edit data of the register Exit GDS Figure 191 Backup Access from the menu File General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 From the GDS termination session panel Thank you for using the GOS Time span of this session 0 41 18 Number of routines used 320 828 Remember to back up your Database To understand how to protect your Program and Data click on the Help icon below or press F1 Backup Backing up the Database Figure 192 Initiating Backup from the closing Panel Pressing the appropriate control it shows the following Backup of the Database How to recover 4 Database From this panel you run a back up your database To recover a database Data Directory from a backup proceed as Follows Indicate in which disk dive you want to make a copy Normally it be an external disk A Close GDS B Connect the backup disk to your computer Tou should ensure that sufficient capacity exists in the destination disk as it will C Identity the folder that i the copy you want to retrie
27. multiple of 100 Is leap year the one that is multiple of 4 with the exception of the secular years Within them is leap year the secular multiple of 400 Thus the Gregorian Calendar is composed of cycles of 400 years e in 400 years there are 400 4 4 seculars 96 leap years e of the 4 secular years only one is leap year multiple of 400 e in the cycle of 400 years we have 96 1 97 leap years and 400 97 303 common years Making the computation in days e 97 x 366 days 35 502 days e 303 x 365 110 595 days That makes a total of 146 097 days in the 400 years so the mean duration of one year in the Gregorian Calendar is of 365 2425 days In the 400 years of the cycle of the Gregorian Calendar these 146 097 days that are 20 871 7 days there is an exact number of weeks of 20 871 in such a way that in the 400 years of the cycle not only the cycle of common and leap years is repeated but also the cycle of weeks is also exact This means that taking a group of 400 years the next group is exactly equal The first week of the year the number 01 is the one that contains the first Thursday of January The weeks of a year go from the week 01 to the 52 with the exception of the years that finish in Thursday or Thursday or Friday if it is a leap year in which case the year has one more week the week 53 e Month period of 30 or 31 days with the exception of February that has 28 days in un common year and 29 days in a leap
28. you can safeguard the Data by just copying ALL the files of your Database Directory in a CD ROM or in an external drive Make the copy on a regular basis lf there are files that are not contained in the Database Directory and that are referenced explicitly by the user in some Individual Panel or other places it is your responsibility to the copy them in a safe place for secure portability Recovery of the Data In the case of failure of the System destruction of the computer or of the hard disk or any incident requiring the recovery of the Situation act as follows A Create a Directory Folder to be your Database Directory It does not need to have the same name as before It cannot be the Root Directory Cannot be C or DA B Copy ALL the files that were saved last time from your Database Directory If there were other than Database files such as indicated above it is your responsibility to place them in the same directories in which the originals were as GDS does not control the location of files that are not in the Database Directory and therefore believes that these files are placed in the right place as they were located at the moment of the creation of their hyperlink C Install the same Version of GDS that was installed or a newer version that you find in the web www gdsystem net D Start GDS E Assign the Database Directory as you created in the section A here above As of this point the recovery is comple
29. zo Print Cancel Figure 170 Printing a list indicating that does not fit Si the number of characters overrides the horizontal space of the page it is indicated If you accept the system reduces the size of the font to force that the list adjusts to the width of the document Alternatively you can choose to change to landscape mode or choose another paper size Preparation of the printing of the individual list Output option to printer PDF or TIF is Output to printer Output ta TT Colum characters 7 Control 4 T Certainty Printer x Prefix FirstName HF Photosmart 6510 series Aed I Kind of descendant Sind of descendan I First Mame where Meld D Also named T Throne name M Surname Father M Surname Mother T Suffix _ Governance period 25 2 Nickname Gender E 38 Orientation i Portrait Landscape Choose Printer Paper size Millimeters and quality Ad 210 297 mm width 210 Height 297 T Nobiliary Titles Quality of 600 dots per inch T Dynasty Lineage Printer preferences J Birth date Font name and size Font of the text Courier New Birthplace Country of birth l Death date Death place T County of death Cause of death Date of mariage Comments E i e mail Total Characters g7 4 101 see Preview Restore Font size Pages to print Number of pages f Print all fis n f i fis Pririt Cancel
30. 0 icon and start GDS If this is the first time the Cold Start Panel See 4 3 may be displayed e Go to the menu bar and the dynamic icons for explanation of how to act at this moment e If you are coming from Version 2 2 of GDS request Marshall Conversion to help you in the conversion of the Database e If you had Version 3 0 or 4 0 GDS will detect it and update your Database and Document and Photo Album automatically e If you had Version 5 0 or 6 0 the Database is compatible so it will remain unchanged except for some files of the Document and Photo Album This change is done automatically If the Database is not registered you will be asked to register by acquiring the License or may continue without Registering See Registration Panel See 3 3 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 When you start GDS if the Database is registered and the Database Directory is already assigned it boots makes one set of checks about the integrity of the Database and then shows the background panel of GDS opening also for your convenience the Initial Search Panel E Docu Ver gt Database babaa File Individuals Photos mer eee n Surnames What can ldo now Tools Window Image Help Internet Abbreviations and Signs ARE u INITIAL SEARCH PANEL Other methods List of the 1234 individuals By his her name Advanced Type a portion or all the first name of the desired individual s By
31. 11 of March The gap came from an inaccurate count of the number of days available to the tropical year according to the Julian Calendar which instituted a leap year every four believed that the tropical year was made up by 365 25 days while the correct figure is of 365 242189 or what is 365 days 5 hours 48 minutes and 45 16 seconds This more than 11 minutes every year had assumed that in the 1257 years lapsed from 325 to 1582 an accumulated error of about 10 days was created The Gregorian Calendar delayed close to 1 2 minute every year approx 26 seconds per year which means that it requires the adjustment of one day every 3300 years This difference proceeds of the fact that the translation of the earth around the sun does not match an EXACT number of days of rotation of the earth around itself When the center of the earth has traveled one full turn to the sun in around and is back to exactly the same point that it was a year ago it have completed 365 days and a little less of one quarter of day 0 242189074 for be exact To match the whole year with a number of days required periodic adjustments every certain number of years If the rule of the leap year every four years the years were exempted the years that were multiples of 100 except that the ones that are multiples of 400 being leap years The new rule of the leap years are made of the following way the basic period of the year is of 365 days but will leap i e will have 3
32. 2011 11 45 GDSCRM 14 01 2011 11 45 GEDCOM 14 01 2011 11 45 Nombre Descendants of Joseph N pdf Tipo PDF Files pdf Ti our FREE CutePOF Editor and do more with your POF documents Easily combine or plit POF files add security with password modify POF properties stamp headertooter and much more Help Try Free CutePDF Editor Figure 168 Indicating the name and place of the PDF file created by CutePDF General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Once the file is created you can view it with Adobe Reader send it as attached file in an e mail or write it in a memory pen and take it to a professional who has a plotter or similar device for Printing to the desired size Independent of the chosen size during the process of creation Page 269 14 5 Printing Preview The window of printing configuration always shows the Preview so you always know what you are going to print However in the listings of Names Surnames places of birth and death dynasties and lineages or houses there is a different mode of Preview To see it you can proceed to the preview icon in the icon bar when any of these lists are visible the Panel Search of Individual See 7 6 1 Last individuals displayed Joseph N Jones Figure 169 The list of Surnames requested from the search Panel of Individuals 14 6 Printing of lists of Individuals or creation of TXT file El particular c
33. 6 5 Search by Number of Sousa Ahnentafel To use this option follow the following procedure in the Individual Panel of the Individual that you want to be the basis of Sousa perform the search of the List of Ancestors Graphic of Ancestors or the Side Graphic of Ancestors GDS will show the requested report but at the same time will create an internal table of Ancestor of this Individual which is kept throughout the execution of the program or up to the moment you request another report of ancestors of another Individual The Individuals will be linked internally with this one and can be found directly by their number of Sousa Ahnentafel Therefore to find an Individual by his her number of Sousa Ahnentafel enter the number in the space provided and Click on the button of search by number of Sousa Ahnentafel To understand what is the number of Sousa Ahnentafel See the section 2 1 Page 67 7 6 6 List of Individuals When in search of one or more Individuals who match the conditions requested in the Database GDS creates a list with of all the ones meeting the criteria Only the columns that contain information are listed One of the columns is named Comments which helps to identify Individuals in the case they have duplicated names or surnames Access Tools Options Preferences Comments in the list of Individuals to delete or not the shown comments In any case and independenily of your choice if an Individual does not ha
34. Album To rebuild the Photos and Documents Album you have two ways 1 Click on the menu Photos and Documents Rebuild the Photo and Document album See Creation of the Photos and Documents Album See 9 5 2 If you do not need using to the Photos and Documents in this time or GDS is not in progress because you entered the Photos and Documents before of starting GDS at the moment of start GDS will check the Database Directory inquiring if there are added or removed Photos and Documents In this case it gives a warning to the user and performs the reconstruction automatically General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 To identify what are the Photos and Documents that have been added after reconstruction of the Photos and Documents of the album the best approach is from the panel of Photos and Documents Album go to the Unclassified Images control The new Images will be shown at the beginning of the browser Warning This procedure is not recommended because if the Photos and Documents Album is very large the Function of Rebuild the Photos and Documents Album can be very slow We strongly recommend not moving adding or deleting files in the Database Directory and letting GDS do the total management of it 9 8 9 Adding Photos and Documents from the texts of the Individual Panel You can add a Photo or Document in the Photos and Documents Album from any of the areas devoted to text of the Basic information the Ad
35. Aloums By Other CONCE DUS an ieee ae ties 130 9 3 4 The Thematic Albus ss sescsssnnettaxeieocd iaaa a a 133 9 3 Litof THe mate AlDUMS arise ctncistts eas eb dvncevaue a 136 9 3 6 The Photo or Document and its positioning in the Photos and Documents DOU EN EEN IRE AE A IAA A E ENEA DTI A EEA EN E EEEE 137 9 4 Browser Collection of Photos and Documents cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeens 139 9 4 1 Browser Collection of Photos and Documents ccc cee ceecc cesses eeeeees 140 9 4 2 Carrousel of Photos and Documents cccccccccessseeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeees 141 9 4 3 Display of multiple Photos and Documents cc eeeccecccceceeeesseeeeeeeeees 144 9 4 4 Selection of multiple Photos and Documents ccccceccccceeceesseeeeeeeeees 145 DAS FOO Many ODEN WANG OW Si onn E nae 149 9 5 Creation of the Photos and Documents Album cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 150 9 6 Rebuild the Photos and Documents AIDUM 0ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeees 151 9 7 The Photos and Documents in GDS ec cececccceseceneeeeeeceneeeesaueeensaneeeseneeeenanens 152 9 7 1 Display Photo Or DOCUMENE orsin a a 153 9 7 2 Contents of a Photo Or Document 2 0 0 ee eeecccccccceceeeeseeeecceeeeeaseaeeeeeeeeees 162 O13 Display OF a Photoor DOCUMEC I aeranta n 162 9 7 4 Display options of the Photo or Document ee eecceecceeceeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 162 oo Photo
36. Apply Figure 114 User Options JPG and TIF Options Factors of Recording JPG and TIF files of compressed JPG GDS uses the JPG compression system for storage of the Photos and Documents The standard JPG or JPEG was designed for great factors of compression in the Image files without losing the level of quality expected Today is probably the most widely used method for storing Image files JPG is based in the fact the human eye cannot distinguish certain variations in the color or other aspects of the image and consequently using a complex mathematical method of compression the image file is reduced considerably but without preserving exactly the original image This loss of quality most of the times not distinguishable allows very large compression factors A typical factor of compression of the JPEG can be of 10 to 12 times With the purpose of regulating the factor of compression and in consequence the level of quality of the image to be reproduced more compression means more loss of quality there are a set of parameters that control it In particular the factors of chrominance and luminance Page 191 We have experienced that with a chrominance factor of 30 and a luminance factor of 24 the level of compression is very high between 10 and 12 and however the loss of quality is negligible We recommend that except for testing do not alter these factors In the case of the multipage TIF files GDS uses the sam
37. Aunts of Individuals potentially duplicated in the Individuals potentially duplicated in the Database Databaze Figure 144 Search of Individuals potentially duplicated 1 Page 247 From the Statistics of the Database Pressing in the corresponding control Number of registers Deleted register ss is sch eewn ee we Without Fi Without Without Without Without Without Without Without m Without Without Without Percentage Men Women 52 48 over 1234 individuals Average age men alive 61 years old over 90 men Average age women alive 67 years old over 106 women Average age at death 52 years old over 69 men Average age at death 54 years old over 52 women Average number of children 3 1 over 290 men with children Average number of children 3 27 over 261 women with children Average age at first child 26 7 years old over 60 men with childr first child 23 5 years old over 75 women with chil search the individuals poteritially Statistics of Hames Last Names Places E mit repeated f Search for all persons in the Database that may be repeated Figure 145 Search of Individuals potentially duplicated 2 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 From the menu Individuals Integrate two Individuals File meee Individual search Add an Individual Integrate two Individuals Figure 146 Search of Individuals potentially duplicated 3 In this case opens
38. Change of Language in Real time B Use of the nomenclature of two Surnames and Anglo Saxon C Individual Database including additional Data D General and particular Document and Photo Album E Network of Individuals with family relations F Data Sources G Information about Surnames H Network of documentation Reports Full Display of the Individual record List of Ancestors and Consanguinity Graphic of Ancestors Side Graphic of Ancestors List of descendants Descendants Graph family relations Descendant Tree Analysis of Surnames Analysis of Names Surnames and places of birth and death Life Span Graph Number of alive J Conversion from previous versions K GDS Integration of two Databases Identification of Individuals Potentially duplicated integration and a guided integration to ensure consistency L Import and export of GEDCOM files Export a file of text or Excel M Creation of the own web site N Creation of the HTML page of an individual O Delivery of photos graphs and Reports by E mail P Creation of PDF files TIF TXT or multipage of any report of text or graphic Q Link with your scanner or any TWAIN device A Massive Changes of Texts S Function of Equivalencies of Names Surnames and places of birth and death to facilitate the search of Individuals with Names of Surnames etc that differ from the ones of their ancestors due to a name change or just because different expression of the
39. Children Childrenand 3 Generations One less Gnemore Ali generations Display ornot Limit of Change limit Life span Number of 4 only grandchildren Ls generation generation spouses generations 24 graph living There have been found 14 descendants of John Bill T Jones e John Bill T Jones 1879 Carolyn F Baker 1878 v 1 August M Jones 1907 t1988 Marilyn B Johnson 1914 t2008 Eley 2 August N Jones 1941 Mirta R Carter 1938 bey 3 Erasmo R Jones 1970 i key 3 Isabelo R Jones 1973 Ev 2 John Bill N Jones 1943 Marilyn C Hall 1944 bey 3 Rodrigo A Jones 1971 i keyf 3 Mathilda A Jones 1973 i hey 3 Carla A Jones 1982 y 2 Joseph N Jones 1945 Marilyn G Thomas 1948 oof 3 Maud V Jones 1971 y 3 Xabier V Jones 1974 poo h 3 Aristotle V Jones 1976 y 1 Bill M Jones 1910 rann 1 Jaimita M Jones 1916 Figure 51 The List of descendants The user can decide the number of generations in the display Also through the use of the mouse you can expand or contract the descendants of an Individual Note In the case of wanting to print the report the print is made of all generations We recommend printing it in landscape format since there is no control about the printed width and may be the case of the width goes beyond the limits of the page See also Descendants Graph See 8 8 Note From this panel you can control the number of genera
40. Directory The old name is kept for later use e 4 Integrates the GDS5 DAT file changing the data needed to have been required by the previous operation e 5 Integrates the GDS5 IDX file changing all the numbers of control adapting to the new position of every register e 6 Integrates the GDS5 DA2 and GDS5 D2 files with the same philosophy e 7 Integrates the GDS5DEL DAT and GDS5DEL DA2 files with the same criteria e 8 Deletes the GDS5 ORD file This will be created later from scratch e 9 Copies the GDS5_xxxx ADL files changing the name according to the change of numbers of control e 10 Copy the xxxxxxx AD1 files If there is a match the user is asked to accept the replacement or not e 11 Removes the ALBUM2 FOT file and creates it again from scratch Page 231 e 12 Reboot the Database e 13 Takes a Statistical Analysis of the resulting Database During the integration of the GDS5 DAT GDS5 DA2 and GDS5_xxxx ADL files the system analyzes the contents of the texts and searches the case of mentions of files that have been changed In that case adapts the text to the new names See the point 3 above This process is not performed in the files xxxxxxxx AD1 See The GDS Database See 12 Note If your desire is to analyze the impact in the integration of the Database after seeing the Individuals who are potentially duplicated and in consequence integrating the Individuals for ensuring the integrity of the Database See Integrat
41. Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 FoSaTmeer i x Eo TOFI H LI W CI S ai Path of the web Specify the path of the Web Ds 5 d Dades alex J All Windows 4Pls J Apli _ Arbol QaArchivos_pst_de Outlook _ Arey BlackBerry Dades per aval Un Laser dbd9sbd66567 81 e2bSbebd 4 Del escritorio del ordenador Sol ropbos Fiesta Centenario Jos Mara de Nadal Vilardage Formato Word ldsLCAM GRAFICOS Instalador Whw are Player Investigaci n y Ciencia YCE Jamaica 2007 _08 Junk mM mes _ Figure 181 Choosing the output Folder of the files of the web Then you will decide the Title and aspect of the web pages The aspect includes the background and the type of font Page 281 Specify the title and aspect of the Web Web of Name Ml Surname Background image Color of the Font Web of Name M Surname TYE Q Anderson gd Back Cancel Figure 182 Choosing the background and the font of the texts of the web And finally you will indicate the contents that you want to export Observe that if the web has to be public you have to care about the legislation on the publication of Personal data General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 _eation of The personal Weg Contents of the web Specify the content of the eb jf Personal image M Texts of all information W Surnames files if Documentary Source files W tonal miorm
42. File Index of Titles of the Photos and Documents Album File of Sequential Access One register per Photo or Document Content of the Title Chronological order Content o Name Photo String of 64 bytes Name of the file of Photo or Document without extension Foot Photo String of 71 bytes Contents of the Text ALBUM SUB File Index of the Photos and Documents Thematic Album File of Sequential Access Maintains the information of access of the Themes of the Thematic Album that are in the xxxxxxxx FBS files Every register starts by ROOT The symbol is the separator that indicates an indentation For Example ROOT Museums Egipcian Art Brooklyn Museum of Art signifies that the Thematic Aloum Brooklyn Museum of Art is inside Egipcian Art and this is inside Museums Additional files created by GDS GDS5_ xxxx ADL Files of Additional Information Files of Sequential Access Maximum one file per Individual xxxx signifies the Number of Control Thus the ADL file of the individual with Number of Control 1234 is GDS5_ 1234 ADL Content Free content in ASCII or RTF code There is no limitation for its size It is created by GDS at the moment of Update of the data of the Individual in the tab of Additional Information XXXxXXXXX AD1 Files of information of Surname Files of Sequential Access Maximum one file per Surname Xxxxxxxx signifies the Surname of reference Thus the AD1 file of the Surname Schmith is Schmith AD1
43. In case of creating a file this will be a TXT file Any of the following Reports can be printed At the time of Print you can select the pages that you wish Print Report of errors found in the linking chains List of Ancestors and consanguinity Statistics of the Database Analysis of the Surnames Information of a Surname List of descendants Lists of Individuals under conditions of search List of all Data Sources Information of a Data Sources Graphs Reports In case of creating a file this will be a PDF or TIF file The following graphic Reports correspond that may occupy one or more pages GDS generates them to be mounted in the form of collage creating a multipage graph Full record display of the Individual Graphic of Ancestors General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Side Graphic of Ancestors Descendant Tree between two Individuals Family relation between two Individuals Descendants Graph Printing of an image GDS can print an image It uses a special panel which you manage the features of the desired impression Size of the image horizontal and vertical margins quality of the image Title of the image number of pages features of the Printer etc Additional files and of Surnames The files with extension ADL Additional and AD1 of Surname behave identical to the ASCII Reports mentioned above see Configuration of the printer or file to c
44. Microsoft Page 235 In the case of specify XLS it creates a file identical to the TXT with delimiter of Tab This file is opened directly by Microsoft Excel If once have worked with him you want to save it with the new Excel format it will ask whether to retain the original format of the text or you want to transform in an Excel format of the final version When not working with the file in text format in the future recommend answer No to the question Name of the output file The system suggests a name You can change tt Delimiter of fields Only for TXT file specification The fields of Data will be separated by this delimiter The system eliminates repetition of this delimiter automatically if there exist in the file so there is no confusion with the reception program Header Line You can choose there one line that identifies the fields or not Internal dates format You can choose multiple output formats General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 13 3 The GEDCOM Files The GEDCOM standard was created by the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter day Saints LDS Church to provide a flexible system flexible and with a uniform format addressed to the interchange of Genealogical data GEDCOM is the acronym of GEnealogical Data COMmunication Its purpose is the promotion of the interchange of Genealogical information and the development of the possibility of communicate different computer programs helping ge
45. Move the mouse up to the upper left corner of the face of the Individual press the left button and without releasing it move the mouse up to get a rectangle that covers the space you desire For example the face of the Individual General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Exit of update Oo Add Change Bee Recording Document d dg fess Remove red eyes Figure 97 Assigning a rectangle of the Photo to an individual At the moment of releasing the button of the mouse it disappears and the box of Add Change Delete or Exit is changed by the following picture Exit of update Database Text describing Exit Figure 98 Choosing Individual in Database or Text describing At the same time the rectangle is flashing with colors white and red The existing rectangles are fixed in red Page 177 Choose the Database option if an Individual if you want to link this rectangle to an Individual of the Database See also Assign a text to a rectangle of the Photo or Document if you want to assign a text instead Click on Exit if you did something wrong That goes directly to the panel of search of Individuals for your choice of who he she is Once you have entered a rectangle you can repeat the operation as many times as desired with the aim of fully describe the spaces of the Photo or Document Once the operation is done you can exit or continue
46. Photo or Document at Full Screen Places the Photo or Document in Full Screen The Options are listed If the chosen option is fit to screen then the arrow keys of the keyboard are used to jump to the following or previous Photo in the active Album In any other option if the Photo or Document occupies more than the Screen of the computer you can move the image with the left button of the mouse Page 165 9 7 6 Choosing the type of display at Full Screen From this window of the panel of Options you can determine which is the preferred mode of representing any Photo or Document when displayed at Full Screen Language Preferences Full screen images display options Real size at 100 f Fit to screen Fit on Width C Fit to height Fit the smaller side Fit the larger side Accept Cancel Apply Figure 90 User Options Photo at Full Screen e Real Size at 100 the Photo or Document is represented in its actual size in points If the Photo or Document has fewer points than the points of your screen then do not completely fill the Screen and the empty space is the color defined in the User Options relative to the Photos and Documents If the Photo or Document has more points than the screen whether horizontally vertically or both sides it is not retouched Pressing the left button of the mouse on any point of the Photo or Document without releasing it you can move it in any direction with the purpose of disp
47. See 8 2 Initiating the GDS operation and 8 13 Function of Search of Events Page 43 5 1 Choosing the background image For the creation of the web you can choose one image for the background from the ones shown in this table f z AL JUF TT gt 2 i laa Pee r 4 4 SP ae sn ae A ANE ST ANS SRA Y chr y AY Sa 4 ee ACAN wA ALA 4 re 2 lt i A m o on ree y MOIE i r r ray a D x gt A i i ix 1 P i EA 7 Figure 15 Choosing the background image during the creation of the Web General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 5 2 The Windows resources GDS searches in the system the existence of four programs external to GDS but are used if the search is positive These are List of the external programs GDS has found the following external programs ready for use These are the programs that will be used if they are found to be needed Text processor rich compatible C Program Files x86 Microsoft Office Officel 2 wINWORD EXE Text processor rich type Word 2007 C Program Files x86 Microsoft Office Officel 2 wINWORD EXE Text processor Plain C Windows system32 NOTEPAD EXE Sound recorder Internet browser C Program Files x86 Internet Explorer iexplore exe Electronic mail C PROGRA 2 MICROS 1 0fficel 2 0UTLOOK EXE Figure 16 The Windows resources Text processor If for example the Microsoft Word word pro
48. To check it s posterior you can use the function of Database analysis and statistics from the main menu and correct the situation manually For your information GDS will do the following 5 Change Primary Directory Cancel Figure 133 Instructions for the integration of two Databases It is assumed that e The two Databases do not have the any common Individual If there are common Individuals the user must manually correct the Situation using the functions of Statistics and Analysis of the Database See 8 12 and Integration of duplicated Individuals in the Database See 13 4 at the end of the process of integration e The two GDS Databases are contained in two well known directories e The Database Directory now is the recipient of the information and for this effect it is called Primary Directory e The user chooses the Directory from which the data will be integrated with the Primary Directory This is called Secondary Directory This integration of Databases is ideal for the cases in which two families have been developing Databases independently because a conjugal union decided to integrate their Databases to continue from this point with a unique Database Normally in these cases there are no common Individuals in both Databases End result The Primary Database The current Data Directory gets incremented its number of registers by the registers existing in the Secondary Database so the total number of
49. Version 7 0 Sources and the Surnames application you can create a hyperlink to any file The conditions of use are the same tan the ones expressed in the paragraph Other files introduced manually above 12 1 Internal dates format The format of any Date field in GDS is expressed with two fields of 10 characters each Primary field ddyPy mm Siyyyy Alternative field Ad2P2mm2Szyyyy2 Where dd is the primary day see exceptions mm is the primary month see exceptions and yyyy1 is the primary year P1 is the first primary separator and S1 the second primary separator dd2 is the alternative day mm2 is the alternative month yyyy2 is the alternative year P2 is the first alternative separator and S2 is the second alternative separator Exact day Primary field The first separator and the second separator are slash The Alternative field bb bb bbbb b means a blank space Example Thus 23 12 1967 signifies December 23 1967 Uncertain dates The first primary separators values are 1 to 7 Ato D and Z with the following meanings 1 circa 2 before 3 after 4 little before 5 little after 6 doubtful D unknown Z destroyed disappeared 7 doubtful day 8 doubtful month 9 doubtful year A doubtful day and month B doubtful day and year C doubtful month and year Example 23312 1967 means after December 23 1967 Between two Dates The uncertainty of a date between two date
50. When the mouse Is passed over the rectangle a window is opened with information of the Individual name age at the moment of the photo etc or the text associated In the case of Multipage Documents you can assign rectangles in any of the pages e E A document of Text can be a Microsoft Word document or of the word processor of the user e F A voice recording describing the Photo or Document acoustically e G The associated address of the Photo or Document this Function connects directly with Google Maps for viewing the map See Addresses and Maps See 21 3 9 7 3 Display of a Photo or Document Any Photo or Document can be displayed in several ways in the Screen of your computer Go to Display options of the Photo or Document See 9 7 4 with the aim of understanding the different modes Several Photos or Documents can be displayed simultaneously Go to Display of multiple Photos and Documents See 9 4 3 To view the Photos and Documents one by one at set intervals access Carrousel of Photos and Documents See 9 4 2 To understand how the mouse acts while moving in over the Photo or Document go to Moving the mouse over the Photo or Document See 9 7 8 From the Photo or Document you can access to the Panel of any Individual of Individuals of the Database who is linked to this Photo or Document Go to Access to the Panel of an individual of the Photo or Document See 9 7 10 9 7 4 Display options of the Photo or Documen
51. You will get a hand in the mouse as well as the rectangles that were previously assigned At the same time appears to the upper right a new box with the Indication of Add Change Delete or Exit It must be on Add e Activate the Change button Point to the rectangle you want to change its content As of this point you can go to the assignment of Individual or of text See 9 7 12 4 or 9 7 12 5 with the provision that the rectangle will change the contents but will preserve the coordinates General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 7 12 8 Create a Word document associated to the Photo or Document To Associate a Word document or Document Photo one act the following way View the Photo or Document Place it in update mode You can do this with four different ways Press F2 or Access to the icons bar and click on the Update icon or Go to the menu What can I do now Update data of this image or Press the right button of the mouse over the Photo or Document You will see a drop down window Then go to Update i 2 3 4 Sr Sr S To the right of the Photo or Document will appear a set of controls for performing a set of functions Press on Document Documert Creates a document associated to this i imageb gt Jea J neoez Figure 105 Creating a Word document associated to the Photo or Document If you have Word installed it will be opened Notice that the name of the file wil
52. about the export appears General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 The function of export to a GEDCOM file should not be used to create backup copies of your Database and it is solely designed to send genealogical information to other genealogical programs having the GEDCOM import function Remember that the GEDCOM export function transmit solely the textual information plus the family links but does not export the images neither other documents Additionally that function does not necessarily respects the internal control number of the individuals If you want to make a back up of your Database go to the help chapter named Backup of the Database If you want to move your GDS to another computer go to the help chapter named Moving GDS to a new PC If you want to maintain two computers with the same Database go to the help chapter Mantaining GDS in two computers Do you want to continue with the export No Avda _ Figure 140 Warning during the Export toa GEDCOM file The user decides the Individuals to be included in the output file All Individuals Search by fields One Individual The Ancestors of an Individual The Ancestors and collaterals of an Individual The Descendants of an individual The first or Second cousins of an individual The nephews uncles aunts of an individual You can combine the search with other complementary searches in a way that you can finally h
53. actions of integration EQU with the information on Equivalencies Image files xxxxxxx BMP xxxxxxx JPG xxxxxxx JPEG xxxxxxxx PNG xxxxxxx TIF XXXXXXX TIFF XXXXXXX ICO XxXxxxxx GIF xxxxxxx PDF Exist one of these for every component of the Photos and Documents Album Other Database files any file that has an association with an existing application in your operating system Files DOC DOCX WAV AVI MOV MP3 XLS XLSX etc Files not in the Database but accessible from GDS Any file accessible through the linking technique See the detailed description Basic files GDS5 DAT Main information file with information about Individuals Direct access file One register per individual The number of register corresponds with the Number of Control of the individual If an individual is deleted from the Database the register is signaled as available and it is reused at the moment of adding a new Individual Content e Naming Convention Integer of two bytes Value 0 for Spanish Convention 1 for Portuguese 2 for Anglo Saxon e Type of child Integer of two bytes Value O for Legitimate child 1 for Illegitimate 2 for Adoptive 3 for Legitimated 4 for Natural 5 for Recognized 6 for Legitimated after subsequent marriage 7 for Multigenerational descendant via father s line 8 Multigenerational descendant via mother s line 9 Doubtful filiation and 99 for Filiation unknown Prefix String of length 70 bytes Name Stri
54. automatically create the IF2 associated files See Database See 12 Page 199 The Import of multiple Photos or Documents can lead to create as many files as they are in the source Directory or alternatively create a single document with the integration of all the Documents In this case GDS creates a multipage TIF or PDF file that includes all the pages of all the imported files Importantly in this case the sizes of every page can be different so the end file will contain a set of identical number of pages as the sum of the pages of all the imported files but with not necessarily the same size in each page In the case of Multipage Documents you can choose the page you want as thumbnail representing the file in the Photos and Documents Album For the Treatment of Multipage Documents access Multipage Documents See 9 9 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 8 6 Choosing multiple photos From this panel you can select one or more Photos and Documents to be imported to GDS you can use the Shift and Ctrl keys in the same manner as used in Windows any other application in order of select more than one Photo or Document When only one is selected it is seen in the right side of the panel The Photos and Documents may be formed by one mix of BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF files Select the documents that you want to import to GDS from this panel The documents can come from a card of a Digi
55. bar and click on the Update icon or 3 Go to the menu What can I do now Update data of this image or 4 Press the right button of the mouse over the Photo or Document You will see a drop down window Then go to Update To the right of the Photo or Document will appear a set of controls for performing a set of functions Press on Modify Title We see a panel where you will enter the Title that you wish for this Photo or Document Type the new title of the mage In the farm Figure 94 Establishing the Title of one Photo or Document This can be done as often as is desired General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 7 12 3 Assign the date of the Photo or Document View the Photo or Document Place it in update mode You can do this with four different ways 1 Press F2 or 2 Access to the icons bar and click on the Update icon or 3 Go to the menu What can I do now Update data of this image or 4 Press the right button of the mouse over the Photo or Document You will see a drop down window Then go to Update To the right of the Photo or Document will appear a set of controls for performing a set of functions Press on Modify date Appears the Panel Introducing Dates See 7 8 3 Assign the date in which the Photo or Document was created Do not confuse this date with the date of the file which is usually later This can be done as often as it is desired 9 7 12 4 Assign a rectang
56. birth Without i Without TAtCHEeT 22 Hithout MICKEY ass nsnnn m m Without parents Without children Without spouses not of the father Percentage Men Women 527 46 over 1234 individuals Average age men alive 61 years old over 90 men Average age women alive 67 years old over 106 women Average age at Average age at Average number Average number Average age at death 52 years old over 69 men death 54 years old over 527 women of children 3 1 over 290 men with children of children 3 2 over 261 women with children first child 26 7 years old over 60 men with childr first child 23 5 years old over 75 women with chil Search the individuals potentially Statistics of Names Last Names Places E xit repeated Figure 61 Statistical Analysis of the Database From this report there is access to the list of Individuals for every one of the above descriptions just clicking in any of the lines with content ATTENTION The Analysis of the Database takes some time to complete To Print or create a TXT file both single page as multipage go to the bar icons Print To See the details of the Options of printing access Configuration of the printer or file to create See paragraphs 14 and To send an e mail with a TXT file attached to the Contents of this list go to the bar icons Send this report via E mail See 15 2 Page 115 8 To send an e mail with an attached T
57. case the number can be changed from the List of Descendants panel at real time General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Comments in List of Individuals In the Panel of List of Individuals See 7 6 6 one special column appears for every individual to identify any other related individual as spouse father mother or sibling This is especially useful when only the name of the individual is known but not the Surname so this column helps his her identification if there are repeated names in the list GDS Always include one relation in the list of individuals that do not have an assigned Surname however if the option is checked this relation is presented in any case and in consequence it appears in all the Individuals of the list Maximum number of Surnames in the Surnames Display Here indicates the maximum number of Surnames entering in the calculation of the Surnames of an individual See List of Surnames See 8 9 Sounds GDS indicates by voice the welcome to the system as well as some other Indication of the status of the open windows This option activates or deactivates these voice warnings JPG and TIF Options Options Language Preferences Full screen images GDS start optians Authorizations Recording factors for JPG and type JPG compressed TIF files The image compression ratio of JPG files can be adjusted with the Chrominance and the Luminance Factors among others and this also determines the quality
58. collection of thumbnails of the Photos and Documents Albums Index of this chapter 9 4 1 Browser Collection of Photos and Documents 9 4 2 Carrousel of Photos and Documents 9 4 3 Display of multiple Photos and Documents 9 4 4 Selection of multiple Photos and Documents 9 4 5 Too many open windows Page 139 9 4 1 Browser Collection of Photos and Documents Shows the thumbnails of the images of an aloum arranged chronologically Sequential Display See 2 Fhotography r Assign images to themes Assign one of these images to the panel of Joseph M Jones Figure 78 The Browser thumbnails of a Photos and Documents Album Being a Browser any chronological aloum of Photos and or Documents you arrive at it from any of the following situations e 1 By requesting the Photos and Documents of an Individual from the Individual Panel or from the Photos and Documents Album e For any of the calls from the Photos and Documents Album 2 For the Import of Multiple Images from other directories 3 by any of the 6 options for Selection with special conditions 4 by any of the four options by date 5 by any of the four selections by text 6 by any of the years indicated in the column for years and 7 by any entry in the structure of Thematic Albums or Alphabetical list of Themes See 9 2 In the case that in an album exists only one Photo or Document the browser is not displayed and directly appears t
59. end of every four years a single day should be intercalated where the month had been previously inserted that is immediately after of the Terminalia that day is now called the Bisextum Bissextum comes from bis sixth The 24 of February was called by the Romans ante diem sextum Kalendas Martias in the leap years the day 25th was called the ante diem bis sextum Kalendas Martias and not ante diem quintum Kalendas Martias as in the normal years From here comes the name Leap bis sextum that is two times six Jules Caesar added a day to july month of his birth for aggrandizement Augustus did the same in August because he would not be less than his predecessor Both days were withdrawn of February which happened to have 28 Given the decline of this month compared to the others added the day of the leap years to it The imperfection of the Julian Calendar gave rise in the year 1582 the Pope Gregory XIII appointed Louis Lilio and the German Jesuit Christopher Clavius the reform that will give life to the known as Gregorian Calendar This reform had two main Aspects On one hand since the equinox of spring had advanced 10 days these days were removed for adjusting the cycle of the seasons This adjustment took place on Thursday the 4th of October of 1582 so the next day was considered Friday 15th of October Also for getting that this result could be maintained in the future it was agreed that the leap years having thre last two figures
60. functions that can be performed with the Photos and Documents Index of this chapter 9 7 12 1 Treatment of the Photo or Document Update 9 7 12 2 Assign a Title to the Photo or Document 9 7 12 3 Assign the date of the Photo or Document 9 7 12 4 Assign a rectangle of the Photo or Document to an individual of the Database 9 7 12 5 Assign a text to a rectangle of the Photo or Document 9 7 12 6 Remove a rectangle of the Photo or Document 9 7 12 7 Change the contents of a rectangle of the Photo or Document 9 7 12 8 Create a Word document associated to the Photo or Document 9 7 12 9 Create a voice record associated to the Photo or Document 9 7 12 10 Crop a rectangle from the Photo or Document New partial photo 9 7 12 11 The photo in the Panel of the Individual 9 7 12 12 Assign a fraction of the photo to the Individual Panel 9 7 12 13 User Options relative to the Photos and Documents Page 171 9 7 12 1 Treatment of the Photo or Document Update Any Photo or Document of the Photos and Documents Album can be treated in different ways with the aim of completing the documentation associated with it as well as for collocate it in the right place of all the Albums to which it is associated See The Photo or Document and Its positioning in the Photos and Documents Album See 9 3 6 To actuate on a Photo or Document do the following View the Photo or Document Place it in update mode You can do this with
61. graph represents the Side Graphic of Ancestors up to ten generations and is presented so that it can be printed stored in a PDF or TIF file or sent by e mail Ancestors of 5 Generations Type 3 to 9 for One less One more he aah Seer Peete 0 for 10 generation generation pec or Brae images tejer zes Exit Ancestors of Joseph N Jones February 3rd 1945 San Francisco CF August A Jones harch iih iT dar Proclace EF canmtar bih Jiii ie Praco CF karasa A Jotas Decemba Tach 1531 Manem Francisco OF June ih iii La diaria tin Doris iio i 3 7 15 Hi GS Version 7 0 MARSHALL SYSTEM HEC Mei gies Sienn net Figure 49 The Side Graphic of Ancestors Optionally shows the Photo of the Individual if there is enough room in each of the rectangles of each Individual General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 By clicking with the left button on any name appearing in the graph you will access the record of the selected Individual If the Individual has Ancestors clicking the right button a new identical graphic appears with that Individual being the base of the new report Every Individual is identified with his her Sousa Ahnentafel If you have deployed a new graphic clicking the right button in an Individual of the original graphic then the number of Sousa Ahnentafel refers to the original To Print or create a PDF or TIF file both single page as multipage go to the bar
62. has more functions than the ones supported by GEDCOM To backup your Database use the instructions given in Backup of your Database See 18 One of the characteristics of the GEDCOM standard is that allows the creation of special tags that represent some particular data of the exporting program but that are not defined in the standard GDS has some functions not existing in other Genealogy programs as well as not contemplated in the GEDCOM standard Thus any export of aGEDCOM file from GDS is compatible with the GEDCOM language but has some additional tags that are interpreted only by GDS at the moment of performing an import Any other programs will not import that particular data All these particularities are in any case explained at me moment of performing the export for the information of the user Page 237 13 3 1 Import of aGEDCOM file From this panel you can import to GDS a GEDCOM file creating a new Database with the contents of that file or alternatively adding the GEDCOM file data to your Database The access to the import function is from the menu File Import Import from a GEDCOM file File Individuals Equivalencies Photos and Documents Data Sources Surnames What can Ido now Tools W Assign or change the Database directory folder Play with the DEMO Database analysis and statistics Print Preview Print Update Specify Scanner or TWAIN device Import Export Backup of the Database Reg
63. in the Photo or Document or subjects of interest that you want to highlight explaining its content you can define portions of General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 the Photo or Document as rectangles with information GDS admits up to 1000 rectangles for every Photo or Document In a multipage document admits rectangles in any of the pages which means that in one family Photo or Document with multiple Individuals you can Indicate who is every one of them whether in the Database or not In the case of assignment of a rectangle to an Individual of the Database GDS automatically add this Photo or Document to the Photos and Documents Album of the Individual In fact this is the only way of assigning a Photo or Document to an Individual to allow the access to him her when you request his her particular Photos and Documents Album A Photo or Document will thus be contained in the diverse Photos and Documents Albums of all the Individuals who appear in the Photo or Document as well as in the Aloums of Themes related by the fact of defining a rectangle with one description as you will see later In a multipage document you can place rectangles in any of the pages Clicking on this will allow you to create change or delete a rectangle of the Photo or Document You will see in the top right of the Photo or Document a box with the options Oo Add E Change Delete g Exit At the same time if there are defined rectangl
64. is irreversible and eliminates the image files as well as the associated files from the Data Directory 9 4 5 Too many open windows In the case of having opened a large number of windows simultaneously may occur that the system runs out of virtual memory GDS uses lots of memory to keep windows open simultaneously so we recommend that you close some of them before further use Page 149 9 5 Creation of the Photos and Documents Album GDS maintains the Photos and Documents Album automatically The Photos and Documents Album contains information about all the Photos and Documents and is the responsibility of GDS to create the diverse Photos and Documents Albums on request At the moment of adding modify or remove a Photo or Document GDS automatically updates the Album However this operation vanishes when the user adds a Photo or Document manually to the Data Directory without doing it through the procedures of GDS of Inclusion and maintenance of Photos and Documents Moving files to the Database Directory does not alter the Photos and Documents Album but the file is added However the Photos and Documents Album may not be aware of this action and may create a malfunction So we strongly recommend that the user does no add modify or remove any Photo or Document to or from the Data Directory and let GDS do the work Anyway should the Photos and Documents Album gets inoperative you can redo it at any moment acting from the main menu clickin
65. of Individuals of the Database See 7 6 2 and 7 6 6 Advanced search of Individuals See 7 6 11 Search by Number of Control if you know the Number of Control See 7 6 4 Search by Number of Sousa Ahnentafel if you want to access by number of Sousa Ahnentafel This option is only available if you have previously searched for the Ancestors of an Individual See 7 6 5 Note Except in the search by Number of Control or by number of Sousa Ahnentafel in that is going directly to an Individual in particular in the other methods of search GDS lists all the Individuals who meet the described conditions See 7 6 6 Note To understand all the types of search of Individuals See the sections 7 6 2 to 7 6 12 Note the following prefixes in the names or surnames are considered as irrelevant for the search of the Individuals This means that it does not matter an individual search by van Voegen than Voegen At the beginning of the name or Surname DELS DEL LAS LOS LES VON VAN DE LA EL DA DO AL DI ZU AF OF D L and I A O E Page 65 At any place of the name Apostrophe Suffixes of hierarchy Comma I V X Il III HH 7 6 2 Search in the general list Pressing the List of the xxxx Individuals you get to the alphabetically list by surname second surname Middle Initial and name of all the Individuals of the Database Once in it you can double click on the chosen one and his he
66. of all Data Sources In these Reports you can select the Printer and the pages you create but have fewer options than with the Reports of graphic format see below an example of the configuration to create a PDF file of a graphic from General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Output option to printer PDF or TIF Output to printer Outputto TIF Output to PDF Output to file PDF or TIF Destination folder D MARSHALL D evel7O DEMO DB 70_EN QOutput_PDF gt gt Name of the output PDF or TIF file Orientation Portrait Descendants of ortrai Joseph N Jones and Marilyn Equivalent size to printer U adaa Width 2337 92x92 Height 2337 High quality Format of choice Printer margins in millimeters Adic multipage Separators Left 5 Dimensions of report Joseph Tho k y l 2337 mm 9 millimeters Number of pages Print all 4 C From i 2 4 Create the file Cancel Figure 159 Example of Preparation of creation of a PDF multipage file Clicking on Create file will create a PDF file lf the directory does not exist appears 2 A PDF file will be created with the narne Descendants of Joseph M Jones PDF that will be located in the folder D Printing tests Do you agree sa Figure 160 Warning of creation of file Note that GDS has created a name of file as the user has left it empty Page 261 By responding positively GDS will
67. of the Individual Panel See 7 8 4 Upon completion of the click on Save Page 211 10 2 Access to a Data Source Just as it is accessed in the previous section from the main menu double click on the Data Source you want to watch Tithe of the Data Source Book of the Family Author Marian B Boyle Reference information Given in deposit to the Village Library in 2005 Text or comment Several events narrated in a colloquial language Most of the members of our family are mentioned Where used Update Save E xi Figure 128 Data Source Example General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 10 3 Associate a Data Source to a portion of text of the Individual Panel See the section Creating digital links See 7 8 4 Any Data Source can be included in any of the tabs of the Individual Panel 10 4 Access to the Individuals that are associated to a Data Source In the open panel shown in 10 2 click on the control Where used GDS will search all the Individuals who in any of its tabs of information have a link to this Data Source The list will be presented in the format of Individuals shown in List of Individuals See 7 6 6 10 5 Associate a group of Individuals to a Data Source Link to multiple Individuals from the Panel of the Data Source This is a special case in which you want to associate a group of Individuals to a Data Source Being a massive update you should have in mind
68. of this search can be searched by the Places of Birth or Death Also you can search for and Lineage Dynasty or House In the case of House an individual can belong to Several Houses in this case place the names of the Houses separated by comma or semicolon e By the existence or not of photos of the Individual in the Database and or in the Individual Panel General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Note GDS remember the last Individuals who have been called and their panel has been shown so that subsequent calls for the initial search maintains this list Clicking on any Individual of the list he she will be accessed immediately See the following Figure Search of an individual INITIAL SEARCH PANEL Other methods List of the 1234 individuals Last individuals displayed By his her name Carolyn C Taylor Advanced Type a portion or all the first name of the desired individual s Dorotea R White By control number l Peter C Anderson First Name List Middle Initial List The individuals who Surname List M have image in Panel no image in Panel but yes in BdD M no images in BdD have images in BdD Option Lineages Option Houses M Dynasties Lineages Cancel Zz Birth and Death places H Figure 22 The search of Individuals Panel with previous references Other methods Search in the general list to choose within the complete list
69. one of your rectangles defined sorted by date If you click in the control See Page 131 List the list appears in alphabetical order See Browser 9 4 Alphabetical list of Texts in rectangles of tne Images ofthe Photo and Dac Search gt gt gt Full word f Ascendant DILES IT MULTUM My hand Cancel Figure 71 Alphabetical list of texts in Rectangles of Images From the list you can search by typing the first letters or typing in the white space and then click Search To sort in descending order press on the bar titled Ascendant For the Treatment of Multipage Documents access Multipage Documents See 9 9 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 3 4 The Thematic Albums GDS supports unlimited number Thematic Aloums Any Photo or Document can be assigned as many Thematic Albums as you wish When a Photo or Document is assigned to a thematic album it will be part of it independently of being assigned to other Thematic Albums or having any other kind of assignations The structure of the Thematic trees is of your choice and there is no limitation of the level of nesting that you want to have Therefore its structure is equivalent to the structure of folders in any disc organization with the basic difference that the Photos and Documents that the user places in every one of them are referenced only and not copied so it maintains intact the rule that that every Photo and Document is only once in
70. or the uncles of an Individual The Individuals Potentially duplicated Selection based in the contents of the registers Any other selection When you choose an Individual his or her descendants or ancestors the system will lead you to choose who that Individual is Page 233 When you select the option based in content the system will display a panel and the Indicate that you may what is the contents of a series of fields of data Fields to Export Having made the selection of registers to Export the system will take you to the selection of the fields to Export Select fields to export Number of Control Naming convention Prefix Name and Surnames Gender Kind of descendant Also named Governance period Throne name Nobila Titles Personal image Continue gt gt Cancel Figure 135 Choosing the fields to Export Point out the fields and move them to the right using the indicators You can always go back Format See Export Options See 13 2 1 Once this Selection is done go ahead and you can choose the format and the file to export Excel or text output file Delimitor of fields Header Line Internal dates format Output file The system suggests a name You can change tt Delimiter of fields The fields of data will be separated by this delimiter The system eliminates repetition of this delimiter automatically if existing in the file so there can be no confusion with the reception prog
71. order of registers Direct access file One register per individual The number of register corresponds with the Number of Control of the individual Correspondence with the GDS5 DAT file but indicating the alphabetical order of the GDS5 DAT file by Surname Second Surname or Middle Initial and Name Used to do the List of Names by this order Content Order Integer of 4 bytes Number of a register in the GDS5 DAT file ALBUM2 FOT File Index of the Photos and Documents Album File of Sequential Access Several registers per Photo or Document with one register minimum if there is no defined rectangle One register for every defined rectangle in the Photo or Document that corresponds to an Individual of the Database Content e Date Album String of 8 bytes with the format YYYYMMDD YYYY is the year 7000 to be able to use years before Christ Position in Date String of 4 characters indicating the order inside the same date Name Album String of 64 bytes The name of the file of Photo or Document without extension Page 221 Individual Album String of 10 bytes The Number of Control of the individual in the rectangle expressed in characters Page Album String of 4 bytes The number of the page that this triangle is located ALBUM2 PIE File Index of texts of Rectangles in the Photos and Documents Album File of Sequential Access Varios registers per Photo or Document con the Contents of the Rectangle ALBUM TIT
72. person under the description of being is Spain it appears as Wednesday October 3 of 1590 Being from Spain this is a date in the Gregorian calendar because in Spain the reform was made in 1582 However this same date if we declare that this is a non Catholic citizen of Germany the display of the date will be Saturday October 3 of 1590 Julian as in Protestant Germany the reform was not performed until 1610 and therefore that date corresponds to Saturday 13th October of 1590 of the Gregorian calendar So the Julian calendar indication is only performed when expressing dates between 1582 and 1929 when it detects that the Territory in question to the calendar used at that time is Julian In any other circumstance GDS does not express any calendar If a date is before 1582 Julian and if above 1929 always Gregorian For a complete understanding of the situation we recommend reading the Calendars article See 21 8 Julian Calendar See 21 8 2 and Gregorian calendar See 21 8 1 Their contents have been extracted from Wikipedia General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 21 9 Indication of individual as dead GDS has the following logic to determine that an individual is deceased This is useful for the case of the advanced search of Individuals and for the search of Events as well as for other internal functions An individual is understood by GDS as dead by the existence of any non null value of any of the followi
73. restart the system and operate normally after such situation has happened but we are very interested to Know of any occurrence of an error because we need to know the causes of the incidence and try to improve the system in a way that the error does not occur anymore GDS is permanently analyzing all and every one of its operations fan error occurs we in Marshall System will be very grateful to have notice of it In fact through our history we have corrected some problems thanks to the cooperation of our users At the end we want a perfect product that is immune to all circumstances Since like any other software program GDS is like a living object and we may find surprises even long time after the product has been installed So communicating any problem to Marshall System will help us and all the users and we encourage you to do tt You will observe that you can optionally send the Database to Marshall System See the conditions of this sending in the chapter Sending the Database by E mail See 15 6 Page 291 17 History of GDS Strategy and development log Dear reader have decided to dedicate this chapter to show a log of the history of GDS from its beginning in 1988 and in particular with the first commercial version in 1993 There is no detail of the multiple revisions published in the early stages of development since was not registering all the improvements made during that phase At that stage GDS was a simple MS DOS progr
74. same name in several languages T Creation of Databases GDS as subset of the current Database See the Introduction See 1 1 and the Main Functions of GDS See 1 3 to be one notion of set of GDS See the System Requirements See 1 4 Installing GDS See 4 1 and Cold Start See 4 2 to initiate contacts with the work of every day with GDS If you want to work in other Languages go to Choosing the language See 5 8 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 1 3 Main Functions of GDS GDS is based in the integration of the following e The Individual and their interrelated Network of Individuals All individuals are the center of a Network of Individuals of their surrounding either up with their ancestors down with their descendants or sideways with their conjugal unions and their siblings At the same time the Network links any individual related to the above forming a set of Individuals that in one way or another are somewhat related Every Individual has one record in GDS where is kept all his her relevant information and as you see below it is also part of the information of the network e The Photos and Documents Album which is a network of graphic documents orderly grouped that are or are not related to one or several Individuals This network of documents is always sorted by date and inside it several Individuals can be related Photos and Documents Album of the Individual objects Selective Album t
75. that to the year of Romulo was incremented with fifty one days one day was eliminated to the short months that added 57 days and two months were created Ianuarius with 29 and Februarius with 28 days Thus all the months were plenty containing an odd number of days with the exception of Februarius that was the only short one and for this reason was named the most unfortunate month The year was thus defined as follows Martius 31 days Aprilis 29 days Matus 31 days Iunius 29 days Quinctilis 31 days Sextilis 29 days September 29 days October 31 days Nouember 29 days December 29 days Ianuarius 29 days and Februarius 28 days Even with this change the year was short eleven days respect the solar year so Numa Pompilio ordered to add a month of 22 days every second and sixth year and of 23 days in the fourth and eight defining a cycle of eight years The intercalar month was called Mercedonius Plutarch Numa 19 Caes 59 The roman year was based in the lunar cycles and as Livio mentioned the relation with the solar years was coincident every 19 years This cycle was introduced in 432 bC and even if this knowledge was unknown by the people it was used by the clergy in the cults of the gods In 45 bC Jules Caesar appointed the alejandrine astronomous Sosigenes the elaboration of another calendar He fixed the duration of the year in 365 days and six hours amazingly accurate calculation given the rudimentary tools of the time co
76. the sign at its left during two seconds that Theme will expand opening its Subthemes Also if the list of Themes is larger than the window when you place the mouse with the button pressed above or below the box the list will go up or go down to the desired view Thus you can always assign the Photo to the Theme desired even if it is not visible to the beginning of your move Page 135 To disaffect a Photo or Document from a Theme Access to the list of Photos and Documents of this Theme clicking the left button on the Theme to be treated Once in the browser of this Theme point the option of withdrawal of Remove image from this Theme Then click with the left button of the mouse on the Photo or Document to disaffect it This action will cause the removal of this Photo or Document out of this theme This is NOT the Removal of the Photo or Document of the album It only removes its reference from this Theme For the Treatment of Multipage Documents access Multipage Documents See 9 9 9 3 5 List of Thematic Albums You reach this window when you want to connect any of the following Places with one of the Thematic Aloums and has pressed in Connect to a Thematic Album First place the cursor in the first place you want that link to be positioned See Creating digital links 7 8 4 e in the Individual Panel When you are in update of the Individual In the tabs Basic Inf Additional Inf Surname Inf Titles Birth Will Death and Cont
77. the General family Documentation System are the property of Joaquim M Casals de Nadal Marshall System is a Spanish registered brand of his property Marshall System Il S C P c Sant Elies 34 5 2 08006 Barcelona Spain FAX 34 93 4145833 www gdsystem net E mail weobmaster aqdsystem net CIF J65315301 The public utilization is forbidden as well as any kind of fraudulent copy Notes All the Names of the Demo Database are fictitious However they are linked in a coherent way The Demo Database has been extracted from a real Database thus ensuring that coherence Any relation with any Individual either real or fictitious is a coincidence and there is not any intention to identify any Individual through this Database The photos existing in the Demo Database are the property of the author There is no authorization of the use of any photo of this Database for any other purpose than the practice of GDS in your computer The copy by any procedure of any photo with the finality of using it for a different than the use described will be considered as a violation of the terms and conditions of the use of this material and will oblige us to act in consequence The following names are trademarks of the named Companies Microsoft Outlook Outlook Express Excel and Word are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation CutePDF is a trademark of AcroSoftware Inc Adobe Reader is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated General Famil
78. the Individual Panel or any other information Panel The set of files created by GDS are the ones considered the Database That includes the files of Photos and Documents and the associated files See the GDS Database See 12 for more information However the program itself is stored in another directory as well as the data of your register that are kept in the register of the system Therefore to be certain that you have a safe copy of the program and the data do the following Program This is of little because if you lose the program you can always recover it from the web www gdsystem net In any case you can keep the file that you previously downloaded from the website above Given the fact that we are deploying new revisions of GDS it is most of the times better to get the program from the web as said in order to have always the last revision Register The computer registry keeps the options that you have chosen during the operation of GDS This information is always recovered by the normal use of GDS so do not be worried is you have lost that data Page 295 18 1 Function of Backup of the Database This function copy ALL the files of the Database Directory in a safe place usually in an external disk to ensure that you can recover them in case of destruction of them due to any fault or any other cause There are two methods for access the realization of the Backup From the menu File i EMeral an Vy L z Cur
79. the integration of specific Panel of Individuals From this panel you can get two individuals who potentially are repeated in the Database in order to integrate them into one individual combining data from Goth into one and making connections with close individuals ou can determine which individuals to integrate with several procedures 1 Clicking on the controls Find the first individual and Find the second individual 2 Clicking on the control Search the individuals potentially repeated and when the list is shown double click on two of them and pressing Integrate 3 From the advanced Search select two individuals on the list and perform the same operation as in 2 Note that the integration function is reversible so we advise you treat it with the care it deserves ln any case If in doubt there is usually a way to cancel the operation Entry of the two individuals who you want to integrate Search all individuals potentially repeated Find the first individual See this Individual Bed rr See this Individual Search the individuals List of persons declared potentially repeated as non repeated Clear the list of persons declared as non repeated Pending integration actions No integration actions pending Clear the list of pending integration actions Analysis of the links between individuals Integrate Figure 147 Panel of integration of two individuals Thi
80. the list of Photos and Documents that contain this text in the Title sorted by date If you click in the control See list appears the alphabetical list of the Titles in the Photos and Documents Album See Browser 9 4 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 z e ah ee ee ee Alphabetical i EL OT Image Es Alohabetical list of Image Titles Search gt gt gt Full word o Ascendant Tet Comunion of Sonia B Johnson Anthony A Thomas Aristotle W Jones Aristotle Y Jones at Mount Kisco CT August M Jones August N Jones Baptism of Lindsey M Garcia Bill M Jones Budapest The Parlament in background Family celebration in a Restaurant Family Jones Carter In front of an old farm In grandmother s home In the Farm In the garden lnverewe Gardens Jack Y Johneon Joseph F Johnson Joseph M Jones Marlyn G Thomas Maud Y Jones Melissa MM Taylor Monique F Wilson National Park of Ordesa Spain Protile Scottish lights The Sun from the Soko Satelite Saber Y Jones Cancel Figure 70 Alphabetical list of Titles of Images From the list you can search by typing the first letters or typing in the white space in and then click in Search To sort in descending order press about the bar titled Ascendant e 4 Images with a specific text in a rectangle Type all or part of the Contents of a rectangle Displays the list of Photos and Documents that contain this text in
81. the option Assign Images to Themes in the browser Then click with the left button of the mouse on the Photo or Document you want to assign Immediately you will be presented the Photos and Documents Album Without releasing the left button move the mouse up to the place where you want to assign the Photo or Document Immediately after releasing the button the Photo or Document will be assigned to that Theme 2 Associate a Photo or Document to a Theme from the own Photo or Document If you want to Assign the Photo or Document that is visible to a Theme click with the right button or the mouse on the image and click on Update Also you can access from the Update icon from the icon bar A series of buttons will appear to the right of the Photo or Document Click with the left button of the mouse on Assign a Theme Without releasing the left button move the mouse up to collocate it on the Theme that you want to assign the Photo or Document When you release the button the Photo or Document gets assigned to that Theme 3 Associate a set of Photos and Documents to a Theme This is done from the browser using the multiple selection of Photos and Documents See Selection of multiple Photos and Documents 9 4 4 One of the functions of the panel refers to this Assignment Note that keeping the mouse with the button pressed during the process of assignment of one Photo to a Theme whatever being the process if you maintain the mouse on a Theme that had
82. the other Directory Secondary to be integrated Normally you will not change this Directory and will remain as it is Continuing the process in the next panel the system invites you to choose the Secondary Directory Proceed with double clicking on until you reach the Directory of choice e In this panel you will be informed of the contents of the Directory that is chosen Notice that it indicates the number of registers that the new Database will have e Clicking in Proceed a separate panel will result with an analysis of both Databases to see if you can perform the integration If the answer is yes click Proceed again and the process will be executed Process e i Creates the Back_up log file reporting all the actions performed e 2 Makes a backup of the files capable of being changed or eliminated during the process to give the possibility to recover the situation in case of need The files GDS5 DA2 GDS5 DAT gets compressed during this process and the rest are copied just as they are Please note not all the files of the Principal Directory are copied but only the ones susceptible to be modified or deleted so this Is in any case a full backup of the Principal Directory e 3 Copy one by one the non core files from the Secondary Directory to the Primary Directory At the same time if there is coincidence of file names the name of the file of the Secondary Directory get changed with the aim of preserving the original name of the Primary
83. this generation t1972 t1554 GREAT GREAT GRAND PARENTS Figure 45 The list of Ancestors Sii Page 95 Each ancestor is preceded by two informations e the number of Sousa Stradonitz e the Indication of the relationship with the letters M or F meaning Mother or Father respectively Example 103 FMMFFM means that this Individual is the Father of the Mother of the Mother of the Father of the Father of the Mother of the Individual referenced who carries a number of Sousa Stradonitz of 102 Note If the number of Ancestors is very large only the first 32000 lines of the report is shown Note You can control the number of generations of Ancestors to be calculated from a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 100 See the section User Options See 5 and subchapters Clicking on any name will show his her Individual Panel To print or create a TXT file either single page or multipage go to the bar icons Print To See the details of the printing options access Printing of Reports or creation of PDF TIF or TXT files See 14 and subchapters To send an E mail with a TXT file attached with the contents of this list access icons bar Send this report via an E mail See 15 1 fe To get large size prints or files access Printing or file creation of large format reports See 14 3 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 8 4 Consanguinity Analysis of the Ancestors This table presents a Statistical Anal
84. to delete an Individual of the Database G ea Basic Inf Additional inf Surname inf Titles Birth Marriage Union win Death Parents Contact Information Main identification t Joseph N Jones Save Prefix o Exit as Ss aosa A l a FS Middle Initial N Unassign image from the panel Surmame Jones Gender Male v Brera ae Rom Aseeeenenseneneeneeneneeeeesnenennaneseeennnes Suffix Number of Control 4 Date of data 14 7 2012 Governance period Supplementary identifications Also named Dynasty Throne name Lineage Nobil Titles f Dates and locations Bom Saturdey February 3rd 1945 at San Francisco CF Coun Dead at Coun Dead Insert File link I am the one that with this pseudonym hiding the true personality has developed GDS I have spent Create document many hours of my time to the conception and development of the product you have in your hands If you want some fun go to the Additional Information tab Nickname Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic album Connection to a Data Source Figure 27 Update of the Basic data of the Individual To access the Update panel you can use any of the following procedures when the Individual Panel is visible Page 75 A Pressing F2 B from the icons bar access the Update icon C from the menu What can I do now Modify Data of This Individual Ey File Individuals
85. to this Individual and to the Photo or Document to the Photos and Documents Album of him her If you clicked on Text Describing you will have the possibility to type the text that will join that rectangle If you made a mistake or want to get out of this Assignment Click on Exit The rectangle will not be created Change the Contents of a rectangle You can change the contents of a rectangle The rectangle can be assigned to an Individual of the Database or to a Text the same way as we do to add a rectangle Click on the Change option and move the mouse to the rectangle you want to change Then double click on it and follow the instructions Do not specify the rectangle since the same coordinates are used Delete a rectangle To delete a rectangle have the Delete option enabled To do this click on this option If you move the mouse on the Photo or Document when on a rectangle will appear the sign Suggesting you do double click for delete Follow the Instructions To get out of the creation or deletion of rectangles click on Exit e Assign to a theme Clicking and holding the mouse on this control immediately appears the panel of Photos and Documents Album Go holding the mouse up to the Theme you want to include this Photo or Document and release the button As of this moment this Photo or Document belongs to the list of Photos and Documents associated with this Theme without changing any other association or characteristics e Re
86. transpose the image horizontally or vertically When you run this function the associated rectangles are adjusted adequately lt should be borne in mind that in these cases GDS will rewrite the image and in the case of JPG files GDS will use a more suitable compression ratio to try to not lose any further quality Thus it is possible that the resulting image will occupy more disk space than the original Do not confuse the rotation of the image when updating with the rotation of image in the Multipage Documents which is made from the own image without being in the status of Update In the case of the Multipage Documents the rotation does NOT mean to rewrite the file so the rotation can be performed as many times as you want to watch the pages comfortably without eroding the quality of the document Furthermore the drawings and transpositions in the status of update are not permitted for the Multipage Documents e Delete image To remove an image from the Photos and Documents Album This action is irreversible e Delete recording To remove a voice recording from the Photos and Documents Album This action is irreversible e Delete document To remove a text document from the Photos and Documents Album This action is irreversible Sending the Photo or Document by E mail You can create an e mail with this Photo or Document as well as all the information contained in it as the title the date and the contents of all its defined rectangles
87. user to indicate who of both is the man The created GEDCOM file will be placed in the Folder indicated in the options panel General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 13 4 Integration of duplicated Individuals in the Database Whether you have performed an integration of Databases as if you have integrated a GEDCOM file to your Database or you suspect that there are duplicated Individuals by mistake due to some error when adding new Individuals it is convenient to perform an analysis of the possibility of having duplicated Individuals in the Database In the assumption that this case occur i e one Individual is placed in the Database more than once GDS has a very sophisticated functionality that allows to integrate duplicated Individuals in order to get a clean and well connected Database The integration of duplicated Individuals is a very complex function since not only is important to know and decide which data should be included in the integrated Individual but it is necessary to resolve all the existing links with other Individuals which in turn may be also duplicated Thus the system must integrate the text data Names Surnames Other Information Dates of birth etc and also properly connect with the other Individuals parents siblings spouses children etc so all related Individuals will be correct in terms of data and interconnections The other Individuals are obviously impacted by the changes so they
88. well as the rectangles that were previously assigned At the same time appears to the upper right a new box with the Indication of Add Change Delete or Exit e Activate the Delete button Move the mouse up to the rectangle you want to delete You will get a message indicating that you can double click on it to remove that rectangle Choose Add Change Delete Exit Figure 103 Removing a Rectangle from a Photo or Document Please double click on the rectangle GDS will ask if you really want to delete this rectangle Page 181 9 7 12 7 Change the contents of a rectangle of the Photo or Document In the case that wish change the contents of a rectangle you do not have to delete it and recreate a new rectangle but you can use the Function of change Choose Add Change Delete Exit Recording Document amp d d fess Remove red eyes Figure 104 Changing the Contents of a rectangle of the Photo or Document Place it in update mode You can do this with four different ways Press F2 or Access to the icons bar and click on the Update icon or Go to the menu What can I do now Update data of this image or Press the right button of the mouse over the Photo or Document You will see a drop down window Then go to Update i 2 3 4 To the right of the Photo or Document will appear a set of controls for performing a set of functions e Press on Define rectangles
89. will export the 15 images d Cancel Proceed Figure 85 Selecting the Directory Folder of Export of Images The images will have the original name but they will have a special prefix ordered by name in a way that will match the original order as they had chronologically in the Photos and Documents Album Do not copy the Titles Dates or rectangles The original files remain untouched e Send an e mail with these images GDS prepares automatically an E mail with your standard messaging program with all the selected files included as attachments for you to send directly You can type the text and the e mail address of the recipients In the case of sending of an e mail with the set of Photos and Documents selected you can choose to send in its real size or adjusting their size usually smaller to get a faster transmission See 15 2 1 Integrate in a single multipage file e It will create a new file in PDF or TIF format which will contain all the Photos and Documents selected The original files remain unchanged The data title etc of the original Documents are not copied to the new created file If there are 5 Photos and Documents of different formats some single page and other multipage it will create a file with as many pages as is the sum of the pages of the original 5 files Remove the selected Images General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 e To remove definitely the Images selected This function
90. year Origin of the Christian Era The Romans counted the years from the founding of Rome 1 e ab urbe condita abbreviated auC In the Christian era with the Pope Boniface IV in 607 the origin of the years became the birth of Christ A roman monk Dionysius the Meager mathematician based in the Bible and other historical sources between the years 526 and 530 had dated the birth of Christ on 25th of December of the year 754 auC This year became the year aD Anno Domine 1st year of the Lord but the years preceding this one were still auC years Finally in the seventeenth century the years prior of 1 aD were named as years before Christ bC and the subsequent years after Christ dC Thus it is clear that there cannot exist the year 0 and that the year begins in a given time 12 o clock of the night of the end of the previous year and ends at the 12 of the night of the end of year of year 1 But this year cannot be counted as but to the end Page 319 that is can only be counted as 1 in the time it is fulfilled The same applies to the age of an individual How many years met a child to the birth None So we should not confuse the years which are segments of time of 12 months of duration with the anniversaries which are points in one line of time and therefore have no dimension These points in a graphic or time line are identified by the number of the previous year not later The First year of the life of an individual id
91. you can check automatically the following The integrity of the name index References between the limits Coherency of the references between parents and childs Coherency of the references between spouses Detection and repair of the siblings lists Detection of sibling loops Detection of duplicated spouses Detection of the coherence of gender upon contest Detection and repair of the links to additional files Upon detection of any anomaly the user is informed and in many cases the anomaly is comected In spite that GDS shart is slower we strongly recommend You maintain this option active f Never check the chains and name indexes at GDS start f Always check the chains and name indexes at GDS start f Check the chains and name indexes every 10 GOS starts Aniversanes of today Oh Show at start A Eaa show the aniversaries of today Accept Cancel Apply ry Figure 14 User Options Start Options GDS performs a series of tests at start to ensure the integrity and consistency of the Database From this panel you can change the logic of checks This panel is designed for large Databases for which the initial check is too costly in time so you can choose to make perform it after a number of starts If the Database is not very large it is advisable to keep running the test at each start Also from this panel you decide if you want GDS to identify the Individuals celebrating their anniversary today
92. 0 Aspect JPG and TIF options Full screen images GOS start options Language Conventions Preferences Sistem Aspect Options Font for command Font for individual panel labels Font tyoes Texts font color Fonts of the Image Rectangles Font of the Print Display Global Background color Background colors Background color of images Text Background color Background color of the Image Rectangles Background Color of fields under update Aspect of the thumbnails of the Photo and Documents Album Aspect of the Thumbnails f 30 Flat Accept Cancel Apply Restore Restore Restore Restore Restore Restore Figure 10 User Options Aspect To change the Aspect of certain types of sources and of various backgrounds See the User Options relative to the Photos and Documents of the ones affecting them Page 39 Preferences Options JPG and TIF options Full screen images GOS start options Authorizations Operation Preferences Names of inserted files from the Photo Album Documents or Recordings Lineages or Houses f Always accept default names created by GDS f Lineages File names prefix Gos i f Always propose a name to be accepted or changed f Houses Tipe of the Day Comments in the list of individuals f Show tips at GDS start Always include one relation in the list of f Do not show tips at GDS start Individuals Maximum number of generations during the analysis of a
93. 100 bytes Institution Short Text 2 Strings of length 100 bytes Civil Register Short Text 3 Strings of length 100 bytes Book of register Short Text 4 Strings of length 100 bytes Officiate Short Text 5 Strings of length 100 bytes Church Short Text 6 Strings of length 100 bytes Complementary names Short Text 7 Strings of length 100 bytes Godfather Short Text 8 Strings of length 100 bytes Godmother Short Text 9 Strings of length 100 bytes Sacramental Book Short Text 10 a Short Text 15 Strings of length 100 bytes Not used Long Text String of length 1000 bytes free description and link with external files Identification of Type of Union String of length 1 byte Not used Identification of Type of Separation String of length 1 byte Not used Last Update Date String of length 8 bytes Updated automatically Different format for before and after year 2000 Last Update Time String of length 10 bytes Updated automatically Reserved for expansion String length 100 TypeReg 4 Will TypeReg Integer of 2 bytes Value 4 Ctrl1 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to this Individual Ctrl2 Integer of 4 bytes Not used Date 0 String of length 10 bytes Date of the Will See Internal dates format Date 1 a Date 9 String of length 10 bytes Not used Short Text 0 Strings of length 100 bytes Notary of the Will Short Text 1 Strings of length 100 bytes Escribany Short Te
94. 11 2006 Version 5 0 24 February 24 2006 Version 5 0 23 February 5 2006 Version 5 0 22 January 25 2006 Version 5 0 21 January 6 2006 Version 5 0 20 January 1 2006 Version 5 0 19 November 6 2005 Version 5 0 18 October 18 2005 Version 5 0 17 August 5 2005 Version 5 0 16 April 10 2005 Version 5 0 15 March 28 2005 Version 5 0 14 October 17 2004 Version 5 0 13 October 14 2004 Version 5 0 12 August 24 2004 Version 5 0 11 August 14 2004 Page 293 Version 5 0 10 July 18 2004 Version 5 0 9 July 2 2004 Version 5 0 8 June 24 2004 Version 5 0 7 March 28 2004 Version 5 0 6 May 26 2004 Version 5 0 5 May 23 2004 Version 5 0 4 April 24 2004 Version 5 0 3 April 22 2004 Version 5 0 2 April 20 2004 Version 5 0 1 April 15 2004 Version 5 0 0 March 9 2004 Version 4 0 38 December 2 2003 Version 4 0 37 October 21 2003 Version 4 0 36 October 16 2003 Version 4 0 35 October 5 2003 Version 4 0 34 September 10 2003 Version 4 0 33 February 15 2003 Version 4 0 32 July 18 2003 Version 4 0 31 July 9 2003 Version 4 0 30 May 28 2003 Version 4 0 29 May 10 2003 Version 4 0 28 May 3 2003 Version 4 0 27 April 21 2003 Version 4 0 26 April 5 2003 Version 4 0 25 March 25 2003 Version 4 0 24 March 14 2003 Version 4 0 23 January 30 2003 Version 4 0 22 January 20 2003 Version 4 0 21 January 12 200
95. 283 millimeters m Pages to print 210 mm aii a Number of pages f Print all i From f to f Print Cancel Figure 156 Options for printing or creation of a PDF TIF or TXT file 1 Output option to printer PDF or TIF Qutput to printer Outputto TIF Output to PDF Printer Copies First Name HP Photosmart 6510 series Red copies f Where Ned Orientation Descenc Choose Printer Pora Joseph N Jones anc x ortrai Paper size Millimeters and quality Landscape A4 210 x 297 mm Width 210 Height 297 Quality of 600 dots per inch Format of choice Printer preferences Columns Rows Printer margins in millimeters 2 2 Primaries Adic multipage Ea v5 t Left 4 Top p Hpne Left fo i Right M E Dinn m gt Down 5 ae of report 396x567 millimeters Pages to print Number of pages Print all 4 From i fs Print Cancel Figure 157 Options for printing or creation of a PDF TIF or TXT file 2 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Print In the case of Print to a printer the option Output to Printer should be the chosen option In this case you get the standard features options and preferences of your printer In the section of Format of choice you can force that the document have a specific number of columns or rows in every case adjusting au
96. 3 The diverse Photos and Documents Albums This chapter describes the diferent ways of showing the collection of Photos and Documents Index of this chapter 9 3 1 The diverse Photos and Documents Albums 9 3 2 The individual Photos and Documents Albums 9 3 3 The Albums by other concepts 9 3 4 The Thematic Albums 9 3 5 List of Thematic Albums 9 3 6 The Photo or Document and its positioning in the Photos and Documents Album General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 3 1 The diverse Photos and Documents Albums GDS allows the creation of Albums of Photos and Documents under different concepts Attention All the diverse Photos and Documents Albums created by GDS are always displayed chronologically e The Individual Photos and Documents Albums show all the Photos and Documents in which an Individual appears They are created from the Individual Panel of from the Photos and Documents Album e The Thematic Albums show the Photos and Documents belonging to a Theme in particular They are created from the panel of Photos and Documents Album e The Albums determined by dates or periods of time e The Albums for certain texts either in the Title or in any rectangle designated as such e The Albums by other concepts are created from parameters expressed in the panel of Photos and Documents Album Display of Photos and Documents and lists of Photos and Documents Albums The lists of Photos and Docum
97. 3 Version 4 0 20 January 8 2003 Version 4 0 19 December 30 2002 Version 4 0 18 December 20 2002 Version 4 0 17 December 13 2002 Version 4 0 16 November 24 2002 Version 4 0 15 November 8 2002 Version 4 0 14 October 30 2002 Version 4 0 13 October 26 2002 Version 4 0 12 October 18 2002 Version 4 0 11 September 21 2002 Version 4 0 10 August 31 2002 Version 4 0 9 August 19 2002 Version 4 0 8 August 6 2002 Version 4 0 7 June 28 2002 Version 4 0 6 June 15 2002 Version 4 0 5 June 5 2002 Version 4 0 4 May 31 2002 Version 4 0 3 May 11 2002 Version 4 0 2 May 4 2002 Version 4 0 1 April 20 2002 Version 4 0 0 April 13 2002 Version 3 0 was the first version for Windows From January 30 2000 to April 2002 up to 93 revisions were published Version 2 2 September 23 1995 Version 2 1 July 12 1994 From July 12 1994 to September 1995 several revisions of that Version were released without numbering them They were fulfilled via diskette of 3 1 2 inches Version 2 0 January 4 1994 Version 1 0 December 19 1993 First Version for MS DOS First commercial Version General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 18 Backup of the Database All the files that GDS creates and maintain are located in the Database Directory See 4 4 The only exception to this rule is when the user explicitly creates a hyperlink to an external file in
98. 6 3 7 3 2 Prefix and Suffix on the name of the Individual The prefix is the title given to this individual The field has a capacity of up to 70 characters Examples are Mr D Exm Sr Prof etc The suffix is the qualification used in the Anglo Saxon nomenclature and it is placed at the end of the name and surname Examples are Jr I etc The suffix is not available for the General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Individuals with Spanish and Portuguese nomenclatures The field has also a capacity of up to 70 characters 7 3 3 Additional Information The data shown in this tab all of it extracted from the Database are the following Free space for introducing any information or link with an external or internal file This is the associated information of that Individual that goes beyond the capacity of the space of the Basic data The Additional Information does not have any limitation of space other than your disk capacity of your computer This information is stored automatically by GDS in files with the extension ADL There are three methods to update the data contained in this tab e Click the Update icon See 7 8 2 e Click on the menu What can do now and after click on Modify Data of this Individual See 6 3 e Press the F2 key 7 3 4 Other Information There are other tabs available to add information about many other subjects The format is ASCII or RTF There is no limitation in
99. 66 days those years whose last two digits are divisible by 4 except the years that express the exact number of the century 100 200 800 1800 1900 2000 of the which are exempted the ones whose century is divisible by 4 The Gregorian Calendar adjusted to 365 2425 days the duration of the year leaving one difference of 0 000300926 days or 26 seconds to the year of error Try to create one rule for correct this error of one day every 3300 years is complex In such a long time the earth is slowing down in your speed of rotation and slows the also the movement of translation The moon has an effect of delay on this speed of rotation by the eccentricity created by the tides The decrease of the speed of rotation created by the eccentricity is similar to the that occurs when we spin a Frisbee putting a bit of wet sand in one side of the bottom edge when the plate is rotated its speed of rotation is much less than what it has when there is no such eccentricity This effect is still in analysis and measurement of the world by scientifics Additionally there are other complicating effects defining rules with such precision This error is only of part per million The most practical is that when the difference is significant a declaration that the next leap year is not held If any event we have almost two thousand years of analysis and discussion before needing this setting The day the week and the month Division of the Calendar N
100. 7 November 11 2009 Version 6 0 16 October 16 2009 Version 6 0 15 October 15 2009 Version 6 0 14 February 15 2009 Version 6 0 13 July 17 2009 Version 6 0 12 July 7 2009 Version 6 0 11 June 21 2009 Version 6 0 10 April 30 2009 Version 6 0 09 April 15 2009 Version 6 0 08 March 30 2009 Version 6 0 07 February 28 2009 Version 6 0 06 February 7 2009 Version 6 0 05 December 24 2008 Version 6 0 04 December 4 2008 Version 6 0 03 November 21 2008 Version 6 0 02 November 15 2008 Version 6 0 01 November 10 2008 Version 6 0 00 November 7 2008 Version 5 0 49 May 19 2008 Version 5 0 48 March 28 2008 Version 5 0 47 January 28 2008 Version 5 0 46 January 13 2008 Version 5 0 45 November 20 2007 Version 5 0 44 September 20 2007 Version 5 0 43 September 1 2007 Version 5 0 42 August 15 2007 Version 5 0 41 July 22 2007 Version 5 0 40 July 16 2007 Version 5 0 39 July 6 2007 Version 5 0 38 July 4 2007 Version 5 0 37 June 4 2007 Version 5 0 36 April 24 2007 Version 5 0 35 April 10 2007 Version 5 0 34 March 15 2007 Version 5 0 33 February 23 2007 Version 5 0 32 January 21 2007 Version 5 0 31 December 13 2006 Version 5 0 30 November 2 2006 Version 5 0 29 October 29 2006 Version 5 0 28 October 27 2006 Version 5 0 27 October 7 2006 Version 5 0 26 September 22 2006 Version 5 0 25 March
101. 7 2012 Nephews Mother Marilyn B Johnson 1914 2008 111523 Children Has A Stee Number of Control 4 First cousins A Siblings He is the brother number 3 of 3 brothers T second cousins Sibling John Bill N Jones 1943 Irazze Spouse Marilyn G Thomas 1948 Mariage information Figure 18 The Individual Panel The previous Example does not contain all the possible tabs of information of the individual but only the ones with content See below a picture with all the possible tabs See 7 2 To add a new Individual please refer to Add a new Individual See 7 4 To update the Data of an individual please refer to Update data of the individual See 7 8 To search for an Individual in the Database go to the chapter Searching an Individual or several in the Database See 7 6 which describes the various methods of locating an individual General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 7 2 The Individual Panel lt is the record of an Individual It contains the following information clicking in any of the existing tabs Update of the data about Joseph N Jones Basic Inf Additional Inf Surname Inf Titles Birn Marriage Union win Death Parents Contact Information Figure 19 The tabs of the Individual Panel Basic Information See 7 3 1 and successive Marriage Information See 7 3 10 The photo in the Panel of the Individual See 9 7 12 11 and successive Additional Informatio
102. 700 Year 1584 e Chequia Bohemia BoOhme Cechy Moravia and Lusacia Lausitz Tuesday 17th of January of 1584 came after Monday 6th of January e Switzerland most catholic cantons Sunday 22nd of January came after of the 11th of January e Silesia Slask Monday 23rd of January came after Sunday 12th of January Year 1587 e Hungary Sunday Ist of November of 1587 came after of Saturday 21st of October Year 1590 e Transylvania Siebenbiirgen Ardeal Erd ly Tuesday 25 of December of 1590 came after Monday 14th December Year 1605 e Canada New Scotland from 1605 to the 13th of October of 1710 used the Gregorian Calendar After they used the Julian Calendar from the 2nd of October of 1710 up to Wednesday 2nd of September of 1752 that was followed by Thursday 14th of September That used the Gregorian from them on The of Canada used always the Gregorian Calendar Year 1610 e Germany Prusia Thursday 2nd of September of 1610 came after Wednesday 22nd of August Year 1682 e France Estrasburg in February of 1682 Year 1700 e Germany protestant Denmark and Norway Monday Ist of March of 1700 came after 18th of February e The Netherlands Gtieldres Gelderland Protestant zone of Holland Monday 12th of July 1700 came after 30th of June Page 317 e The Netherlands Utrecht and Overijssel Sunday 12th of December of 1700 came after of Saturday 30th of November Year 1701 e The Netherlands Frisia Groningen agai
103. COM files 13 3 we have developed an algorithm for import and or export Surnames in a way that the system conforms to international Anglo Saxon naming convention which is what is implanted in all the different programs of genealogy They use only one space for Surnames General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 3 How to acquire GDS GDS can be purchased online through our web page www gdsystem net or directly from GDS program in the menu File Registry of the Database The delivery system is done by sending the key for your particular Database You will receive the key by E mail or as response to the process of purchase It is assumed that the user downloads GDS from www gdsystem net and optionally this User s Manual Since we are continuously improving GDS and placing new revisions in the web if you want you can download successive revisions of the same Version free of charge keeping your system constantly updated The payment system is as follows The most widespread method is from the program itself at the moment there is one Individual in the Database GDS is marketed by Database thus once it is registered you can be take it from one computer to another without the need of registering again GDS itself will lead you to the purchase via Paypal with secure transaction and may pay with your Paypal account or any credit or debit card Alternatively it can be purchased by E mail mail or FAX In these cases you ca
104. Content Free content in ASCII or RTF code There is no limitation for its size It is created by GDS at the moment of Update of the data of the Individual in the tab of Information Surname The file will be common to all the Individuals with this Surname and can be updated and visualized from any one of them or from the application of Surnames XXXXXXXX SOU Files of Data Sources Files with the information of Data Sources XXXXXXXX IF2 Files of information of Photo or Document Files of Binary Access Always exists one per Photo or Document in the Photos and Documents General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Album xxxxxxx is identical to the name of the Photo or Document that references Thus the file IF2 corresponding to the Photo or Document My_Photo JPG is My_Photo IF2 These files are always created and maintained by GDS Content The IF2 file has of three parts the Head from 0 a 1000 Registers of information of rectangle and the Trailer e Head Identification String of 3 bytes Version String of 3 bytes Date String of 10 bytes See Internal dates format Title String of 80 bytes Follows a copy of the BMP inside the IF2 file bfType String of 2 bytes ASCII BM bfSize Integer of 4 bytes Size in Bytes of the file bfReserved1 String of 2 bytes Zero bfReserved2 String of 2 bytes Zero bfOffBits Integer of 4 bytes Byte offset in files where image begins biSize Integer of 4 b
105. DF n se 267 Figure 167 Ready for print with the CutePDF Virtual Printer 0 eee 268 Figure 168 Indicating the name and place of the PDF file created by CutePDF 268 Figure 169 The list of Surnames requested from the search Panel of Individuals 270 Figure 170 Printing a list indicating that does not fit eeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 271 Figure 171 Printing a list of Individuals selecting the fields to print 0 271 Figure 172 Moving the Panel to see the Preview cceecsscccceccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeees 272 Figure 173 Preview of the list of Individuals cccccccceeecccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 212 Figure 174 creation of a TXT file of the list of Individuals nneeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeses 273 Figure 175 Initiating the sending or a report by E mail cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 219 Figure 176 Options for sending a report by E mail cece ccccssseeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 276 Figure 177 Reducing the image size before sending it by E mail eee 278 Figure 178 Initiating the creation of the Web ccccceeeeeececceeeceeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 279 Figure 179 Building a web call from the File menu eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 219 Figure 180 Selecting individuals to include in the web sssseeeeesessessssssssssseseerreresses 280 Figure 181 Choosing the output Folder of the files of the web nnsssssn
106. ES cunsentu A E E aT T weewiadiae cates 262 14 4 1 Recommendations on the use of the CutePDF Virtual Printer 262 143a PUNUNG FOVICW oaeiae aa a a a 2 0 14 6 Printing of lists of Individuals or creation of TXT file ce ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 270 ND GDS AI Mterne ess n n e E EO EENET 274 PHA SONGING REDONS Dy IMEN apra T E E ean eee 274 15 1 1 Configure sending a Graph by E mall sssessseoeenssssssseseeresssssssseeersssss 276 15 2 Sending an E mail with the Photo or Document attached ccceceeeeeee ee 277 15 2 1 Reduce the Image size before Sending It encneaniensinniae iaa 278 15 3 Creating a Web with your Database cccccccecccsececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeneeeaes 279 15 4 Creating an HTML file with the information of an individual c 000 284 15 5 GONMECING IO MEME bien seat biuseeeenieds 287 15 6 Sending the Database by E Mall ccccccccsecceceeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeessaeeesaeesaeeeesaes 287 15 7 Communicating with Marshall System cccccceccceeeeceeeeeeeesseeeeseeeesaeeeeeees 288 15 8 Access the web of Marshall System and other friendly webs 00c008 289 15 9 Sending a list of Individuals by E mail cccccceccccseceeceeeeteeeeeseeeeseeeesaaeeeeaes 290 1G EXC GDS aoua a E 291 16 1 1EXIE DY EOF eicae a a wetter a sie leer eleoes 291 17 History of GDS Strategy and development 10Q
107. Equivalencies Photos and Documents Data Sources Surnar He A You can enter the basic data Additional Information data about the surname occupations birth Marriage Will or death At the same time the assignment of parents and of spouses is performed from this panel Note When updating or adding several Individuals in the same session GDS remembers the last entries of names surnames places etc and open some windows with the appropriate texts in every case Clicking on the selected text it will be placed in the right place If you are not interested in the list press the Esc key and the window disappears G Basic Inf Additional Inf Surname Inf Titles Birth Marriage Union will Death Parents Contact Information Main identification Joseph N Jones Save Exit Prefix Remove this First Name Joseph C a individual Middle Initial N Unassign image from the panel Surname Jones Gender Suffix Surnames used Governance period Joseph Supplementary identifications V Supplementary fields Also named Dynasty Throne name PO Lineage Pe Nobil Titles Nickname Dates and locations Born Saturdey February 3rd 1945 at San Francisco CF Coun Dead at Coun Insert File link I am the one that with this pseudonym hiding the true personalit many hours of my time to the conception and development of the p Create document you want some fun go to the Additional Inf
108. F or TXT files See 14 and subchapters To send an e mail with an attached PDF or TIF file with the contents of this graphic go to the icons bar Send this report via E mail See Sending Reports by Internet 15 1 8 To see the details of configuration of the file to attach go to Configure sending a Graph by E mail See 15 1 1 To get large size prints or files access Printing or file creation of large format reports See 14 3 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 8 3 List of Ancestors This report contains two bodies the Consanguinity Analysis of the Ancestors See 8 4 and the List of Ancestors below List of Ancestors The tree of Ancestors is shown It is done by generation so the parents come first then the grandparents great grandparents etc Ascendant tree in form of list LIST OF THE ANCESTORS OF t1588 T2006 Joseph N Jones 1945 PARENTS 2 E August M Jones 1907 3M Marilyn B Johnson 1914 4 FF John Bill T Jones 1ATS 5 MF Carolyn F Baker 1676 6 FM Joseph F Johnson 1662 7 MM Monique F Wilson 1889 Found 4 ancestors of 4 expected in this generation a FFF Daniel B Jones 1656 9 MFF Juana Maria E Moore 1854 10 FMF Peter J Baker 1850 11 MMF Tolomea C Rodriguez 1854 12 FFM Jack V Johnson 1860 13 MFM Ariana N Smith 1864 14 FMM Mikel R Wilson 1835 15 MMM Carolyn V Ward 1851 Found ancestors of 6 expected in
109. Files created by GDS In particular GDS creates automatically the following types of files from the Panel of Update of the Individual creating links to them in the spaces of text of any tab of the Individual Panel the Marriage Information the Data Source files or the Surnames files Files of text DOC in particular if you have Microsoft Word installed GDS opens and creates and maintains a Word file Files WAV If you have a Microphone and an adequate Sound Card you will be able to record your voice Photos and Documents JPG PDF or TIF directly from your scanner Other files introduced manually From the Panel of Update of the individual you can link any file that had an association with the Operating System or even an EXE application Thus any multimedia file for example can be part of your Database MOV AVI MP3 files etc Even Photos and Documents in different formats of the supported by GDS can be included as hyperlinks GDS will not manage these files directly but gives control to the associated application at the moment of calling them The user is responsible of the acquisition and maintenance of the associated applications Files not contained in the Database but accessible from GDS Any file that is accessible in your PC or in a network can be part of the information linked to your Database From the Panel of Update of the Individual the Marriage information the Data General Family Documentation System GDS
110. Full screen images display options Real size at 100 Fitto screen C Fiton Width Fit ta height Fit the smaller side Fit the larger side Accept Cancel Apply Figure 113 User Options Photos at Full Screen From this window you select the Full Screen option of choice See Display of a Photo or Document 9 7 3 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Tab of JPG and TIF Options From this window you can choose the Options of recording of the JPG and TIF files Or E F T j Language Preferences Full screen images GOS start options Authorizations Recording factors for JPG and type JPG compressed TIF files The image compression ratio of JPG files can be adjusted with the Chrominance and the Luminance Factors among others and this algo determines the quality of the recording Lower settings for these properties result in higher quality images with less compression Higher settings for these properties result in lower quality images with more compression The default settings of 24 for luminance and 30 for chrominance provides about a 12 7 image compression ratio with minimal data logs Chrorminance Factor 20 Recover default Luminance Factor 24 Recoridng options for TIF files GOS can write TIF files without compression of with JPG tupe compression the case of compression the parameters above are of use C Not compressed f Compressed type JPG Accept Cancel
111. GNE emt Date of mariage Comments a e E T email 210 mm A Total Characters a7 4 fio age Festore Create the Gated message Figure 189 Choosing parameters to send a List of Individuals by E mail Choose the fields to send and click on Create the message See The list of Individuals 7 6 6 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 16 Exit GDS Every time you exit GDS it will encourage you to backup your Database The most appropriate method for a backup Is to copy the full Database Directory to a safe place out of your computer Marshall System cannot be held responsible of the lost Data due to reasons beyond our control To understand how to obtain backup copies of your Database go to Backup of the Database See 18 Exit GDS Thank vou for using the GDS Time span of this session 0 38 12 Number of routines used 320 814 Remember to back up your Database To understand how to protect your Program and Data click on the Help icon below or press F1 Backup Exit GOS Backing up the Database i Cancel and Back Figure 190 Exiting GDS 16 1 Exit by error This panel appears at the moment an unrecoverable problem has been encountered Al care has been taken for minimize the occurrence of errors but there is always a remote possibility that this abnormal situation occurs In that case the error ends normally with the cancellation of the program There is not any reason you cannot
112. Hellenic Calendar Hispanic Calendar Inca Calendar Irish Calendar Julian Calendar Mayan Calendar this term refers to a set of synchronized multiple Calendars of the various Mayan people it is still used by some of its inhabitants e Russian Calendar Julian reformed Experimental Calendars e French republican Calendar e Soviet revolutionary Calendar e Swedish Calendar Proposals to reform of calendar From ancient times the life of the society is basically organized around two cycles of time One is the year with duration of approximately 365 days is given by the astronomy and the other shorter is the cycle of seven days or week Also other cycles are used in the cultures present today as day month or although of lesser importance quarter and station Because the number days of the year vary between 365 and 366 and any of these two numbers is a multiple of seven the disposition of the days in the Calendar varies year after year Technically our Gregorian Calendar is a cycle ordered of 14 different Calendars This together with the arbitrary duration of the months 28 to 31 days has made the nineteenth century emerge diverse voices with some proposals for reform Leaving aside those who sought of varying the duration of the weeks these reforms can be classified according to their answers to three questions A What to do with the extra day or two days in case of leap year 1 the most natural solution and the consider
113. If once assigned the father or the mother and placed the sibling in his her place in the list of siblings you assign the other parent having children of a previous marital union and therefore with another list of siblings GDS merges both lists creating a single list of siblings To do this it places the child in question also in the list of siblings of the second parent before the merging of two lists General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 This action is made automatically by GDS What happens is that if it cannot do it due to the fact that there is a missing date of birth of any of the siblings then the user should not be surprised that GDS prompted two times for the placement of the sibling in a list For more details please refer to the chapter Assigning parents See 7 8 5 Page 91 8 Reports and Graphics 8 1 Reports Whenever you are working with a Database you can create the following Reports At any time The Statistical Analysis of the Database See 8 12 You can access the Statistical Analysis of the database by means of the following methods e From the menu File Database Analysis and Statistics e Pressing Ctrl E or e Clicking on the Database Analysis and Statistics of the icons bar i When an Individual Panel is visible by clicking one of the controls at the left of the panel e The Full Display of the Individual record See 8 2 e The consanguinity Analysis of the Ancestors and th
114. Individual or a group of Individuals by name and or Surname by Number of Control by number of Sousa Ahnentafel based in special conditions on dates and places of birth and or death or by lists of Individuals classified by Surnames and name Furthermore identification of the Individuals with Photos and Documents in the Database as well as with a photo in his her own panel Fuzzy search for cases of doubtful or defective writing List of Ancestors or ascendant tree in form of list up to a maximum of 100 Generations Graphic of Ancestors up to 10 Generations Automatic connection to new generations List of Consanguinity of Ancestors List of descendants Selection of the number of generations to be shown up to a maximum of 100 Graph up to 100 Descendants Generations Descendant Tree between Two Individuals Search the familiar relation between Two Individuals Both search of consanguineous as in the case of conjugal relations Page 19 Function of Search of Events by Selection of dates giving the list of Individuals who match with their anniversary baptism marriage or death Analysis of Surnames by the Melgar method From Father and Mother up to more than 250000 Surnames corresponding up to the Surnames incorporated in the eighteen generation Detailed information of the genealogy of every Surname Creation and maintenance of Additional Information on the basis of the record of every individual through
115. Individuals therefore they laced chronologically to the principle of Photos and Documents Album GDS is permanently checking that there is no file with the same name in the Data Directory and if this occurs changes the name of the copied file in a way that ensures that there is no overwriting of any existing file in the system When finished GDS closes this panel and opens the Unclassified Images Page 201 9 8 7 Choosing the format of the multipage file to be created Format of the mono or multipage file _ File to file or multipage file integration f One page Photo of document of one page Format of the files to be created fe POF Portable Document Format Adobe C TIF Tag Image File Format Cancel Accept Figure 121 Choosing the format of the multipage file to be created From this panel the user choose whether the document will be single page or multipage In case you choose single page the file is saved in JPG format In the case you choose multipage the file is saved in PDF or TIF format according to your choice 9 8 8 Manual introduction of Photos and Documents to the Photos and Documents Album From the normal Windows systems you can move any file in format BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF to the Database Directory In this case the associated IF2 file is not created so even if the file is located in the right Directory you will be forced to rebuild the Photos and Documents
116. Integer of 4 bytes Witness Third Long Integer of 4 bytes Notary Chapters Long Integer of 4 bytes Reserved for expansion String length 84 Total Length of the register 2830 bytes Page 217 The following formats exist depending of TypeReg TypeReg 1 Titles Professions TypeReg Integer of 2 bytes Value 1 Ctrl1 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to this Individual Ctrl2 Integer of 4 bytes Not used Date 0 a Date 9 String of length 10 bytes Not used Short Text 0 a Short Text 15 Strings of length 100 bytes Not used Long Text String of length 1000 bytes free description and link with external files Identification of Type of Union String of length 1 byte Not used Identification of Type of Separation String of length 1 byte Not used Last Update Date String of length 8 bytes Updated automatically Different format for before and after year 2000 Last Update Time String of length 10 bytes Updated automatically Reserved for expansion String length 100 TypeReg 2 Birth baptism TypeReg Integer of 2 bytes Value 2 Ctrl1 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to this Individual Ctrl2 Integer of 4 bytes Not used Date 0 String of length 10 bytes Date of the Baptism See Internal dates format Date 1 a Date 9 String of length 10 bytes Not used Short Text 0 Strings of length 100 bytes Midwife Short Text 1 Strings of length
117. List See 8 7 from any List of Individuals See 7 6 6 as well as from the Life Span Graph See 8 15 you can activate the Number of alive Graph of the selected set of Individuals This graphic show all the Individuals selected expressing the number of them who were alive in the range of years that go from the date of birth of the oldest up to the last date of death or the current date if applicable There were 45 individuals alive in 1874 with date of birth and or death in the original individuals list Click to see the list 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 Figure 65 Number of alive Graph Clicking at any point of the graph develops de list of Individuals that were alive that year General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 Photos and Documents Album GDS creates and maintains a Photos and Documents Album The Photos and Documents Album is formed from the files of all Photographs and documentary contained in the Database Directory This however does not inhibit that any Photo or Document located in another Directory any of the computer network being displayed However the Photos and Documents not in the Database Directory will not be considered belonging to the Photos and Documents Album Any Photo or Document content in the Photos and Documents Album can be accessed by various methods Th
118. MARSHALL SYSTEM beneral tamily Documentation System GUS Version U User s Manual September 2012 The General family Documentation System GDS is a product property of Marshall System Il P 6th Release By MARSHALL SYSTEM Il S C P http Avww gdsystem net First Release April 2009 Second Release October 2009 Third Release May 2010 Fourth Release November 2010 Fifth Release March 2011 sixth Release September 2012 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 To my wife and partner Maria Antonia who for years has endured with great resignation my dedication to this project Without her patience and understanding could not ever dare to execute it All users who suffered the evolution of GDS year after year and have indicated me the faults and the good things that allowed the product to be what is it today hope this work will continue in the future Joaquim M Casals de Nadal April 2009 October 2009 May 2010 November 2010 March 2011 September 2012 Page 3 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 General family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 User s Manual Contents DS Vy CLCONNG E E E E A E A E 15 T SOG CUO eeir an EE ET EE TE 16 Te VA AG LFS UGS O GDO reser E E E 18 eo Main Functions ol ODS sessen rsen n EER E Ea 19 1 4 System ReguremMmENM Sason AERE ERER 21 2 A he Ditor CNC OLY ernen E 22 2 1 The Sousa system of numbering anc
119. MARSHALL SYSTEM Send a copy of the Data Base files to MARSHALL SYSTEM Webs created with GDS Figure 187 Accessing the friendly webs Page 289 15 9 Sending a list of Individuals by E mail Just when you have a List of Individuals visible you can send an E mail directly with the TXT file equivalent Jatz File Individuals Equivalencies Photos and Documents _ Sai pte HO E List of er report via an e mail List of the 1234 individuals of the Database Middle Initial 000545 rrr Adams 000546 Mayra Figure 188 Accessing to sending an E mail of the list of Individuals Click on the icon Send this report via an E Mail The following Panel appears Preparation of the printing of the individual list Column characters 7 Control 4 T Certainty a Prefix T_ Kind of descendant IY First Name 25 e om Also named iia on l Throne name Bites Kaasas M Surname Father na W Sumame bother pe rip iis Suffix a Hz Governance period pa Dism mee une ie 7 Nickname Siite ane asm E aip iper iik i l Gender 297 mm ssa giner E Nobiliary Titles ee eee ee Dynasty EES Seren Lineage ia imme Rage anc a I Birth date Seeeee masip Xma de Li Birthplace rien awe E T Country of birth ate kereer Y V Death date zae ma o Death place Sirus ee a ay T Country of death Dima mam eo DS U OAN anana Cause of death on Biss teeny Masa fen
120. Moore 21796 a es ee ee ee ee es es es S R mulo B White 21796 1844 ae as ee ees ees ee Joseph F Johnson 1799 71845 e ER ig Gee ees wees ee Foster S Jones 1801 t1876 t _ EG HR ees eee eee ee Tolomea Wells 1802 11836 ce ea LC mae mi ll Ariana M Walker 1803 1872 a Se ae ay a ee ee ad ee ee Mario Johnson 1804 1862 Sa a ea ee ge ee eee es ee N In s Morrison 21807 1862 ae ay a a ee ee ee ee ep es ee ee ee E praean Rio toner e E Se en ae ao oe oe Mikel Wilson 1807 1882 Ce es ee e e Ps es ce ee ee oe Mandy Lewis 1808 1870 SS LS A a a es ee nee eee eee ee ee Benita James 21811 1865 ee a i cs eee es ees ee Mandy James 21811 1892 ih he ie ee ae a eee ee ee ee ee Daniel C Jones 1819 1876 Sy a a e ee ee ee ee eee E August Baker 21820 1868 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ OO Vincent Ward 1820 1898 ae ee ee eae ea Gel a Pr ee ees ee ee Peyton Rodriguez 1822 1901 ee a ae a ee eee ee ee ee ee ee Marjory Hart 21825 1850 _ _ _ a f fl Joseph P Johnson 21829 1900 any ae ee ea ee aed eae eel ee ed en oe ee Javier B Moore 1829 M ee Vicenta B White 21829 1907 S T E ee Ee Ses ees es es ees Mario Rodriguez 21830 1915 SE SS SS SS ES ES et ed ae es Sy ees ees ee Ge ee ee Joseph R Smith 21830 1899 ee EEE ae Marjory Young 21830 1913 ee ee ee a ee Ss a ses ee es eee ee Vanesa P Jones 21831 1920 a Ee ee ee ae hz a ee i ees eee ee es e r e Diana Y Johnson 1832 1912 SS ee es Ss
121. Name change Change Location Change Country Clear Te d Will change the 12 individuals with first name Penelope by Penny By the way has not found any person whose first name Penny This operation is irreversible Do you want to continue Figure 197 Massive changes of Texts Example Page 327 21 11 Equivalencies of Names Surnames and places of birth and death Pressing the menu Equivalencies the following panel appears Equivalence Management names and places of birth and death Thiz panel iz aimed to manage the lists of equivalence of names and places of birth and death The general list shows all equrvalence groups that cause GDS to search for any of individuals with their text equal to any of the text of an equivalence group From the detail list the user creates or modifies an equivalence group moving it once completed to the general list At the end of the session save the changes Detail List General list Antonette 4ntonia Text Input Add text ta the list Loma Deuter Exit Edit 4 group Delete 4 group Figure 198 Panel of Equivalencies of Names In every line of the box of the right General List there are expressed the various texts that are equivalent at the time of search of Individuals In the time of performing the search Not during advanced search GDS will check the name or surname with any Equivalence giving as a result all the Individuals who meet any o
122. PDF PNG TIF or TIFF inside the Photos and Documents Album The files that allow multipage also are supported by GDS To see how to introduce those in the Photos and Documents Album see the chapter Adding Photos and Documents See paragraphs 9 8 and subchapters Note It is very important to understand that GDS Maintains files BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF standard without modifying their contents With the exception of the right and left turn and the vertical and horizontal transpositions in the update function of image which rewrites the corresponding file in the case of JPG files and in the case of correction of red eyes Also GDS maintains series of associated files that allow indexing all photos or graphic document in a way that they can belong to an unlimited number of individual Albums or have some additional content as described below The fact that a Photo or Document is in an unlimited number of albums or have a content or otherwise does not change anything in the BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF file thereby maintaining the compatibility with other systems Keys for understanding this subject There are three distinct concepts the use of the mouse and the keyboard the Contents of the Photo or Document and the capable actions with the files Use of the mouse and the keyboard Moving the mouse over of the Photo or Document you can perform multiple functions It is important to understand the flexib
123. Photo or Document You get a drop down list Click on Delete GDS will indicate that the Removal of the Photo or Document is irreversible so it asks you to confirm the Removal The Photos and Documents Album will be updated accordingly Note Each Photo or Document has associated files See 9 7 2 Contents of a Photo or Document these will be also deleted So if the Photo ort Document had a voice recording or a Word document they will be eliminated along with the file of Photo or Document and the IF2 associated file If you go to the update of the Photo or Document by the above procedure notice that you can Individually Delete the Voice Recording Word or the document without altering the Photo or Document General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 9 Multipage Documents With the possibility of maintaining Multipage Documents Photos and Documents in the Album GDS gets the ability of the maintenance of Essential Documents as contracts deeds certificates of Birth Death Wills Marriage Chapters etc Every document is stored as one single entity and with the same characteristics as if it were a photo GDS Supports the Introduction storage display and printing of Multipage Documents in reading PDF TIF TIFF ICO formats and it records in TIF format compressed with JPEG compression parameters or in PDF format Thus the introduction of Multipage Documents is made from e A Any scanner or TWAIN device
124. S maintains a collection of image and document files as Photos an Document Album provided they meet the following conditions A The Photos and Documents are in the format BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF e B They are contained in the Directory Folder of Data i e The same Directory in which the entire GDS Database is contained The Photos and Documents Album is intended to contain all the family documents photos graphs college titles wills certificates contracts and in general any document that has relevance for the user whether it is single page or multipage GDS reads all files that meets these conditions and understands that the file in question is a file of the Photos and Documents Album However at the moment of creating a file by GDS it is stored using the JPG format if a file with is a single page and PDF or TIF if it is multipage The JPG format is a format of high compression which has become a standard in the market so it was decided to use this format for GDS maintains a collection of image and document files as Photos an Document Albums provided they meet the following conditions e A The Photos and Documents are in the format BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF e B They are contained in the Directory Folder of Data i e The same Directory in which the entire GDS Database is contained The Photos and Documents Album is intended to contain all the family documents photos graphs c
125. See 13 2 o To create a Database subset See 13 5 o Create a Web See 15 3 Backup of the Database See 18 e Registry of the Database See 3 2 e Edit Data of the register See 3 1 e Exit GDS See 16 Individuals e Individual search See 7 6 e Add an Individual See 7 4 e Integrate two Individuals See 13 4 Equivalencies See 21 11 Photos and Documents e Open the Photos and Documents Album See chapter 9 and its subchapters e Rebuild the Photos and Documents Album See 9 6 Data Sources See 10 Surnames See 11 What can I do now See 6 3 At any time you have at your disposition the list of actions that you can make Click on this title of the menu and choose according to the list that is displayed in a dropdown Tools e Options See chapter 5 and its subchapters e Events See 8 13 e Massive changes of Names and Places See 21 10 e Analysis of the links between Individuals Performs a thorough analysis of the integrity of the links of the chains of Individuals e Recreate the lists of Names Surnames dynasties lineages and places of birth and death Redo the internal lists in order to help the search of Individuals e Chain correction Only under direct support of Marshall System Manually corrects the errors of strings e Windows Resources See 5 2 It describes the resources for the word processor the voice recorder the Internet browser and the system of e mail e Language See 5 8 Window e Ca
126. T Alive F Deaths Fuzzy Search Continue gt gt Cancel Figure 25 Advanced search of Individuals in Search by Fields General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Act the Following way Choose the option of your interest In the case of an Individual of his ancestors or descendants of him her the system prompts you to choose which Individual is the one to be developed In the case of other options depending on the Contents of the Data the Panel will expand for you to choose your options The system will identify all Individuals fulfilling all the conditions imposed and will list the ones meeting the criteria See 7 6 6 To use the fuzzy search check the corresponding control In this case the search is done trying to find texts that are either poorly written or are close to the requested In the list of Individuals a column is added that indicates the percentage of certainty of every one of the Individuals found correspond to the search For Example with the fuzzy search will find Individuals named Anthony as having the same than Antonio when you are looking for Antonio Also you can indicate that you want to perform the search about the Individuals who are living or only the dead ones See Indication of Individual as dead See 21 9 7 6 12 Getting to the register of an Individual Is it possible to arrive to the register of an Individual by any of the following methods New search Direct relatio
127. Update of data about Will At the entrance of witnesses as well as the Notary of the Chapters of Marriage the system asks if that Individual is in the Database in which case the search is made on it in order for collocate him her in its place General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Information about Death and Burial Various information in relation to the Death and the Burial The free information is ASCII text Limited to 1000 characters Creating digital links See 7 8 4 Information about the death and burial of Joseph N nae Jones Save Exit without modify Dead at Count Cause of death Date of burial Burial or cremation Place of burial Burial Cemetery Incineration Book Register Sacramental Book Insert File link Create document Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic album Connection to a Data Source Figure 35 Update about data of death and burial Information about Personal data Various information about the personal data of the Individual The free information is ASCII text Limited to 1000 characters Creating digital links See 7 8 4 B o lea Nenssossecsonsesscessosceccseseseseseacocasscnsasnencnencnes t Save Exit without ned Contact information of Joseph N Jones Contact name Address Address City Zip Postal code State Country Telephone Cellular FAX O e mail Search address Home page Passport numb
128. XT file with the contents of this graphic go to the icons bar Send this report via E mail See Sending Reports by Internet 15 1 Statistics About one portion of the Database From the lower panel you can access to the Selection of Individuals whom you want to perform the statistics of Names Surnames and places of birth and death See 8 14 Statistical Analysis of Names Surnames and Places or the Life Span Graph See 8 15 Life span Graph 8 13 Function of Search of Events From this Function you get the Individuals who meet their anniversary baptism Marriage onomastics or death according to the conditions that the user indicates You can start the function either from the panel of anniversaries that appears automatically to the start of the program or from the menu Tools Events General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Selection of individuals O All individuals f Living individuals only C Only dead Anniversanes in this range Clic on a name to see his her panel ANIVersanes Ra la Daniels 88 years old 24 0 Een Simona F Diaz 33 years old 27 07 Melissa C Duncan 66 pears old 24 07 Iv Births ltziar N Garcia 50 years old 20 07 fw Baptisms Laia C Moreno 55 pears old 26 07 Melissa M Taylor 95 years old 25 07 Ea Sas i Antonette PL Tumer 46 pears old 23 07 lw Weddings W Deaths Date Range A single date Date Range C One week from t
129. a ae Ee ee res re eet eee eee ees ee eee Monique Steward 21833 1870 E E E E o Ariana Knight 1834 e ea ee ee S ee a ee eee ee Amadeus R Wilson 21834 1892 a aes ee ee ee ee es es A SS ST ST ST E Raquel Clark 1835 41879 jf _ _ ese Antonette Cunningham 1835 t1900 A a aT SE ee ee Ee es ee A EE Ree es ee ee Figure 64 Life span Graph lt shows all the Individuals selected and for every one of them his her range of life is reflected in a graphic horizontal If there is some uncertainty in the date of birth or death an estimate is performed by placing the last few years to the right or to the left with an increasing shift of color Note in the graphic that if the mouse is pointing to an Individual and a given year this Individual is shown in the top of the graphic At the same time the number of Individuals living in the year is indicated Moving the mouse left and right as well as up and down it will dynamically report both the Individual of the raw as well the estimate of Individuals living in the corresponding year of the column To the right of the graphic you have the control of the order in which the Individuals are presented in the list At first the list is shown with the same order than the one from originating list but you can sort them by date of birth death or surname Page 119 8 16 Number of alive Graph From the Function of Statistics See 8 12 from the List of Ancestors See 8 3 the Descendants
130. act Information In the Panel of Display of Marriage or conjugal union e In the Panel of Data Source e In the Panel of Surname General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Click on the theme that you want to include in the point of the Panel that you left the cursor Bee Thematic index a F Astronomy 1 of Portraits 17 i Children 4 Tourism 5 Insert File link teate document zeate recording eate Photography Connection to thematic alh Connection to 4 Dats Source Cancel Figure 75 The List of Thematic Albums At the moment you do a click on any of the Albums of the list a link is places in the location of the cursor You will see the full name of the Theme appearing in red in the appointed place surrounded by lt lt gt gt Once you save the information clicking on that area will open the browser of the album 9 3 6 The Photo or Document and its positioning in the Photos and Documents Album The Photos and Documents are always sorted by date The date assigned to the Photo or Document is the basis for determining in which place of any Photos and Documents Album should be placed Do not confuse the date of the Photo or Document with the date of the Page 137 corresponding file For example when a new image is inserted through the scanner the date of the file is the current date while the date of the document is the one introduced by the user wh
131. add new Individuals e Yes want to register now Assuming that you already have your License key and you want to introduce it now e Edit your Registration Data That will address you to 3 1 Registering your personal data in your computer 3 3 1 Process of acquisition of the Database License If you have pressed Acquisition of the license for this Database this panel appears Registration of the license of GDS GDS General Family Documentation System Personal data of the licensee Buying Process Enter the data for registration Those marked with an asterisk are From here you will connect to the Paypal service with which you can pay required with any credit or debit card safely If you do not have Internet connection or unwilling to make the purchase in this way press the button Other methods of purchase Name Surnames My name My Sumame GDS Version 7 0 requires a license for each database Once registered the database can be transferred over another computer with the condition that Address the user is the same My address Purchase via Paypal Zip Code City The price of the VISA SOX My City license for this State Country database is ES My Ste IMyCounty Secure Shopping y State y Country pee y Telephone My telephone PayPal e mail My E mail Enter the License f Other methods of purchase Repeat the e mail Enter the license provided M y E mail Fiscal identificat
132. age 15 1 1 Introduction The set of programs and files of the General family Documentation System GDS form a product under the Marshall System logo designed to meet the needs of all those users both individuals as Professionals interested in the recording and tracking of documentation related with the Individuals and their relation between them The capabilities and features of GDS are designed for all the requirements of our users were satisfied or exceeded GDS was designed to be extremely easy of use for users not experts in IT systems in a way that you will need just a superficial knowledge of the use of the operating system Windows XP Vista or 7 GDS is designed both for users of Spanish speaking culture as for the Anglo Saxon culture where the nomenclature of Surnames markedly differs One of the distinguishing features of GDS compared to any other Genealogy program is its capacity of using of the two Surnames used in Spanish and Portuguese inverse order of Surnames or the Anglo Saxon naming which is one found in all the programs existing at present With regard to the use of several Languages GDS is designed to use the English Castilian Catalan or other languages to be incorporated in the future in a dynamic way That is in the same session the users can switch languages without the need of rebooting GDS is a Genealogy system but is not limited to this sole function GDS is best described as a system of personal d
133. aine en niient ecatintsaianinnn ance Re mua neee Rea aennmencaRReananane 53 7 The Individual and the Individual network sscccccccsssssscccsssssssccccccsssscccees 54 7 1 The individual record ccceecceecceeeceeeseeeceeeseueceeeseueceueseeseesseeeseeeseeeseeeseeesaeees 54 7 2 The Individual Panel cc cccccecccccccecccccccecccccacececueacececteaueneeneauententaueneeneaneanens 55 7 3 Data in the Individual record ccececee eee eect cece eee eee ee eae esse ee eaaeeesaeeesaaeesaaeeesees 56 Tate Basic Gatasor te ndivi dial ninen er cata eeacenned 56 7 3 2 Prefix and Suffix on the name of the Individual i ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 Peed Additonal nonna o ear A N 57 Kod Ot Net Tn onma OD eaa n naa 57 7 3 5 Information about the Surname ss tnsececescete aie the eateries 57 7 3 6 Information about education titles and professions ssseeeeessssssseeeeeees 58 1 3 ra InformatoabDout DUIN ecirar E 58 Toom IEOr Ma HOM AD OUT wiza a rasainawekiet ue eaedaneeaweees 58 7 529 gt MMLOrmatiOn ADOUL GOAL sares seabed dateiaconaeinantaanuee 59 7 3 10 Display Marriage or other unions cccccccccccesseeeseececeeeeaeeeesseeeceeeeeeaas 59 7 3 11 Information about Individual data ccccsssssesseeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeenaas 61 PASAJ a NCW INGIVIGUAleicincs peices sehen EO 62 Foe ie Number or Conops 62 7 6 Searching an Individual or several in the Database
134. alendar But in the year 44 bC the pagan pontiffs decided to consider leap years every three common years instead of every four Time after they realized of the gap brought up to the year 10 adC and was corrected in the 8 dD by Caesar Augustus who ordered to exclude the extra day of every leap year for 36 years i e up to the year 44 dD Development of the Julian Calendar In the year 153 adC the Ist of January is taken as the start of the year in place of the traditional Ist of March in order to be able to plan the campaigns of the year con time It is made of 364 days divided in 12 months except the leap years that have 365 days and adds an additional day to the month of February The Julian Calendar counts as leap years one of every four years including the secular years With this Calendar an error of 7 5 days is gotten every 1 000 years The order of the months and the distribution of the days was as follows januarius 31 days februarius 30 and after 28 or 29 the leap years martius 31 aprilis 30 malus 31 junius 30 julius 31 previously quintilis General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 augustus 30 previously sextilis and after 31 september 31 and after 30 october 30 and after 31 november 31 and after 30 december 30 and after 31 The way of counting the days followed the Roman tradition up to when the Visigoths introduced the custom of numbering the day
135. am but having already the basis of the data structure that has prevailed with some important changes up to today The intention is that you get an idea of the continuous improvements made thanks to the comments of hundreds of users that have helped to create more and more functions with their commenis criticisms and corrections Since there is a great variety of users from young affectionate to old and very old retirees and from non professionals to doctorates in history and social sciences the historical developments as well as the sophistication of certain functions are to their majority opinion the only ones existing in any program of Genealogy See for example the complexity and flexibility of the expression of dates the analysis of the surnames the treatment of the Julian and Gregorian Calendars the family relation between people the equivalences in names and places and the analysis and integration of duplicated Individuals just to name some of them Also a great step forward was the development of the Photo and Document Album that is a sophisticated application by itself that justifies the name of GDS as the General Family Documentation System Its unique characteristics put together the network of Individuals with the network of Documents and Photos in such a way that GDS pretends to be THE repository for the complete digital memory of the family or the professional Databases of complete communities Little attention have taken to i
136. ame the first Surname of the mother of the paternal grandmother e Eight Surname the first Surname of the mother of the maternal grandmother e Etc See the List of Surnames See 8 9 for more information Page 23 2 3 The naming conventions GDS supports three different Conventions of Names A Spanish Convention for the Spanish and speaking Countries Use the name and two Surnames The name is usually given by the parents the first Surname is the first Surname of the father and the second is the first Surname of the mother In the current Spanish legislation this order may change though this is not yet the most usual prerogative B Portuguese Convention Use the name and two Surnames The name is usually given by the parents the first Surname is the first Surname of the mother and the second is the first Surname of the father C Anglo Saxon Convention We use a name a Surname and middle initial The name is usually given by the parents the Surname is usually the Surname of the father The use of the middle initial is varied sometimes being just one letter indicating the start of the Surname of the mother the full Surname of the mother or even other applications Note the identification of Individuals in the GDS Database contains besides other Data the name and the two Surnames This uniqueness means that in the Import and Export of Data of other programs and using the GEDCOM language of Genealogy See The GED
137. amed Orientation Throne name Pe mmi he 1 imer mmi lki iHa C Country of birth W Death date pE zi ii i M Sumame Father E Portrait ai Ei 7 Iw Sumame Mother 4 Suit C Landscape sa Eee i T Governance period ZES fam mmnm Nickname 297 mm Ss e eee Nobiliary Titles an T Dynasty a T Lineage E Ba Jv Birth date a TEE TERE Laran memme na 1m Birthplace zi Sunes a aE Cause of death vee e l Date of marriage ssena l Comments a E e mail eon Total Characters a7 4 fio Page 1 Ceeededd Restore Print Cancel Figure 173 Preview of the list of Individuals General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Si you want to create a TXT file instead of printing the report the panel is as follows Preparation of the printing of the individual list Output option to printer POF or TIF Column characters Output to printer f Output ta TAT m aie oe D Output to file PDF or TIF Prefix Destination folder T_ Kind of descendant I First Name E D gt Phfgifhto gt Also named O Throne name Name of the output POF or TIF file M Sumame Father WM Surname Mother Suffix Govemance period Nickname Gender T Nobilia Titles T Dynasty T Lineage I Birth date C Birthplace I Country of birth Iv Death date l Death place T Country of death Cause of death
138. an Individual e Nephews of an e Uncles Aunts Individual of an Individual e Individuals potentially duplicated in the Database Search options C Search by fields C Ancestors af C Ancestors and collaterals of Descendants of First cousins of Second cousine of Nephew of Uncles Aunts of Individuals potentially duplicated m the Database Figure 24 Options of the Advanced search of Individuals Select based on the contents of fields Search options C Ancestors of C Ancestors and collaterals of C Descendants of First cousins of C Second cousins of C Nephews of C Uncles Aunts of Individuals potentially duplicated in the Database l Prefix First Name l Surname Father I Any place in the name Also named Throne name l Surname Mother l Suffix l Nickname l Dynasty Lineage l Gender l Titles Birth date year only Birth location I Country of birth l Date of Baptism year only l Date of Marriage year only Place of marriage Date of death year only Place of death I Country of death Date of burial year only Place of burial l Cemetery Cause of death I Date will year only The individuals modified after 7 The ones who celebrate their birthday on Those who celebrate their date on 7 Nobiliary Titles Governance period 7 Text in any place of the individual data
139. an individual Zero if not Name foot String of 71 bytes Associated text to the rectangle if it does not link to an individual Blank spaces if the rectangle refers to an Individual e Trailer Page Integer of 2 bytes Value 0 XX_Top_Left String of 2 bytes Value 1 YY_Top_Left String of 2 bytes Value 1 XX_Bottom_Right String of 2 bytes Value 1 YY_Bottom_Right String of 2 bytes Value 1 Number Control foot String of 4 bytes Value 0 Name foot String of 71 bytes Blank spaces XXXXXXXX FBS Files of List of Photos and Documents in un Theme Files of Sequential Access The name of the file indicates the Theme as well as its indentation inside the Thematic Album The name of the file is one of the registers of the ALBUM SUB file defined above Content List of Names of the Photos and Documents that are included in this Theme without extension See ALBUM SUB above XXXX_LIST LST Files of lists of Names Files of Sequential Access The name of the file indicates the list These files are created and maintained by GDS to be able to access the lists of Names Surnames Dynasties Lineages and places of birth and death XXXXXXXX MAP Files of Address for the link a Google Maps Page 223 Files of Sequential Access Inform on the components as Street City ZIP etc GDS5 NRFP File of individuals declared not duplicated Optional file If it exists there is only one Sequential Access by twins of number
140. ancel Figure 142 Panel of Export Options to a GEDCOM file You can change any data of this panel In the export options you can inhibit or the sending of the export of the indicated data Note Observe the option Create GEDCOM file aggregating the first and second Surnames or middle Initial to be used with applications that are not GDS or not supporting the two Surnames This option is meant to use the output file to be imported by any other program not GDS because if the option is selected the two surnames or Middle Initial are placed in just one fields This is necessary since GDS is the only Genealogy program that uses two fields for storing the Surnames and Middle Initial If the export is made for its use in another GDS program do not select this option You can also indicate the destination where the file is addressed Page 243 Program to which is addressed the GEDCOM export file May be left blank by clicking on others Choose the destination ANSFILE Ancestral File of LOS Church TempleReady Ancestral File of LOS Church NFS Temple submission to LOS Church PAF Personal Ancestral File 2 1 or later Roots o Visual Roots FIM Family Tree Maker for DOS FTW Family Tree Maker for Windows Others Accept Cancel Figure 143 The destinations of the GEDCOM file Note in the case of Export to a GEDCOM file if there exists a couple without indication of their genre GDS will ask the
141. and Documents to the Photos and DOCUIMENES A DUM iiss 2 cecccortaas nasanantseecansuracesneeneractenusannnancerd E 202 9 8 9 Adding Photos and Documents from the texts of the Individual Panel 203 Page 7 9 8 10 Remove a Photo or Document ccccccececcecsccececsececsccsceecececceces 204 9 9 MIUNID Age DOCUMENTS ecaiv vite gesesieheondeinaeoeteukieonan inet a Miele bobs dae Gun eestenlis 205 9 10 Advanced functions of the Photos and Documents AlbUM c seeeeeeeees 206 MUD hires SVC A cc A hale ce eee E E escheat ete ati ees ea eter teens ese 207 9 10 2 Advanced search of Individuals in Photos and Documents 207 10 Data SOUTCOS scaiers sacceseacacekeceade esas aes Seca aa aca eas a 209 10 1 Greation Of a Data SOUNE anno R E 211 10 2 ACCESS toa Data SOUNCE rasieren a a N a A A R 212 10 3 Associate a Data Source to a portion of text of the Individual Panel 213 10 4 Access to the Individuals that are associated to a Data Source 0 213 10 5 Associate a group of Individuals to a Data Source ccceeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 213 DES PHE PANel OF Surnames ocsccesseesaddssvcececatestecdscveccecaneeveied EE 214 12 Phe GDS DAlaDaSse wacsesdeedestecsissee seeec ccs csdeesivedecdeckestvateesvacccckestessiucdeedechestwateeedaveeess 216 12 1 Te Ral dates LOMMAL sccssie cs ucnsotew circ a das otc 225 13 Import and Export Databases
142. anner To facilitate the task of the user GDS generates file names automatically GDS always checks that the names of the generated files are not duplicated so it is safe to let GDS generate the file names as there will never be a conflict However the user may change them if so desire In fact the recommendation is that the user allows GDS to do the job since in most of the cases the names of the files are irrelevant to the user From the menu bar Tools Options Preferences Names of inserted files from the Photo Album Documents or Recordings it is possible to express your option See User Options See 5 0 5 4 The dates convention GDS supports the two most common Conventions of Dates in their short expression no text e The European Convention Day Month and Year It is expressed as DD MM YYYY e The American Convention Month Day and Year It is expressed as MM DD YYYY No matter how you express the date the date in the files is always expressed with a complex internal code including other indications about uncertain dates and many other data qualifying the date The user can change the date s convention during the operation of GDS without having any effect on the data Note This Convention does not affect the expression of Dates in textual form which is only related to the Language in use at the moment Thus for Example March 4 2012 is expressed this way in English but is will be expressed as 4 de March de 2012 in Span
143. anseuaaconeuasas me uaacuaneuon detest oeraneracaamebsteonesbiesnuenadeoseniso 106 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 8 10 Descendant Tree between two INdIVIGUAIS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 109 8 11 Family relation between two Individuals ccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeaes 111 8 12 Statistics and Analysis of the Database ccccceccceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeeeaes 114 8 13 FUNCHON OL SeA CN OL EVENTS sucess sihahac ssi ceactasianidne siduheneslerieasaleuheseataaadenaisuhde 116 8 14 Statistical Analysis of Names Surnames and places of birth and death 118 85 Liespan Grap Neen nee eee ee inte nee ee ee ee eer ee eae eee 119 8 16 Number of alive Graph cc ccccecccceececeeeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeeseesesseeeeseeessaeeeseneessaeeeas 120 9 Photos and Documents AIDUML ccccsssccscccccccccsssccsssssssssssssssscssccccccssssseees 121 9 1 Principles of the Photos and Documents AIOUM cccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 122 9 2 The panel of the Photos and Documents Album cccseceeeeneeeneeeneeeneeenes 124 9 3 The diverse Photos and Documents AIDUMS cece eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeaaeees 128 9 3 1 The diverse Photos and Documents Albums cc eeeeeccccecceeeeeseeeeeeeeees 129 9 3 2 The individual Photos and Documents Albums cccccccsssseeeeeeeeees 130 99 5 Ehe
144. aphics Basically any printing activity can be addressed to a printer or can be replaced by a file than can be a PDF or TIF file in the case of graphics or a TXT file for the cases of listing The monitoring of the quality number of pages size format etc is described in the following sections Also any report can be sent by e mail Go to the chapter Sending Reports by Internet See 15 1 14 1 Printing Reports Virtually all the information that appears in the Screen can be printed in any Printer of the system The impression is directed to the default Printer which can be chosen at any time Alternatively in place of printing the report GDS can create a multipage file or single page that in the majority of the cases will be identical to the report or graphic you see in the screen The user has at his her disposition a set of options that facilitate the creation from a report of one single page up to multiple pages reports to be collaged after to create graphs of large dimension Also the features of the Printer can be modified to your needs as per its available features As for the creation of files these can be created in PDF or TIF format for the graphs and TXT for the lists of Texts To Print or create a file from any report or graphic click on the print icon or on the menu File Print You can also press the keys Ctrl P when the report to print is visible and active The Reports can be printed are the Following ASCII Reports
145. as their parents soouses and children giving a margin The sole existence of one discrepancy is understood that the two are not Individuals Potentially duplicated e If both have Indication of Period of Government they must be equal General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 13 4 2 List of Individuals potentially duplicated Can access to the analysis of the Individuals Potentially duplicated from the following Places 1 From the Advanced Search of Individuals 2 From the Statistics of the Database 3 From the Menu Individuals Integrate two Individuals The list of Individuals Potentially duplicated is the main origin of the process of integration of Individuals but it is not only one If the user knows that in spite of not being detected by GDS there are two Individuals who are duplicated you can also integrate accessing the menu Individuals Integrate two Individuals Also in any list of Individuals at the moment you select two of them you a control named Integrate two Individuals appear in the bottom right of the list Clicking on it you access to the same application From the Advanced search of Individuals There is an option in the Advanced Search of Individuals specifically designed for arriving at the list in question search options C Search by fields f Ancestors of f Ancestors and collaterals of Descendants of First cousins of Second cousins of Nephews of Uncles
146. as well as external For example this picture below is a photo contained in the Photo and Document Album Figure 29 Update of the Additional Information of the Individual Information of Surname Here you can place as much information as you wish as well of Images and textual links to files of any type There is no limitation in the dimension of this information GDS will create an AD1 file by surname for any one you want to have information See the GDS Database There is a single file by surname which is shared by all the Individuals who have this as surname This file has the RTF format so all the facilities of this format are General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 acceptable for GDS such as rich format of text and the embedding of Images or files This is the same information obtained in the menu Surnames See The Panel of Surnames 11 Creating digital links See 7 8 4 z Basic Inf Additional inf Surname Inf Titles Birth Marriage Union wii Death Parents Contact information Save Exit Common information about the Surname JONES a Bal Figure 30 Update of the data about the Surname Information about education titles and professions Information about education titles and professions ASCII text Limited to 1000 characters Creating digital links See 7 8 4 E Je Basic Inf Additional Inf Surname Inf Titles Birth Marriage Union wili Death Pa
147. ase of lists of Individuals has a special treatment for printing or creating a TXT file To access to the panel of configuration of printing options click Print icon on the icons bar or press the Ctrl P keys The following panel appears General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Print or file creation of a text report Preparation of the printing of the individual list Column characters Control 4 T Certainty Output option to printer POF or TIF i Output to printer Output to TT Printer zl Pei id EAR First Name HF Photosmart 6510 seres Aed find of descendant I First Name a Where Hel Also named Orientation f Portrait Landscape Throne name M Sumame Father MW Surname Mother a Suffix lovenance period Nickname Gender G T Nobiliary Titles T Dynasty Lineage Jv Birth date Birthplace Country of birth W Death date Death place 39 T Country of death Cause of death Date of mariage O Comments a e maill Choose Printer Paper size Millimeters and quality Eh The text will be cut in the right side Do you want to adapt the font size to fit on the page Alternativelly you can choose the page as landscape reduce the font size or choose a larger paper size es S Pages to print Total Characters g7 4 101 Number of pages Print all See Preview Restore 20 From f i
148. at corresponds to the person you want to assign this picture The display shows the name of the person concerned Press the right mouse button see a drop down panel One of the options in the dropdown is Assign to panel of individual Left click on this option answer the questions Second method This method is even faster Requirement The same as above Go to the person Click on Images in his her panel a window that displays the photos of this person will appear You will see that there is an option that says Assign one of these images to the panel of click on it Then press the left button at the image you want to be assigned to the panel Another trick From a photograph in which are several people we want just the face of one of them to be assigned to the panel for this particular person You will be able to create a new picture with only the face of the chosen person General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 To do what you want is done in two steps Step 1 Draw a rectangle from a photograph Open the photo Press the right mouse button see a drop down panel A drop down option is Crop Left click on this option A hand with a pointer shows up move the mouse to the upper left corner of the rectangle you want to extract On the face of the person on the left press the left button without releasing it move the mouse to the lower righ
149. ation W Additional inf i lv Titles Information about marriages W Inf i b i Intonation on the wi W Inf i he will M Information about Birth and Death W Information about dates Do not show dates of Individuals born E after Isle Do not show dates of Individuals E married after Ile Do not show dates of Individuals dead _ li 462 Contact Information Dio not include the Individuals born after deceased after Dead Create the Web Cancel Figure 183 Choosing Options of output to the web Once the web is created it is your responsibility to move all the files to a public server to allow the general public to access tt Page 283 15 4 Creating an HTML file with the information of an individual GDS can generate the HTML page with the contents of the record of an individual To access this function open the Panel of an Individual and once it is open and visible access to the menu Internet Create page HTML of this individual and if you will send it by E mail Tools Window Image Help Internet Abbreviations and Create the HTML page of this individual and send it by e mail if you wish Create a Web The Web of MARSHALL SYSTEM Send an e mail to MARSHALL SYSTEM Send a copy of the Data Base files to MARSHALL SYSTEM Friend Webs Figure 184 Initiating the creation of the HTML file of an individual The system will ask you to specify a folder where the files are to be located altho
150. ation of PDF TIF or TXT files See 14 and subchapters To send an e mail with an attached PDF or TIF file with the contents of this list go to the icons bar Send this report via E mail See Sending Reports by Internet 15 1 8 To see the details of configuration of the file to attach access Configure sending a Graph by E mail See 15 1 1 Clicking Preferences you will be able to change the characteristics of the graphic General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Preferences Fonts of the report Font of the main title Font of the secor titles Font of the names Font of the linking texts Test at bottom Author GOS Version 7 0 MARSHALL SYSTEM http aaa gdsystern net Font Text Bottom Left Erase Dates format Width If Show Dates 525 5 Complete rimin Week days E0 Number of Control Show the Control Humber Figure 59 Preferences of the Relation between two Individuals Note The system of concentric search of relations of GDS is unique not knowing the existence of any other system doing this function The development of the algorithm has been a task of two years What you see in a fraction of a second after clicking in the proper control is the result of such a task Page 113 8 12 Statistics and Analysis of the Database The access is done from the icons bar the icon Database Analysis and Statistics Pressing the Ctrl E keys or from the menu Wha
151. ave the desired list of individuals to be exported Then you will choose the fields to export The non selected fields will not be included in the output GEDCOM file Page 241 Indicate here the informations you want to export Informations to export to the GEDCOM file if Gender i Prefix and suffix of the name o Mickname w Birth data w Death data w Data of will w Mariage data W Titles and professions Nobilia Titles Named as and or Name of Throne Governance period Dynasty and or Lineage jf Personal image jf Basic Text Kind of descendant i Additional information 4 4 41 4 4 Figure 141 Selection of the fields to Export toa GEDCOM file Indicating that you want to continue the following panel appears Export to GEDCOM General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Export of the GDS Database to a GEDCOM file Originators data First Name Address City Barcelona State Zip Code Country Telephone OOU U U emai chipping data Database 0 Warbol Casals Copyright Destination Output file D W4rbol Casale Outout GED Notes Export options Export data of the originator Export data of shipment Export Surname files x 4 lt i lt Export Documentary Source files Create the GEDCOM file aggregating the first and the second Surnames to be used with applications that are not GOS or not supporting two Sumames 4 Export C
152. ay with the DEMO Database analysis and statistics Ctrl E Print Preview Print Ctrl P Update F2 Specify Scanner or TWAIN device Import Merge two Databases d Export Backup of the Database Registry of the Database Edit data of the register Exit GDS Figure 132 Accessing to the integration of two Databases The following panel appears Page 229 Please read carefully the information below before proceeding You are aboutto inteqrate the contents of wo Databases In order to do twe assume that there are two Directories the Primary and the Secondary Directories The integration will be done from the Secondary to the Primary preserving all data inthe Primary and adapting the chains of the Secondary while all data is added to the Primary The Primary Directory is the current Data Directory which is DAMARSHALL Devel MDEMO DB 70_EM Should you wantta change the Primary Directory to integrate the Secondary in it click the mouse on Change Primary Directory below change ttand restart the operation mM The final result willbe a Database The Primary with its contents plus the contents ofthe Secondary Directory added to it The secondary Database remains unaltered while the Primary Directory gets enriched with the new data The following conditions are assumed There are no common individuals tis your responsibility ta check the potential Er existence of repeated individuals
153. be zeros were declared not leap years except if its first two are divisible by four So of the years 1600 1700 1800 1900 and 2000 which in the Julian Calendar are leap years in the Gregorian are the only the 1600 and 2000 That means that every four centuries three days are deleted This Calendar was gradually assumed by all the Countries and is used today in the majority of them around the world Currently the lag that occurs is of approximately 3 days every 10 000 years since the year Gregorian is longer than the tropics At present there coexist forty Calendars that have nothing to do between each other Measure the time has always been one of our passions and many errors in the past have arrived to even celebrate spring in winter Types of Calendars Calendars of general use in the World e Chinesse Calendar e Gregorian Calendar e Hebrew Calendar related with the Anno Mundi there 1s an ancient Hebrew Calendar and Jewish Calendar created by Hillel lin in 258 e Hindu Calendar common name of the Civil Calendar of the India e Muslim Calendar e Persian Calendar Holidays Calendars or reminders e Dominican Calendar General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Calendars of old cultures e Attic Calendar e Aztec Calendar this term refers to a synchronized set of several different Calendars of the Aztecs people it is still used by some of the inhabitants of the area that they occupied Egyptian Calendar
154. between two individuals See 8 11 The naming conventions See 2 3 Calendars See 21 8 Julian Calendar See 21 8 2 Gregorian Calendar See 21 8 1 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 2 1 The Sousa system of numbering ancestors The number of Sousa Stradonitz is based in the method of numbering devised by Jerome of Sosa or of Sousa in the seventeenth century 1676 and adopted and generalized by SK von Stradonitz in the nineteenth century 1863 1933 consistent in assigning a number to any ancestor being 1 the base subject 2 and 3 to his her father and mother respectively His her paternal grandfather is the number 4 his her parental grandmother number 5 his her grandfather and your maternal grandfather 6 and his her maternal grandmother 7 Thus male the ancestors have always an even number and the female ones odd This method allows making the list of ancestors and placing every one where he she belongs without having to Know all of them The number of Sousa Stradonitz may in cases of ancestors by multiple branches a lower number In GDS we have chosen to place the number every single original number and if same Individual appears several times is duplicated in its proper place with different numbers Stradonitz Sousa To the user of GDS the utilization of the number of Sousa Ahnentafel may be unnecessary since it was created in its time for the need of maintaining the lists of Ancestors without having
155. cc cecenneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 158 Figure 88 The icon bar of the Photos or Documents 2 0 0 0 eeecccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 163 Pieure 39 The Zooni ODOM S cei aiies A E aude 165 Figure 90 User Options Photo at Full Screen ou ecccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 166 Figure 91 Seeing the Contents of all the rectangles of the Photo ee eeeeeeeeeeee 167 Figure 92 Acceding the properties of a Photo or Document cc cceeeesseeeeeeeeeees 169 Figure 93 The Properties of the Photo or Document 0 0 cece cceeenttttteeteeeeeeeees 169 Figure 94 Establishing the Title of one Photo or Document cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 174 Figure 95 Accessing to Assign a rectangle to one Photo or Document 176 Figure 96 Initiating the assignment of a rectangle to an individual 06 176 Figure 97 Assigning a rectangle of the Photo to an individual cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 Page 11 Figure 98 Choosing Individual in Database or Text describing eeeeeeeees 177 Figure 99 Initiating the Assignment of a text to a Rectangle of a Photo or Document See ca gal esses sete ete ee occas A ca dps ves eee ee eee cece 179 Figure 100 Assigning a text to a rectangle to a Photo or Document 06 179 Figure 101 Choosing Individual in Database or Text describing eee 180 Figure 102 Entering a text in a rectangle i
156. ce this is a memory consumer function and the system may fail if falls in this Situation See 9 4 3 e Sequential Display of Photos and Documents Clicking Sequential Display a little window appears in the upper right corner There you can indicate the number of seconds you want between Images the initial Image you want to display and some other options if you want the Images be shows at full screen Then clicking on one of the arrows the sequence goes upwards or downwards The buttons of CANCEL and STOP the top right will allow you to stop momentarily or cancel the sequence See 9 4 2 e Multiple selection of Photos and Documents To perform the functions of Assign Title Assign Date Assign to a Thematic Album as for other important functions to a set of Photos and Documents instead of performing these functions one by one go to Selection of Multiple Photos and Documents See 9 4 4 9 4 2 Carrousel of Photos and Documents Once you are in front of a browser a Photos and Documents Album click on Display Sequential Once you are in front of a browser a Photos and Documents Album go to Sequential Display Page 141 Resign images bo themes Figure 79 Sequential Display of Images Carrousel In the upper right of the screen appears the following panel First image Full screen Real size at 100 Fit on Width Fit to height Fit the smaller side Fit the larger side See at full screen
157. cember Year 1583 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 e The Netherlands Holland Flanders Hennegan and some south provinces Saturday Ist of January of 1583 came after Friday 21st of December of 1582 Some people was left without the celebrations of Christmas and New Year e Germany Catholic zone originally Monday 21st of February of 1583 had to succeed to Sunday 10 of February but people did not care Later it was decided that Sunday 16th of October of 1583 succeed to Saturday 5th of October e The Spanish possessions in America and Asia Virreinate of the new Spain in North and Central America and South America Virreinate of Peru and the Capitania General of Filippines Saturday 15th of October of 1583 came after Friday 4th of October Due to the distance to the metropolis and the difficulty of making arrive the order to all places Felipe II in a Pragm tica of 14th of May of 1583 established that year for the change of calendar e Austria Tirol Salzburg and Brescia Sunday 16th of October of 1583 followed to Saturday 5th of October e Austria Carinthia Karnten and Estiria Steiermark Sunday 25th of December of 1583 will follow to Saturday 14th December e The Netherlands Groningen Monday 21st of February of 1583 came after of the 10th of February They went back to the Julian Calendar in July August of 1594 Finally Wednesday 12th of January of 1701 came after of Tuesday 31st of December of 1
158. cessor is found GDS will use it whenever the user wants to add information both in the Individual Panel as when creating an association with a Photo or Document Calling to Microsoft Word as well as the handling of its file name and its placement in the right place is managed by GDS no need of any action from the user making it appear that word processor is integrated with GDS See the chapters of The Individual Panel See 7 2 and Display Photo or Document See 9 7 1 for details of its operation There are three types of text recording Plain text rich compatible and Word 2007and up Sound recorder The same applies to the recording of sound The user can make recordings of voice adding to the information of the Individual and associated with the photos See the same chapters that in the previous paragraph Internet Browser Used when the user wants to reach the page Web of Marshall System or any other web page See Communicating with Marshall System See 15 7 Electronic mail Automatically connects to it whenever the user wants to communicate with System with Marshall sending an E mail from any graphic or list or sending an E mail to an Individual or a list of Individuals 5 3 The name of the inserted files GDS maintains all the files that created in the Database Directory You must create a new file every time the user decides to create a new document of Text a voice recording or a new Page 45 Photo or Document from Sc
159. ch the user wishes to introduce the new scanned image This selection can also be done from the menu File Specify Scanner or TWAIN device See the description of TWAIN in the Glossary 22 e Explore from Name of device Pressing in it opens the selected TWAIN device See Photos or Documents from scanner 9 8 1 e Choose Prefix of the name of the new files When GDS creates a new file creates also its name which will have a prefix that the user can choose Import from one to multiple images To introduce Photos and Documents from a Directory See Adding Photos and Documents from a Directory Folder 9 8 5 see the section Adding Photos and Documents See 9 8 Display of Photos and Documents and lists of photos albums The lists of Photos and Documents or Albums of Photos and Documents are always ordered by Dates See the diverse Photos and Documents Albums See 9 3 1 1 Photos and Documents Album of an Individual From the Individual Panel by clicking on the control Photos or if there is one Photo visible clicking on it appears the Photos and Documents Album of the Individual You can also get the Photos and Documents of an Individual by clicking in the control Search an individual of the Photos and Documents Album See Browser See 9 4 See the Individual Photos and Documents Albums See 9 3 2 2 The Thematic Photos and Documents Album The user can define as many Themes or Subthemes as desired and then ass
160. cking the right button in an Individual of the original graphic then the number of Sousa Ahnentafel refers to the original initial To Print or create a PDF or TIF file both single page as multipage go to the bar icons Print To See the details of the printing options access Printing of Reports or creation of PDF TIF or TXT files See 14 and subchapters To send an e mail with an attached PDF or TIF file with the contents of this graphic go to the icons bar Send this report via E mail See Sending Reports by Internet 15 1 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 To get large size prints or files access Printing or file creation of large format reports See 14 3 To see the details of configuration of the file to attach access Configure sending a Graph by E mail See 15 1 1 Pressing in Preferences you can change the characteristics of the graphic Preferences Fonts of the Tithe Ancestors of Font First line lJ oseph N Jones Font Second line Text at bottom uthor GOS Version 7 0 MARSHALL SYSTEM http iva gdsystern net Font Test Bottom Lett Erase Font of Sousa numbers Rectangles Font of Hame and Surnarnes Font of Dates and locations Restore Measure t Thick 7 Apply Accept Number of Control Show the Control Humber Figure 48 Preferences of the Graphic of Ancestors Page 99 8 6 Side Graphic of Ancestors This
161. control number A First Name a T Middle Initial The individuals who s umame ee eee have image in Panel no image in Panel but r areal in BdD M Dynasties Lineages have images in BdD Birth and Death places Option Lineages Option Houses Erase Cancel ka Database Directory C Program Files x86 GDS DEMO DB 70_EN 1234 Individuals DemoDatabase 16 45 16 7 2012 INS MavUS NUM Figure 4 Initial Panel at GDS start You can see the different parts of the panel A The menu See the menu bar and the dynamic icons See 5 6 B The icons bar See the Size of the buttons See 5 5 C The space for all the GDS functions D The lower information bar of Database Directory number of Individuals Note on registration of the Database Time Date Indication of insertion Indication of Caps Lock Num Lock Indication E The initial search Panel See Search an Individual or several in the Database See 7 6 and the following segments Note At the start of the session GDS makes an Analysis in Individuals living and all the children of 120 years that meet their anniversary your party or your date of onomastics Marriage or civil religion in the current date In the case of anniversary indicates the age that meets that day and in the case of Marriage the number of years of such date This analysis is independent of any action you re doing so that in Databases with many Individuals may
162. cording Clicking on this opens the standard voice recorder of Windows You can record your voice Since the assignment of the name of the file is automatic the work of the user is very simple Once the recording is done save it GDS will store and link it correctly General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 e Document Clicking on this control and if you have assigned an editor of Text it will appear and you can create the desired document Because the Assignment of the name of the file is automatic the work of the user is very simple For example if you have as editor Microsoft Word you will see Word automatically Once made the document save it GDS will store and link it correctly e Address By clicking on this control appears Panel of the addresses already assigned as well as the space for entering the address of the Photo or Document Once input the system connects to Google Maps if you are connected to Internet checking whether or not it correctly detects the address and the signals in the map correctly See 21 3 GDS maintains the information of all the addresses which have been introduced previously Thus to enter the address if it existed already just click on it e Remove red eyes The system tries to remove the red eyes effect from the photos taken with flash e Rotations and transpositions You can rotate the image 90 degrees or multiples of 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise You can
163. create a PDF file with 4 pages of 2337 x 2337 mm If you print them it would in portrait mode with lines of Separation in every page indicating the number of page in each of them its row and its column These 9 pages once mounted properly form a graphic of 3254 x 4659 mm 14 4 Virtual printer PDF files If the configuration options of the Printer do not satisfy your requirements of obtaining a big enough single page document you can create a virtual printer in your computer that serves the need of creating large format PDF files Then simply choose that Printer as the chosen printer to produce the report After creating the file the user can make the appropriate use for example send an e mail and attach this file or send the file to a professional printing company ready for large format printings There are several companies offering the software necessary for the creation of a Virtual Printer in your computer We describe here a particular solution of one company that offers the basic software for free Access the web www cutepdf com Download and install the product CutePDF Writer This will create a Printer that from the point of view of any program is a normal Printer With CutePDF Writer you can get PDF files of a size up to 5 x 5 meters In the present version of GDS we recommend the use of this option only for the Descendants Graph See 8 8 the Graphic of Ancestors See 8 5 and the Side Graphic of Ancestors See 8 6 as th
164. cted to Internet 15 6 Sending the Database by E mail Sometimes Marshall System will ask you to send your Database to us This happens when for any reason there is an error caused or not by GDS If the error cannot be resolved by the normal ways of support then Marshall System will be obliged to request the Database for the sole reason of trying to resolve the problem and determine if the error is caused by a malfunction of GDS or any other cause This is a rare incident but we want you to know that possibility exist Of course you are free to send it on not and we will never force you to act against your will In these cases Marshall System will communicate that request to you and you will be able to use an automatic process that sends the compressed Database to us Marshall System does not warrant the repair and restore of your Database but we will do our best to correct the situation If we determine that the error is caused by GDS there will not charge anything to you independently of the fact that the error is corrected or not If the problem is caused by other that any responsibility of Marshall System we will establish an agreement between us about the quote to be applied for the repair of the problem before we proceed to execute the repair action We will never bill anything to you prior of arriving to a satisfactory agreement between us Page 287 15 7 Communicating with Marshall System Communicating with Marshall System via Mai
165. cument 90 to the right or to the left of the Photos and Documents Thus you can scan very large documents that normally would not fit in the scanner which is usually configured as portrait e Perform the negative of the image This Function is useful when you are scanning negatives It positives the image letting you scan negatives Perform the above adjustments and accept or reject the Photo or Document 9 8 5 Adding Photos and Documents from a Directory Folder Clicking on Import from one to multiple images on the Photos and Documents Album appears the corresponding dialogue in which you can select which file or files you want to include in the Photos and Documents Album You can choose any device or directory from a CD up to a Directory in a network as in any Directory of the system whenever the files have an extension BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF See 9 8 6 once selected GDS opens the thumbnails of the files in a browser and places them in the unclassified images category specifically in the first positions of the files that do not have any kind of identification data Then you can update every one or all of the Photos and Documents introducing the relevant data to them See Treatment of the Photo or Document See 9 7 2 for details on how to update the Photo or Document The Photos and Documents are automatically placed in the Photos and Documents Album in its proper place in the same format than the original and
166. d a Data Source See 10 4 Options of the list of Individuals e Pressing once any of the headers the list gets ordered in alphabetical order A to Z of the chosen concept Pressing it again the list is ordered in reverse order Z to A In the case of Dates the order is ascending or descending chronologically and not alphabetically e Keeping pressed a header with the left button it can be moved right or left to facilitate the reading of the list e From this panel several Individuals can be opened at once If this option makes sense use the Ctrl and or Shift keys and press the Enter key or the right button of the mouse when the list of selected Individuals is completed This option is only valid for the case of search of Individuals or coming from the lists of the Statistical Analysis General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 e The search of an Individual can be facilitated just writing a text and pressing F5 Then you can press F3 to get more Individuals containing that text As a special case if you select exactly two Individuals of the list the monitoring of Integration of Individuals gets activated See the chapter 13 4 Integration of duplicated Individuals in the Database in order to understand this advanced function To Print the list of Individuals Or create a TXT file See Printing of lists of Individuals or creation of TXT file See 14 6 7 6 7 New search Click on the icon of search of an Individual
167. d Individuals 251 Figure 151 Integrating two individuals Question who is the father chosen 292 Figure 152 Integrating two individuals Question who is the mother chosen 232 Figure 153 Elements pending for Treatment in the integration of individuals CVV TOI ne e E ausinetosiaeenaebsedewaenctaneeeeuses 253 Figure 154 Opening the creation of a Partial Database eeeeeeeeseeesssssssssseeeereresses 254 Figure 155 Creation of a Partial Database menecerinin 253 Figure 156 Options for printing or creation of a PDF TIF or TXT file 1 258 Figure 157 Options for printing or creation of a PDF TIF or TXT file 2 258 Figure 158 The Options of creation of a PDF or TIF file eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 259 Figure 159 Example of Preparation of creation of a PDF multipage file 261 Figure 160 Warning of creation Of file 00 ccceeseseeseeseeeeeeecececeeeceeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 261 Figure 161 Printing with CutePDF Choose Printer cc cceceneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 263 Fieure 162C hoosine CutePDF as Printer erco e e E navekolomessditaneeates 264 Figure 163 Initiating Preferences of the CutePDF Virtual Printer 0 000 264 Figure 164 Initiating Advanced Options in CutePDF cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 265 Figure 165 Choose individualized size in the CutePDF Virtual Printer 266 Figure 166 Choosing the size of the PDF file with CuteP
168. d by one line of points See Descendants Graph 8 8 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 7 8 6 Assigning spouses GDS admits up to eight spouses or conjugal relations per Individual In the time it is showing one conjugal union that you have to indicate whether the first Individual is the first or what number of spouse for the second and the same for the second Individual The conjugal union is equivalent in all its manifestations for GDS fer _ Basic int Additional inf Surname Inf Titles Birth Marriage Union wili Death Parents Contact information Save E xit Information about the mariages of Joseph H Jones Should you want to move a spouse to a new position just maintain pressed the left button of the mouse over the desired name and move tt to the desired position Data of this Union Unazeign Assign second pouse arilyn G Thomas i Assign third spouse Figure 41 Assignment of spouse In the case you wish to change the number of spouse you can do it directly following the Instructions of the panel Save Exit Information about the marriages of Joseph H Jones Should you want to move a spouse to a new position just maintain pressed the left button of the mouse over the desired name and move it to the desired position Data of this Union Unassign eee Will be changed to spouse number 2 Assign third spouse Assign fourth pouze Figure 42 Correcting
169. d images Pressing the left button opens all the images selected and eliminates the selection Pressing the right button of the mouse or clicking in Do something with the xx selected images a dialog box is opened showing the available functions that you can do with these selected Photos and Documents See the Figure below General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Tou have selected 15 images Describe the action or actione to perform Establish tithe and or date andor assign to themes Establish the Title of the selected images Establish the Date of the selected images Assign address Assign these images to a theme of the thematic album Export images Export images to a different folder or external disk Send an e mail with these images Integrate ina single multipage file Integrate in a single multipage file Remove the selected images Remove the selected images Cancel and free Proceed Figure 84 Options of Actions of the Multiple selection of Images Point to one or more options and the system will perform one after the other all the selected options Establish Title and or date and or assign to Themes e Establish the Title of the selected images It will open a space for you to indicate which title you want to apply to all the photos The Title is the text that appears in the blue margin on top of the window of the Photo or Document e Establish the date of the selec
170. date or Title The Photos and Documents not having either date or Title specified 11 By the name of the file If you know the name of the file it shows the Photo or Document having this name You have to type the name of the file without extension 12 All the Photos and Documents Album All the Photos and Documents contained in the Photos and Documents Album 13 Advanced search of Individuals of Photos and Documents See Advanced functions of Photos and Documents Album See 9 10 See the Albums by other concepts See 9 3 3 for an explanation of the points 3 to 12 above For the Treatment of Multipage Documents access Multipage Documents 9 9 Page 129 9 3 2 The individual Photos and Documents Albums From the Individual Panel by clicking on the Control Photos or on the Photo of the panel itself if there is one it automatically builds the album of the Photos and Documents of this Individual As it is created in chronological order it appears the graphic history of this Individual You can also obtain the same result if done from Search an Individual in the panel of Photos and Documents Album Note In order for an Individual to be included in a Photo or Document he she must have been identified as one of the rectangles of it See Assign a rectangle of the Photo or Document to an Individual of the Database 9 7 12 4 The album is displayed in the form of Browser See 9 4 identified with the Title of the aloum All the functions
171. ditional Information the information of Surname of offices birth and baptism Marriages Unions Will and death and burial and Personal Data e Todo this proceed to place the Panel to Update by any of the procedures described in the section Update e Access the Tab under which you want to add the access to one new Photo or Document e Point with the mouse by clicking on the place you want is the name of the record or Document Photo added e Click on Create Photography Insert File link I am the one that with this pseudonym hic Create document many hours of my time to the conception you want some fun go to the Additional I Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic alburt Open the scanner to create a new image and inserts a link in the cursor position of the text at right Figure 122 Introducing a new photo in a text of the Individual Panel From this point the process is identical to the explained in Photos and Documents from scanner See 9 8 1 Upon completion of the process the name of the Photo or Document appears in the text indicated Once the Update is finished clicking on the name the image appears Page 203 9 8 10 Remove a Photo or Document Removing a Photo or Document has two procedures e Go to the update of the Photo or Document by any method explained in Treatment of the Photo or Document From there go to Delete Image e Pressing the right button of the mouse on the
172. dividuals Potentially duplicated See 13 4 2 This algorithm is not perfect so there is no guarantee that the result is the expected one in all the cases but the experience shows that it is sufficient in the majority As discussed below you can always make the integration of two Individuals even though GDS has not detected that they are potentially duplicated so the calculation of Individuals Potentially duplicated should not be considered as the only source of knowledge for integrating two Individuals If the user knows that in spite of not being detected by GDS there are two Individuals who are duplicated you can also integrate accessing the menu to Integrate Individual and enter the two Individuals manually Conditions that GDS uses for determining that two records correspond to a potentially duplicated Individual e The name should be equal as well as the Surname and the Middle Initial or second Surname The name must exist but not necessarily the Surname and Middle Initial e If year of birth exists in the two the difference should be less than 2 years between them e The same margin for the year of death e They should not be linked between themselves e One should not be ancestor of the other e They have not been declared as not duplicated Individuals in previous sessions of integration e That both pass the filter of Dates of Birth Baptism Death and Marriages This compares the Dates existing in the two Individuals as well
173. e Millirmeters Width hz H Height ja Full page Centered Figure 116 Positioning the Photo in the printer sheet Once the controls are adequate click on Print Use the Choose Printer and Printer Preferences to access to the printer driver General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 8 Adding Photos and Documents There are several ways of adding Photos and Documents to the Photos and Documents Album Any of the modes explained here create and place correctly the Photos or Documents in the Photos and Documents Album e From a scanner or any TWAIN device access Photos or Documents from scanner See 9 8 1 e From any folder of any disk of the computer Adding Photos and Documents from a Directory Folder See 9 8 5 e From the panels of text of the Individual Panel Adding Photos and Documents from the texts of the Individual Panel See 9 8 9 e Manual introduction of Photos and Documents access Manual introduction of Photos and Documents to the Photos and Documents Album See 9 8 8 For the treatment of Multipage Documents access Multipage Documents See 9 9 9 8 1 Photos or Documents from scanner Both from scanner as of any TWAIN compatible device you can introduce a Photo or Document GDS connects directly to the device selected in the function Specify Scanner or TWAIN device from the menu or choose TWAIN device in the Photos and Documents Album Once the image is acquired it is a
174. e Photos and Documents Album maintained by GDS provides its classification and shows them in a logical and orderly manner The Photos and Documents Album is intended to help the user to select the Photos and Documents of interest and show them in an orderly basis Also from the Photos and Documents Album one or several Photos and Documents can be sent by e mail or can export to an external folder One particular Photo or Document can be part of the Photos and Documents Album of an Individual or associated with one or more Thematic Albums however the Photo or Document is included just one time in the Database Important every Photo or Document is only once in the Database but may be accessible from an unlimited number of concepts This is unique in GDS and justifies that the Photos and Documents Album by itself can be used alone without the need of considering it as part of a program of Genealogy Index of this chapter 9 1 Principles of the Photos and Documents Album 9 2 The panel of the Photos and Documents Album 9 3 The diverse Photos and Documents Albums 9 4 Browser Collection of Photos and Documents 9 5 Creation of the Photos and Documents Album 9 6 Rebuild the Photos and Documents Album 9 7 The Photos and Documents in GDS 9 8 Adding Photos and Documents 9 9 Multipage Documents 9 10 Advanced functions of the Photos and Documents Album Page 121 9 1 Principles of the Photos and Documents Album GD
175. e compression criteria For more information about JPG compression you can find it in the web www jpeg org Note These parameters relate only to the case in that the introduction of new Photos and Documents is done from a scanner directly from GDS No effect when importing Photos and Documents from other files because GDS does not alter the contents of these files Options of Recording of TIF files The TIF files can be compressed with JPEG type of compression However some applications do not accept the reading of compressed TIF files so you have the option of recording TIF files uncompressed It should be borne in mind that the uncompressed files occupy more space in disk General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 7 13 Print a Photo or Document You can reach the window of printing of Photos and Documents by three procedures e From the menu File Print e Pressing the Ctrl P Hot keys See 6 4 Going to the icons bar and Pressing the First icon The menu bar and the dynamic icons See 5 6 And then the window of Preparation of printing of Photos and Documents will appear Page 193 National Park of Ordesa Spain Monday October 11th 2004 Tithe to print Print title Above the image f Below the image DO AMAR SHALL Devel 0ODEMO DB 70_ENSDEMOZ61 JPG Printer Copies Name HF Photosmart 6510 seres Red copies 1 VW here Held Choose Printer Paper s
176. e display of the list of Ancestors See 8 4 and 8 3 e The display of the Graphic of Ancestors See 8 5 e The Side Graphic of Ancestors See 8 6 e The List of descendants See 8 7 e The Descendants Graph See 8 8 e The display of the Surnames of an Individual See 8 9 e The Display of the Descendant Tree between two Individuals See 8 10 e The display of the family relation between two Individuals See 8 11 e The display of the list of Photos and Documents of an Individual See 9 3 1 It can also be reached by clicking on the Photo on the upper right side of the panel if any Whenever there is a the List of Individuals visible by clicking on the button of lists of Names Surnames and Places the Analysis of Names Surnames and Places of birth and death See 8 14 and in the button of Life span Graph See 8 15 and Number of alive Graph See 8 16 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 8 2 Full Display of the Individual record This report contains all the information of the record of the Individual in a way that can be printed stored in a PDF or TIF file or can be sent by e mail Do not show the image See for printer Preferences Exit Joseph N Jones Gender Male Birth date 2 3 1945 Birth location San Francisco CF He is the brother number 3 of 3 brothers Has 3 children Her first daughter Maud W Jones 10 23 1971 His second son Xabier W Jones 9 9 1974 His third so
177. e mouse Or adjust the volume General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 21 8 Calendars History The first year of the roman era named Year of Romulo consisted in ten or twelve months depending on the bibliography used Censonio Plutarch and others defended that at the beginning the year had twelve months but we can take credit to Gracano Fulvio Nobilior Varo Ovidio in various texts of his Fasti 1 27 43 111 99 119 151 Gelio Noct Att 111 16 Macrobio Saturn 1 12 Solino Polyh 1 Servio ad Georg 1 43 and others who maintained that the first roman year had only ten months At the beginning the roman year was not January as it is today it was March and arrived to December This is confirmed by the fact of the burning of the sacred fire in the temple of Vesta in the first day of the year the first of march The ten months of the Calendar were named Martius Aprilis Maius Hunius Quinctilis Sextilis September October Nouember December The duration of the months was of thirty one days for four of them Martius Maius Quinctilis and October and thirty days for the others thus being the duration of the months in the following way 31 30 31 30 31 30 30 31 30 30 with a total duration of the year of 304 days Later the year of Numa was instaurated with twelve months and 355 days This year was created circa 700 adC by the second king of Roma Numa Pompilio Censorino c20 mentions
178. e other graphs lose quality when printing large single page format files 14 4 1 Recommendations on the use of the CutePDF Virtual Printer This chapter will help to produce PDF files of large format using the example of the Descendants Graph See 8 8 with the Virtual Printer CutePDF Writer See 14 4 This is the special case in which you want a single page large format file in place of producing a multipage file or through the printing of several linked pages linked See 14 3 This file can be printed by a plotter in any company that supplies this service simply providing the file created by GDS Proceed the following way Once requested the printing of the graphic click on Choose Printer General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Output option to printer POF or TIF f Output to printer Output to TIF Output to POF Printer Copies First Name HP Photosmart 6510 series Aed copies i E where Nel Orientation Choose Printer Portrait Landscape Paper size Millimeters and quality Ad 210 s 297 mm Heigh ede Quality of 600 dots per inch Format of choice Printer preferences Column Roms Printer margins in millimeters 1 J Force Zoom ae a 4 Force Z ie E Top m Force Zoom Max Zoom h AF Right fi Down 4 E E Dimensions of report 1984283 millimeters Pages to print Number of pages f Print all f From fi i fi Print Cancel Figure 161 Pr
179. e the year 1582 bD is always expressed under the Julian calendar since the Gregorian calendar reform took place in the Catholic Countries on 4 of October of 1582 when in any other Country or Territory the reform was carried out later being Greece the later in 1923 See the Implantation of the Gregorian Calendar in the time above As indicated in article Gregorian Calendar See 21 8 1 the reform in each country or territory was in most cases the removal of about 10 days at a time In Spain and other countries after Thursday October 4th of 1582 went Friday 15 of October so the days 5 to October to 14 of that year never existed in these territories As in other countries and territories the implementation of the reform was made later either for religious political or lunar calendars because they were used or otherwise there was a time lag that sometimes caused confusion See paragraphs of Implantation of the Gregorian Calendar in the time above At the time of entering a date if the year is indicated between 1582 and 1924 an additional window opens so that you choose the Country or Territory of the application of that date So GDS determines A If such a date existed in that Territory and therefore rejecting the date if it is incorrect and B Stores Territory information on the Individual record displays the date and adds the suffix Julian to denote that circumstance For example if we describe a date of October 3rd of 1590 for a
180. e zoom of the Photo or Document by three different procedures do hacer ahora H RJA e Using the Zoom drop down Pressing the right button of the mouse the drop down appears can increase or e Zoom through the icons Through the use of the icons decrease the zoom of the Photo or Document General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Zoom Zoom in x15 Change the Full screen option foom out x1 5 Full screen Ctrl Q 70 Fit on Screen Ctrl 5 39 Fit on Width Ctrl W 40 Print 30 Update i Assign to Panel of individual di Delete aiti g0 ir 100 Assign this page to the thumbnail of this document 120 ae 150 Send an e mail with this image 200 Export the image to a different folder or external disk 3750 Properties 200 400 Close 500 Figure 89 The Zoom options From there you can choose the desired zoom e Zoom using the mouse If you have a mouse with three buttons place the mouse in the point of the Photo or Document that you wish is the central point Turning the button in one way or another you zoom in enlarge the dimension and zoom out decrease the dimension If you do not have a mouse with three buttons do the same by pressing the Shift key pressing and holding the left button of the mouse and moving it up or down e Return to the normal Zoom Press the Shift key and the right button of the mouse This will return the Situation to normal Screen 9 7 5
181. ears The panel is identical to the one used for the update of the data of the Individual The access to this panel can be done also from the menu Individuals Add an Individual or by the simultaneous press of the keys Ctrl Ins 7 5 The Number of Control This is the number that GDS assigns to any new who Is introduced in the system This is the number that identifies that individual during the operation of GDS and it is not necessary to remember since in the majority of the cases the user does not have to work with it However it is visible in the Individual Panel just for the case that the user wants to access that Individual by this number General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 7 6 Searching an Individual or several in the Database Finding an Individual or a group of Individuals in the Database is determined by GDS with a very flexible set of functions that while simplifying the work are very effective both for an Individual as for getting the wanted list of Individuals to be part of a specific report graphic or any special function as exporting a GEDCOM file an Excel or Text file or the creation of the web See the chapters 8 Reports and Graphics and 13 Import and Export Databases for details This chapter describes all the ways of getting to identify the Individuals that you require to perform any function See the following chapters 7 6 1 Search Individual 7 6 2 Search in the general l
182. eate his her own Database up to a limit thus being able to appreciate the capabilities of the system The design of GDS is intended for use per no specialists individuals in the use of computers At any time the user has the possibility to access help to continue operating Today GDS is used by both young people as well as by aged persons who had no previous contact with computers The center of gravity of GDS is the individual Every individual has one record From every individual all the relevant information is reached as well as information of the Individuals related to him her In particular from the record of an individual there is immediate access to his her parents children marital links ancestors and descendants In GDS the information is stored in a Database which is composed of texts Images sounds and videos all of which are related logically Also the network of Individuals forms one relation All information exists once but it is logically accessible from any places in which this information is relevant So you can always find the familiar relation between an Individual and any other well as one photo with many Individuals can be accessed from all and every one of them looking for its date or by a theme defined in the image Any document saved in Microsoft Word can be accessed directly from any individual that the document refers A video will be accessed from multiple places or one voice of an ancesior from his her
183. ed 3 3 Registration Panel Registration of the license of GDS General Family Documentation System GDS Version 0 Dear user of the GDS The database you are using has 1 registers ou can continue using all of their features up the introduction of 50 individuals Without further limitation After the introduction of 50 individuals you must register the database acquiring the appropriate license The price of the license for this database is Fress one of the controls below according to your choice Acquisition of the license for this database Yes want to register Edit your Registration NON Data Figure 2 GDS Registration Panel This panel appears in the following cases Page 27 e When starting GDS with at least an Individual in the Database and the Database is not registered e When you want to add an Individual above the authorization that allows the use of the GDS unregistered Database e When you requested an update or introduction of a new Individual from the main menu and the Database is not yet registered You have the following options e Acquisition of the license for this Database That starts the process of acquisition of the Database License e No will register later You can always use this option If you have less than 50 Individuals in the Database you will continue using GDS without any problem If you have 50 or more Individuals in the Database you will not be able to update or
184. ed the two major proposals of the reform of the twentieth century the World Calendar and the International Fixed Calendar is to add the extra day or days as a separate day of the week that 1s without being a Monday or a Tuesday or a Sunday This is usually done after finishing the last month and the leap day is added sometimes in the middle of year This solution met with the opposition of the different religions that would be interrupted so the millennium cycle of the weeks leading to the failure of the proposed reform of the middle of the twentieth century 2 in the same way as the surplus of nearly six hours every year are saved for adding a day more every four years you can save thirty hours 1 e a day and a quarter and add one additional week every five or six years This option has as disadvantage that the Dates in the equinoxes and solstices suffer a larger variation year in year But is the solution adopted by some Calendars that combine year and week as the Christian liturgical Calendar or the Calendar of the ISO8061 Page 313 B Grouping the 52 weeks consisting of the body of the year It is desirable that the subdivision of the year in months and quarters met three characteristics That every month contains an integer number of weeks that every season or quarter of year contains an integer number of months and that every month has the same number of days or almost the same However it is not possible to construct a Calenda
185. ediately three controls appear at the top right of the photograph If the person you want to identify is in the database click on the control Database If on the contrary it is to describe the contents of the rectangle click on Text Describing F If you have clicked on Database the system will take you to the search for the person Once identified GDS automatically assigns this person to this picture G You can repeat the steps D a F as many times as desired H Once you have finished assigning rectangles press on Exit of update 4 do not understand the functioning of the descendant tree The Descendant Tree links a person with any of its ancestors To allow GDS to create the Descendant Tree the ancestors of a person should have been previously calculated General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Proceed as follows A From the panel of a person search his her ancestors by one of the three procedures List of Ancestors See 8 3 Graphic of Ancestors See 8 5 or Side Graphic of Ancestors See 8 6 This operation causes GDS to calculate all the ancestors of this person B From any of these reports or simply because you access to anyone who is ancestor of this person the control of Descendant Tree becomes available By clicking if we obtain the corresponding Descendant Tree from the initial person to this one C This last operation can be performed as many times as desired from any ancestor of the firs
186. ee Crop a rectangle from the Photo or Document New partial photo See 9 7 12 10 Change the Aspect of the Photo or Document You can rotate the Photo or Document or perform the functions of vertical or horizontal mirror from this panel It should be borne in mind that in the case of Photos and Documents in JPG format these functions modify the files and they are re recorded Because any modification of a JPG file has the risk of loss in quality GDS when rewriting these Photos and Documents uses a very low compression factors in order to ensure that the loss is minimal This implies that the end result is a file larger than original file In any case we cannot guarantee that there is no loss of quality of the Photo or Document once the file has been changed by this procedure This problem does not occur with BMP files which have no loss of quality caused by these changes See Factors of Recording JPG and TIF files of compressed JPG in User Options related to Photos and Documents See 9 7 12 13 In the case of Multipage Documents you cannot do this But from the display of the document itself you can do any rotation although in this case the file is not rewritten Delete the Photo or Document See Remove a Photo or Document See 9 8 10 Page 173 9 7 12 2 Assign a Title to the Photo or Document View the Photo or Document Place it in update mode You can do this with four different ways 1 Press F2 or 2 Access to the icons
187. eeeeeees 132 Figure 72 The structure of the Thematic Tees c iacotet t iieelnecesne ii A 133 Figure 73 Actions of creation of the Thematic AIDUMS cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 134 FICure 74 4 C fealin ea Mew L NCIC peste E E A oven tenant E 134 Figure 75 The List of Thematic Albums ss c02 s cescierterst ts Shemini a Sab 137 Figure 76 Ordering the Images of the same date 0 0 0 0 ceecccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 138 Figure 77 Changing the position of an image in a collection of the same date 138 Figure 78 The Browser thumbnails of a Photos and Documents Album 140 Figure 79 Sequential Display of Images Carrousel ccccececsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 142 Figure 80 Options of the Sequential Display of Images Carrousel eee 142 Figure 81 Simultaneous Display of several Images ccccccccssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 144 Figure 82 Options of the Simultaneous Display of several Images eee 144 Figure 83 Selecting several photos from the Browser ccceccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 146 Figure 84 Options of Actions of the Multiple selection of Images 00008 147 Figure 85 Selecting the Directory Folder of Export of Images cesses 148 Figure 86 Options of the Photo or Document ceccceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 155 Figure 87 Options of Update of Photos or Documents
188. eeeseeeceeeeseeesaeeeseeeeseeesaueeseeeeaeeeneees 74 7 8 1 Updating data of the Individual ee cccccccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 75 7 8 2 Updating other Information esseeeeeesssssssseeersssssssseeerrsssssssseereessssssseerres 78 Toa nrod cin DeSeT etas 84 Loke Crean die MaL TK S ee ant in asst ent aca anette toa ee eee 87 PODS ASSEN pare NSn a a a a esata 88 18 0 A SSIGIING SPOUSES ssei st St niente iaaccial eet Sencar aaacniee weenceiee 89 7 8 7 Placing siblings in their right Order cccccccccssseeeeeececeeeeeaeeeseeeeceeeeeeaas 90 12820 CASE OF TWO StS OL SIDUN S ocs siatiscateoeliedsithnaumeniebulabiaaateentie 90 3 Reports ANG Gap ils cerka ane raea a a E E aO S 92 Onl SAI ODOM S aaa tua chiwndatnetaue tocelantnauetaecuanet hehakeieutaneialanekeinuanect aiarsberd ean alae sae 92 8 2 Full Display of the Individual record ccccceccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeteeeeeeens 93 Oo LIS Ol MICE SIOlS canain arana aa hen aietusecb ancy fan daantusar damn hin dannuaumanenn ne taaatae 95 8 4 Consanguinity Analysis of the Ancestors cccccseeeeceeeeeseeeeteeeesaeeeeseeesseeeeeaes 97 8 5 Graphie Ol AMCEStOlS ornita a tink ldeteeente Rice cite seemed 98 80 Side Graphic OLANCESIO S aar tea ooeas asa eeeat eater al 100 Os Descendants HiSt cas iecact a ceteet accident E N 103 8 3 DESCENGANIS Grab Penaia a E E ENA A 104 8 9 List of Ula eS ccasaecastrae
189. efer to the contextual Help For the functions that can be made from the Photo or Document see the section Image in the menu bar or rather the chapter The Photos and Documents in GDS See 9 7 and subchapters 5 6 1 The menu bar The access to the menu bar can be done in three ways e Clicking on the desired Title e Pressing the Alt key and then the first letter of the desired text of the menu For Example it is the same to click File than press the Alt key and the letter F This option does not work in all cases e Some functions have hotkeys defined This is always identified in the dropdowns In these cases the user gets a quicker access just pressing the combination of keys indicated For Example you can press Ctrl E to indicate you want to do the Statistics of the Database which is equivalent to clicking File and then in Database analysis and Statistics To see the list of the hotkeys go to Hot keys See 6 4 From the menu bar the following functions can be accessed File e Assign or change Database Directory Folder See 4 5 Play with the DEMO See 4 8 e Database Analysis and Statistics See 8 12 e Print Preview See 14 5 Page 47 Print See 14 Update See 7 8 and 9 7 12 Specify Scanner or TWAIN device See 9 8 1 and 9 8 2 Import o Import from a GEDCOM file See 13 3 1 Merge two Databases See 13 1 e Export o Export to a GEDCOM file See 13 3 2 o Export to a text or Excel file
190. en Fits the size of the Photo or Document for occupying the most space in the screen without losing any portion of the image The level of zoom depends of the real size of the image having fewer or more points than the dimension of the screen e Fit to width same but adjusting to the width of the Screen e Fit to high same as the above but adjusting to the top of the Photo or Document e Smaller side same for the smaller side e Larger side same for the larger side To choose which is the desired option See User Options 5 1 on the Photos and Documents And also the way of doing it from the Carrousel of Photos and Documents See 9 4 2 While being viewed at Full Screen there is no view of any other window of GDS Also you get to the Display of Full Screen pressing key at the moment in which the Photo or Document is in focus To get out of the display of Full Screen press any key or double click on the mouse Page 163 Normal Screen idos QU p Jim The second icon ME serves for returning to the initial situation of using the maximum of the inside space of the GDS Screen Fit to window of GDS J pueda F The third icon HEE serves for adjusting the Photo or Document to the maximum width of GDS In this position you can move the Photo or Document up and down either by the cursor of the right or left holding the button of the mouse on the Photo or Document and moving up and down Zoom You can perform th
191. ending a Graph by E mail Format option for the file to attach i Output to TIF f Output to POF Output to file POF or TIF Descendants of Joseph N Jones and Marilyn G Thomas Onentation f Portrait i Landscape Format of choice Name of the output POF or TIF file Equivalent size to printer Width 210 Aa Y Height 297 297 mm High quality Columns Fos 0 99 B Printer margins in millimeters Left f Top i Right i Down i Pages to print Force oom Force Zoom Max Zoom 15 2 Force value t gt Dimensions of report 2096295 millimeters h From h to f Create the Encd Hidden Preview Does 210 mm Humber of pages f Print all Figure 176 Options for sending a report by E mail From this panel you will specify the options of delivery of the report that you want to attach to an E mail that will be generated by GDS Observe that many of the options are identical to the options for creating PDF TIF or TXT files that are explained in Configuration of the printer or file to create See 14 2 with the difference that instead of creating a file and placing itina folder this function will attach the same file to the recently created E mail General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 15 2 Sending an E mail with the Photo or Document attached When you have the Photo or Document visible you have two ways to send an E mail with this Photo
192. ennnnsessseee 281 Figure 182 Choosing the background and the font of the texts of the web 282 Figure 183 Choosing Options of output to the Web ccceeecccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 283 Figure 184 Initiating the creation of the HTML file of an individual 284 Figure 185 Sending an E mail to Marshall System eccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 288 Figure 186 Accessing the web of Marshall System cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 289 Figure 187 Accessing the friendly webs v siexeiiund dewdeacaceacedvas vents tans vet Vetdiacaaer tadece aids 289 Figure 188 Accessing to sending an E mail of the list of Individuals 00 290 Figure 189 Choosing parameters to send a List of Individuals by E mail 0 290 Fiene O NLS asda ete pata AAEE EEA AE EEE AE 291 Figure 191 Backup Access from the menu File cc eeeccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 296 Figure 192 Initiating Backup from the closing Panel cccccssseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 297 BLU 199s Backup Pane bennon tates acres sua sales E E sua nse ewate seats dtae 297 Figure 194 Entering addresses for Google Maps cccceccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 308 Fiare 195 Te SOU WNA OW aca si cease oc ce ceo sae oad eee gee Peas O 310 Page 13 Figure 196 Massive changes of Texts Figure 197 Massive changes of Texts sE ram oer meena er Ne A Figure 198 Papel Of PGQuivalencie
193. entified with the point 1 is located after a year of his her birth Also the First year of our era is located between the end of year of year 1 minus 1 and the first anniversary of it twelve months after first of the next That is why the year 1901 was the first of the twentieth century and the year 2001 was the first of the twenty first century and therefore of the third millennium The importance of the Gregorian Calendar The problem of the origin of our era was resolved with the creation of the Gregorian Calendar if it says that the Christian era began 1582 years before of its creation and all the Countries respect this idea all discussion should end and the subject about when Christ was born or what Dionysius the Meager established looses importance at least from the point of view of the measurement of the time The ultimate question was the adoption of the Calendar and as we have seen all the Countries of the world have been adopting it over the time And this is where we can highlight the value of this instrument of measurement if the entire world is in agreement all the discussions about the subject are unnecessary We can travel to any Country or buy a Calendar the Gregorian Calendar will always be of the year in progress You can vary the location of the beginning of the week Sunday or Monday or the Language but you will always have the same calendar And a tool that only needs one correction of day every 3300 years or s
194. ents or Albums of Photos and Documents are always ordered by Dates The display of Photos and Documents is achieved by any of the following 13 methods 1 Photos and Documents Album of an Individual All the Photos and Documents in which an Individual of the Database is referenced in one of its rectangles See 9 3 2 2 Thematic Photos and Documents Album The Photos and Documents that have been assigned to a specific Theme See 9 3 4 3 By the title of the Photo or Document Typing part of the Title you see all the Photos and Documents containing that text 4 For the description of a rectangle of the Photo or Document Typing part of the description you see all the Photos and Documents containing a rectangle with this description 5 By dates You can choose between one date in particular or a range Lists all the Photos and Documents that have the desired date or range of dates 6 Declassified Photos and Documents All the Photos and Documents that have no title no date nor any associated rectangle It may however be in a Theme of the Thematic Album 7 Photos and Documents that do not have any Individual referenced All the Photos and Documents that are not referencing any Individual referenced in the Database 8 Photos and Documents without Title All the Photos and Documents that do not have a Title defined 9 Photos and Documents without date Photos and Documents not having a specified date 10 Documents and Photos without
195. er Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the father or zero Index Mother Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the mother or zero Index First Child Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the First child or zero Index Spouse First Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the First spouse or zero Index Spouse Second Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the second spouse or zero Index Spouse Third Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the third spouse or zero Index Spouse Forth Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the fourth spouse or zero Index Spouse Fifth Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the fifth spouse or zero Index Spouse Sixth Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the sixth spouse or zero Index Spouse Seventh Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the seventh spouse or zero Index Spouse Eighth Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the eighth spouse or zero Index Next Sibling Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the next sibling or zero Index Name Code Integer of two bytes Proprietary Code of Marshall S
196. er Social Security number Celebration Date Insert File link Create document Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic album Connection to a Data Source Page 83 Figure 36 Update of the Personal data About the Address pressing Search you access the function of search of the Address in Google Maps See Addresses and Maps See 21 3 7 8 3 Introducing Dates The information of Dates is in Genealogy a complex subject that deserves a special analysis Due to the uncertainty or to the ignorance or incomplete information to the about Dates GDS has a special system of entry conservation and expression of the Dates to meet all the needs and peculiarities Having said that throughout of the various functions of GDS where necessary the expressing of a date the system is described below is used Date of birth of Joseph M Jones Introduce hisfher birth date Day Month Year Sh 3 February 945 Poa Uncertain dates Between two dates Known date Date unique a C Between two days ia C Between two months eau net Between two years Li Century little before little after C Between two dates doubtful Compute Special unkown C aNat Not special aD destroyed disappeared doubtful day doubtful month doubtful pear Include Day Year Month p All Include Day Year Month p All doubtful day and month doubtful day and year
197. er of pages in the case of a multipage file e In the case of having a wheel in the mouse the rotation of it produces the effect of Zoom in and Zoom out e Pressing the right button simultaneously with the Shift key you return to the initial zoom e Pressing any key is passed to the form of Full Screen See 9 7 6 Once in it pressing any key again turns to the original mode e Pressing the Esc key the image disappears e In the bottom appears the Indication of the number of this Photo or Document in the album Pressing the arrow of the right or left the next or the previous image is open This effect can Page 153 be done as well pressing the arrow keys of the keyboard e When the file is multipage you can click on the right and left rotation signs This action does not alter the file A difference of when you are in update status with a single page image See below e In the case of a PDF file one indication is made in the bottom bar of information Clicking on the Adobe Reader sign opens with the file Adobe Reader must be installed in the system e To update the Photo or Document click the corresponding icon in the icons bar Also you can get to this Function pressing F2 or in Update when you are in the dropdown that appears after clicking with the right button e From the icons menu you can perform the following functions e Full Screen image at 100 zoom Expands the image at Full Screen e Adjust the size to fit the window
198. ers to the reference of them that is done in this Theme e Move Theme You can move a Theme from one position to another in the album Click with the left button Move Theme and then press again the left button to the one you want to move and without releasing the button move up to the Theme you want to be stored as subtheme Releasing the button the Theme is moved Page 133 e Rename Theme You can change the name of any Theme Add Subtheme CU Astronomy 1 Children 4 at Portraits Portraits 17 Tourism 5 Thematic albums Alphabetical list of thames i Search gt gt gt gt k Add subtheme Remove theme Move theme Rename theme Figure 73 Actions of creation of the Thematic Albums Place the mouse on the name of the album under the theme which you want to create a new Theme and press the right button You will see the drop down in the Figure above Click on Add Subtheme One window will appear for you to type the name of the Theme EE Alohabetical list of themes Search gt gt gt gt Astronomy 1 Children 4 at Portraits UMENT ALBUM Thematic albums Thematic inde AF Astronomy 1 Childre Tourer 5 Figure 74 Creating a new Theme After entering the name of the new Theme and pressing OK this Theme will appear hierarchically below the Theme of the one you have selected at the moment of pressing the r
199. es already they will become visible in the image If it is the first time and there is no visible rectangle the option of Delete is inactive Add a rectangle To add a rectangle have the Add option enabled This is the option activated first If you move the mouse over of the Photo or Document you will see a picture of a hand with a marker Place the mouse exactly in the upper left corner of the rectangle you want to define For example in the case of an Individual place it just above and to the left of the head Press the left button of the mouse and keep pressing up to which the rectangle that you draw covers exactly the surface that you want to describe For example in the case of an Individual this will occur when the mouse is to the right of the head and to the height of the neck Release the button of the mouse Immediately in the upper right corner of the image appears the box Page 159 Exit of Update Database Text describing E mit Now decide if the rectangle you just define it of an Individual who exists in the Database or on the contrary it is a descriptive of a rectangle that is for you just want to make a description In the case of an Individual of the Database click on Database and in the case of a description click on Text Describing If you clicked on Database you will see the search panel of the Individual and will allow you to search the Individual in the Database Once chosen GDS will assign this rectangle
200. es the age of that Individual when this Photo or Document was taken If the rectangles have text assigned that text is displayed See Assign a text to a rectangle of the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 5 Page 167 9 7 9 Display of the list of Photos and Documents of an individual GDS generates the specific aloum of the Photos and Documents that have a specific Individual linked in a rectangle The Album generated is always sorted by the date specified in every Photo or Document Thus you can immediately generate the graphic story of any Individual of the Database You access to the album of Photos and Documents of an Individual by clicking on the control named Photos or if any by clicking on the Photo of the Individual Panel 9 7 10 Access to the Panel of an individual of the Photo or Document When the mouse is pointing to an Individual of the Photo or Document double click on them to show the corresponding Individual Panel General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 7 11 Properties of the Photo or Document Pressing with the right of the mouse on the Photo or Document a drop down window appears oom Change the Full screen option Full screen Ctrl Q Fit on Screen Ctri Fit on Width Ctrl W Print Update Assign to Panel of individual Delete Crop Assign this page to the thumbnail of this document Send an e mail with this image Export the image to a different folder or external disk P
201. ess 1 Short Text 2 Strings of length 100 bytes Address 2 Short Text 3 Strings of length 100 bytes City Short Text 4 Strings of length 100 bytes ZIP or Postal Code Short Text 5 Strings of length 100 bytes Province or State Short Text 6 Strings of length 100 bytes Country Short Text 7 Strings of length 100 bytes Telephone Short Text 8 Strings of length 100 bytes Cellular Telephone Short Text 9 Strings of length 100 bytes FAX Short Text 10 Strings of length 100 bytes Electronic mail Short Text 11 Strings of length 100 bytes Web page Short Text 12 Strings of length 100 bytes CIF Code Short Text 13 Strings of length 100 bytes Social Security number Short Text 14 a Short Text 15 Strings of length 100 bytes Not used Long Text String of length 1000 bytes free description and link with external files Identification of Type of Union String of length 1 byte Not used Identification of Type of Separation String of length 1 byte Not used Last Update Date String of length 8 bytes Updated automatically Different format for before and after year 2000 Last Update Time String of length 10 bytes Updated automatically Reserved for expansion String length 100 GDS5 IDX File Index correspondent to the file GDS5 DAT Direct access file One register per individual The number of register corresponds to the Number of Control of the individual Correspondence with the GDS5 DAT file Content Index Fath
202. estors cccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneesaeeeesees 23 2 2 The Melgar system of numbering SUINAMES ccceeecceeeeceeeceeeeceeeeseeesaneesaees 23 2o TNE NamiNg CONVENON siccrsa05 neassecinetareasneon seca AE AOA 24 J How oac re GD aieia E EEE GESA 25 3 1 Registering your personal data in your computer cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 26 3 2 The Database License cacc checced ecu icddinncexctlacesadtdnasindedectanatinadeuestenswncsdecdexeedacdanatexas 27 3 3 Registration Panel satires unos cuanenoenodenta ANE E Aae 27 3 3 1 Process of acquisition of the Database License ccccccceccceeesseeeeeeeeees 28 a er C MN O D e E E T E E O O T E E E 30 A ASANO A e a E A E E E E 30 4 2 Initiating the GDS operation vies csscecocecceadwccdatic conosstdasedutadoessantdenedsiideasscesdoneteiedeneed 30 71S LEa o Ew 9 Rc T E EE A E E E E ee ee 33 4 4 Database Directory ccccccccsscccsececeeeceuceceueeceeeceuceceeeseeseuseseecsueesseesseeesueenass 33 4 5 Assigning the Database Directory ccccccsececeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseueeseeeeseeesaneesenes 34 4 6 Searching a Database cccccccssccccesceceeeeeceuceceeeeceusecsueessaueessueessueeeseusessueeesaas 35 4 7 Migrating from previous versions cccccceecceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeseeseeseeeseeeseeeseessaeees 35 ASe Te aD DEMO ea E ee eee 36 SeU SOrD ONS searr a nan A E E 37 5 1 Choosing the background image
203. ext 6 Strings of length 100 bytes Second Witness Short Text 7 Strings of length 100 bytes Third Witness Short Text 8 Strings of length 100 bytes Matrimonial Chapters Short Text 9 Strings of length 100 bytes Sacramental Book Short Text 10 Strings of length 100 bytes Place Matrimonial Chapters Short Text 11 Strings of length 100 bytes Notary Matrimonial Chapters Short Text 12 Strings of length 100 bytes Book of register Matrimonial Chapters Short Text 13 a Short Text 15 Strings of length 100 bytes Not used Long Text String of length 1000 bytes free description and link with external files Identification of Type of Union String of length 1 byte Type of Union Identification of Type of Separation String of length 1 byte Type of Separation Last Update Date String of length 8 bytes Updated automatically Different format for before and after year 2000 Last Update Time String of length 10 bytes Updated automatically Reserved for expansion String length 100 TypeReg 16 Personal data TypeReg Integer of 2 bytes Value 16 Ctrl1 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to this Individual Ctrl2 Integer of 4 bytes Not used Date 0 String of length 10 bytes Date of Onomastics See Internal dates format Date 1 a Date 9 String of length 10 bytes Not used Page 219 Short Text 0 Strings of length 100 bytes Name of Contact Short Text 1 Strings of length 100 bytes Addr
204. f register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Third Marriage of this individual e Index Citrl 7 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Fourth Marriage of this individual e Index Ctrl 8 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Fifth Marriage of this individual e index Ctrl 9 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Sixth Marriage of this individual e Index Ctrl 10 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Seventh Marriage of this individual e Index Ctrl 11 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Eight Marriage of this individual e Index Ctrl 12 a Index Ctrl 14 Integers of four bytes Not used Index Ctrl 15 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Personal data of this individual GDS5DEL DAT File List of the deleted registers of the file GDS5 DAT Direct access file One register per deleted register If there is no deleted register the length of the file is zero Content Deleted Integer of 4 bytes Number of deleted register in the file GDS5 DAT GDS5DEL DA2 File List of the deleted registers of the file GDS5 DA2 Direct access file One register per deleted register If there is no deleted register the length of the file is zero Content Deleted Integer of 4 bytes Number of deleted register in the file GDS5 DA2 GDS5 ORD File of
205. f the Individual Any file that has an associated program in your computer can be linked from GDS These may be Microsoft Word Documents Photos and Documents in any format AVI videos MPG WAV recordings etc The files of extension AD1 of surname and ADL Additional Information are treated as special GDS files See the Database for more information See 12 Note that the Photos and Documents with format BMP JPG JPEG PNG ICO GIF PDF TIF and TIFF are intercepted by GDS and are treated directly by it See the chapter Photos and Documents Album See 9 and its subchapters Page 73 7 8 Updating data of the Individual This chapter explains the functions of updating data in the register of the Individual and its linking with the inner family Index of this chapter 7 8 1 Updating data of the Individual 7 8 2 Updating other Information 7 8 3 Introducing Dates 7 8 4 Creating digital links 7 8 5 Assigning parents 7 8 6 Assigning spouses 7 8 7 Placing siblings in their right order 7 8 8 Case of two lists of siblings General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 7 8 1 Updating data of the Individual From this panel you can make the changes and additions of information relating to an Individual Once made they are saved in the Database pressing Save In the case of assigning a marriage or parents the system saves the data as soon as they are indentified The same panel is used
206. f the texts inside of the same line To add remove or Change Names or complete lines use the controls The function of Equivalencies does not change the Database in any case and is only effective during the search of Individuals This function is designed for those cases of Names or Surnames that over time have been changing so you can have Individuals with different Surnames but related to the same family branch You can maintain the real name in the Database while during the search the Individual can be located with the modern name This can be also used for nicknames or Family Names General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 22 Glossary e Database Repository of all the data stored by GDS in the form of several data files This is the so called Database Directory and it is a folder that the user elects for this purpose It is strongly advised not to add delete or change any file of this folder since GDS maintains it and warrants the integrity and coherence of the data Do not confuse this Directory with the place in which the GDS program is located and is highly recommended that you choose the Directory of the Database in a completely different position than where the program is placed e Browser Window where the thumbnails of a Photos and Documents Album is shown All the photos and Documents are shown in chronological order e Carrousel Sequential display of a Photos and Documents Album e DEMO Demonst
207. face of the Individual who you want to place in the Individual Panel and then from the new Photo or Document created apply this to Treatment of the Photo or Document Update See 9 7 12 subsections 4 10 and 11 Extracting a rectangle From this option GDS creates a new Photo or Document without altering the contents of the current See Extracting a rectangle of the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 10 Move the cursor up to the upper left corner of the rectangle that you want to remove press the left button of the mouse and keep pressing while moving up to the lower right corner GDS will draw a rectangle dynamically Release the button when you have achieved the desired rectangle Just one new image will appear consistently in the contents of the rectangle All the data of the original Photo or Document will be applied to the new Title date and rectangles The potential text document and voice recording are not copied Thus the Individuals identified in the Photo or Document original will also appear in the new To Assign this portion to the Individual Panel see Assign a rectangle of the Photo or Document to an Individual of the Database See 9 7 12 4 or Assign a fraction of the Photo or Document to the Individual Panel See 9 7 12 12 Properties Appear the properties of this image Name of the file date of creation of the file width and height in pixels size of the file and date of the image Thematic Albums in this Photo or Docume
208. four different ways 1 Press F2 or 2 Access to the icons bar and click on the Update icon or 3 Go to the menu What can do now Update data of this image or 4 Press the right button of the mouse over the Photo or Document You will see a drop down window Then go to Update To the right of the Photo or Document will appear a set of controls for performing a set of functions Title The upper bar on the Photo or Document may be accompanied of a Title and of the date Go to Assign a Title to the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 2 Date To Assign the date to the Photo or Document go to Assign the date of the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 3 Note that the date that has been done in the Photo or Document has nothing to with the date of the BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF file in question which is the date that the file was created This date is very important because it is the date used to place the Photo or Document in the appropriate chronological place in all the diverse Photos and Documents Albums Assignment of rectangles to Individuals of the Database This is the mode of associating Photos and Documents to Individuals In a Photo or Document there can be several Individuals assigned and by this procedure a Photo or Document may be contained in multiple Aloums of Individuals See Assign a rectangle of the Photo or Document to an Individual of the Database See 9 7 12 4 To remove an assignation of a rec
209. from a real one so the consistency is due to this fact Any relation with any single real or fictional person is purely coincidental and it is not the intention of the author to identify any individual of the Database The photos contained in the Demo Database are the property of Marshall System You are not authorized the use any Photo or Document of the Database for any purpose other than the practice of GDS in your own computer The copy by any means of any Photo or Document for any other purpose shall be considered a violation of the terms and conditions of the reasons why you have this information so we will act in consequence General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 5 User Options A good number of options are available to the user of GDS that can be adapted to his her preferences Normally GDS remember your choices for their use in later sessions so you do not need to go to the Options panel unless you want to change some of them There is also always the possibility of restoring all or part of the Options resetting them to the default values so the use of the Panel of Options has no risk of being used during testing Accessing to the menu Tools Options you go to the User Options Panel lt has several Tabs Language JPG and TIF options Full screen images GOS start options Authorizations Immediate change of language Choose the language and press Apply f Spanish Shift F 1 C Catalan Shitt F2 f E
210. g on Photos and Documents Rebuild the Photo and Document Album This will completely remake the Photos and Documents Album See 9 6 Note When adding Photos and Documents without entering any data about them you can reach them very easily from the Photos and Documents Album by clicking on Unclassified images The action of Rebuild the Photos and Documents album is safe However if there is a large number of images in the Database it can be slow so you are strongly advised not to introduce or remove Photos or Documents of the Database directly and use the GDS tools to perform these functions See Adding Photos and Documents 9 8 and its subparagraphs General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 6 Rebuild the Photos and Documents Album In the case of you have added one or more Photos and Documents by the procedure of copying BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF files to the Database Directory you must perform this function to let GDS rebuild the Photos and Documents album The reason is that the system creates a file associated with every Photo or Document The IF2 file See The GDS Database every time a new image is added to the system That happens when you create a Photo or Document from the scanner or when incorporated from the function of copying Photos and Documents from the album but not obviously when the user makes it out of the process of GDS In other words do not add modify or remove files t
211. gnifies V Century b C Specials If the primary second separators value is U means that is the year of Nativity If the value is V means Incarnation year Alternative field The alternative field has several purposes to better qualify the date or dates See the characteristics below The alternative field is always a complement of the Primary field described above ddo P2mm2S yyyy2 t has always 10 characters General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 dd second day of the month or zero If exists it is used as second day of the month in the between two dates option P First alternative separator normal value 1 indicating that the day must be surrounded by parenthesis 2 indicating that the month must be surrounded by parenthesis 3 indicating that the year must be surrounded by parenthesis 4 indicating that all must be surrounded by parenthesis 5 indicating that the day and the month must be surrounded by parenthesis 6 indicating that the day and the year must be surrounded by parenthesis 7 indicating that the month and the year must be surrounded by parenthesis 8 indicating that the day the month and the year must be surrounded by parenthesis A indicating that the day must be surrounded by brackets B indicating that the month must be surrounded by brackets C indicating that the year must be surrounded by brackets D indicating that all must be surrounded by brackets E indicati
212. gure 7 Choosing the Directory Folder of Data Point by double clicking in the left window that shows the available directories You can also write the desired Directory in the right window titled Database Directory assigned You can optionally give a name to the Database under the title Description of the Database Directory Optional If the assigned Directory does not exist GDS will create it The Database Directory cannot be the root so it is not valid C If you work in a network assign the first one letter to the Directory of the network that you want to assign Special Options If in the past you have assigned two or more Directories of Data to the GDS they are stored of so you can get to them in an easier way clicking on the pointer of the right To delete any of these directories of the list because they will no longer be in use click on Eliminate a name of the list above and pointing to one of them the reference will be deleted This action does not change any of files of the referenced Directory being a safe action General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 If you are lost and do not know where your Database is click on the control am lost Search for a GDS Database in the computer GDS search all the existing Databases in your computer and you can choose the adequate one In this case give time to GDS to search all your Databases since it analyzes all the contents of your computer in order to en
213. he Photo or Document in question As you move the mouse over thumbnails the system is indicating with different colors the corresponding image and displays the contents of its Title and date If the album has more Images than the capacity of the window you can move up and down through the displacement of the bar at right From the Browser you can perform the following functions Normal mode See Image button selected If the button See Image is active pressing the left button of the mouse on any thumbnail the General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 image is displayed If you have activated the button Assign Images to Themes pressing and hold on an Image you will be able to assign it to a Theme previously defined in the Photos and Documents Album If the button Assign one of these Images to is active then clicking with the right button on one of them will assign this image to the Individual panel of that Individual See another way of doing the same from Assign to the Individual Panel of the chapter Display Photo 9 7 12 11 and 9 7 12 12 e Opening several Photos and Documents at a time Clicking on Multiple Display will open a dialogue window that will indicate what range of Photos and Documents should be open simultaneously Once in the function will open as many windows as requested To switch from one window to the next press Ctrl A to go forward or Ctrl F6 to go backwards Be careful with this function sin
214. he mouse somewhere in the free area of the open panel Click on it so that the cursor indicates the chosen location e Click on one of the Controls Insert File link This will take you to a file you want to link to this panel The file is not modified neither changed of its place Create Document If you have a default of text editor for Example Word it opens and creates a new file Fill in the Contents and save the file Close the text editor GDS will create automatically the name of the file so you will not have to worry of assigning it This file may be edited also in the future it is not necessary to finish it this time Create Recording Opening the voice recorder of the system if it exists Record your message save the file and close Close the voice recorder GDS will create the name of the file automatically so you will not have to worry of assigning it Create Photography If you have a scanner installed it opens and scans the document GDS will create the name automatically so you will not have to worry of assigning it Connection to a thematic album This opens The Thematic Albums See 9 3 4 Choose one of them Connection to a Data Source This will open the list of Data Sources See 10 Select one of them In any case the link is created by placing the adequate name between the symbols lt lt gt gt Page 87 Once the update is done by clicking on any place of the name in question the doc
215. he two Individuals the different the data that is in the first but not in the second and the one that is in the second and not in the first Page 251 If the decision is of executing the integration the system automatically uses of data that 1 are equal in both and 2 Be in an Individual but not in the other The Data that differ is shown to the user with all the options that exist in every case The user indicates which is the best option for every one of them and then finally integrates the two Individuals leaving only one of them with the adequate data The connection chains to the Individuals who are affected are arranged according to the criteria given and as we shall see the affected Individuals become part of the repository of pending actions that automatically the user is presented to continue the work of integration The field Father has different values in the two individuals Choose an option and press Accept or Cancel the Integration Jan G Davis Number of Control 778 Do not use any value cnt Figure 151 Integrating two individuals Question who is the father chosen Since there are two discrepancies asks also for the second The field Mother has different values in the two individuals Choose an option and press Accept or Cancel the Integration Margaret A Douglass Number of Control 779 Do not use any value cnt Figure 152 Integrating two individuals Question who is the mother c
216. heck from the menu Tools Analysis of the links between individuals Case where one or any of the brothers of the sibling list is not assigned the dates of birth In this case a question mark appears to the right of the list Click on this icon and you will order them properly 14 If buy now GDS can I later change computers without paying again The license of the GDS Database allows you to change computers without paying again You can also move your database to the new computer without having to purchase a new license Moreover as that GDS is continually being reviewed you may download the successive revisions of the program and install on your computer provided it is the same version 15 Appeared to me an error and has stopped GDS What do I do GDS is continually developing Like any complex computer program it is alive and has the possibility of a fault that has not yet been detected Continuously and whenever a fault is found Page 305 both internally and by the information provided by a user we try to reproduce the problem and then correct it Periodically we place on this website the new review of GDS that corrects all the bugs found and introduce improvements that we added to the system Therefore we recommend the use the following in the event that the system will produce a problem A Check that the version you have installed match with the latest version available on the Web To check it observe that at star
217. hemes Thematic Album or by the Contents of the Title defined by the user Album by Titles Every photo or document may have an explanatory document associated a voice record or its geographical location connecting directly with Google Maps The Photos and Documents can consist of one page or be Multipage Documents e The Set of Data Sources which supplement the information that of every Individual or document may exist In the case of dubious information the Data Source can clarify the origin of the information e The Panel of Surnames which may have information about every one of the Surnames Its origins its history etc e The set of Documents Virtually any document can be scanned Writing Graphic Voice Video etc and is part of the integration of GDS The integration facilitates that in the access to the Individuals the user can easily find all the related information including their appearance in the Photos and Documents Album which lists all the Photos and Documents of that individual listed in chronological order as Data Sources of any information as well as the Information about the Surname of the Individual Creation and Update of one record per individual The theoretical limit of the number of Individuals that can be entered is of about 4000 million However the limit shall be established by the total capacity of your computer Maintenance of the chain of relation between family members Search of an
218. her of the mother of the father of the father A detailed analysis of these Surnames follows Surname number 1 Jones Return Ahnentafel 2 F August M Jones 1507 T1966 Ahnentafel 4 FF John Bill T Jones 1879 Ahnentafel amp FFF Daniel B Jones 1658 Ahnentafel 16 FFFF Peter C Jones 1838 t1894 Ahnentafel 32 FFFFF Daniel C Jones 1619 t1876 Ahnentafel 64 FFFFFF John Jones 1790 t1850 Surname number 2 Johnson Return Ahnentafel 3 M Marilyn B Johnson 1914 T2008 Ahnentafel 6 FM Joseph F Johnson 1883 T1972 Figure 55 The origin of the Surnames of an individual Pressing the left button with the mouse of on any name the Panel of the Individual appears To Print or create a TXT file both single page as multipage go to the bar icons Print To See the details of the Options of printing access Configuration of the printer or file to create See paragraphs 14 and To send an e mail with a TXT file attached to the Contents of this list go to the bar icons Send this report via E mail See 15 2 To send an e mail with an attached TXT file with the contents of this graphic go to the icons bar Send this report via E mail See Sending Reports by Internet 15 1 Wi General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 8 10 Descendant Tree between two Individuals The Descendant Tree relates an Individual with one of his her ancestors This report indicates in every generation the ancestor h
219. his as soouse e Type 4 The second spouse does not signal this as spouse e Type 5 The third spouse does not signal this as spouse e Type 6 The forth spouse does not signal this as spouse e Type 7 The fifth spouse does not signal this as spouse e Type 8 The sixth spouse does not signal this as spouse e Type 9 The seventh spouse does not signal this as spouse e Type 10 The eight spouse does not signal this as spouse e Type 11 His her parents are not signaled as spouses e Type 12 The father of this individual does not have children e Type 13 The mother of this individual does not have children e Type 14 Siblings loop see the list e Type 15 Redundant spouses e Type 16 Is father and mother simultaneously e Type 17 Has assigned a woman as father e Type 18 Has assigned a man as mother e Type 19 The father of this individual is one of his her descendants e Type 20 The mother of this individual is one of his her descendants e Type 21 One or more links of this person address to itself Even if some chain errors are encountered GDS continues operating without problems although some of these errors may cause unexpected results Page 309 21 7 The sound window GDS opens this window at the moment of executing a WAV file that is called from any place of text of an Individual panel l H 00 00 15 of noha fe Figure 195 The sound window Any place of the register can be accessed with th
220. his you can return to the situation of No Full Screen or resume the Carrousel in any of the two senses Also returns to the situation of No Full Screen pressing any Key To finally stop the Carrousel click on STOP Attention The Carrousel is not operative if you have updated any Photo or Document of the active browser In this case we suggest creating this album again Page 143 9 4 3 Display of multiple Photos and Documents To see multiple Photos and Documents simultaneously from the browser click on Multiple Display E Album of all the images 35 images Options Multiple Displays Sequential Displa 2 Fhotography a Assign images to themes Assign one of these images to the panel of Joseph H Jones Figure 81 Simultaneous Display of several Images This will take you to the panel reels ot ceveers mrret rrer rira tarner pelir Le boi oy aT SEE Lil TLUPES 5 TIALO EPEDUSIY kis about to display 35 images We run the risk of getting out of memor so we recommend that you chose a limited number of pictures to be displayed simultaneously From picture i To picture 35 35 Number of pictures Accept f Ascending order of dates C Descending order of dates Figure 82 Options of the Simultaneous Display of several Images General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 From this panel you can choose which Photos and Documents of the browser you want to open si
221. hosen Once the integration the Individual Panel appears for your Knowledge as well as the repository of actions pending Workflow See Dynamic repository of pending actions of Integration Workflow 13 14 4 At the same time if you came from the list of Individuals Potentially duplicated the list is remade but with the integrated Individuals eliminated General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 13 4 4 Dynamic repository of pending actions of Integration Workflow This list shows pairs of individuals who are capable of making their integration since they have been amended by previous integration actions Double click on a line to make the integration of the individuals identified Individual 1 Individual 2 Reason 001 744 Roberto G Davis 779 Jan G Davis The father of Jack Davis V 17 07 2012 Clear the list of pending integration actions Cancel Figure 153 Elements pending for Treatment in the integration of individuals Workflow From this panel you start the analysis of another couple of Individuals who have been affected by the previous integrations Because the repository is maintained even if you close GDS you can end the session when you wish and continue your integration work in a new GDS session later accessing the workflow list Page 253 13 5 Creation of GDS Databases as subset of the current Database Pressing in the menu File Export To create a Database subset Fi
222. icate Size of page Individualized of Post Script Page 265 Opciones avanzadas de CmteP DE Writer war e Configuraciones avanzadas del documento CutePDF Writer ly Papel Salida O Tama o del papel 2 ecm M mero de copias 1 E callin Grafica 2 2 tes Calidad de impresion 2 EE Coincidencia de colo sp M todo ICM IC Pan Intento ICM Imd edness Escala 100 Z Fuente TrueType 5 Siia Opciones de documenta miaran Caracteristicas avan PEA Opciones PostScript AB ARCH 4 ARCH B ARCH C ARCH D ARCH E ARCH El Bi I05 B2 JIS B3 305 B4 JIS 257 x 364 mm BS JIS 182 x 257 mm C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm Executive Foliol8 5 x 13 in 150 40 I5O 41 150 42 I50 B1 Ledger Legal Letter Monarch Envelope 3 87 x 7 5 in No 10 Envelope 4 125 x 9 5 in Motel7 5 x 10 in Screen Statement S 5 x 8 5 in Tama o de pagina personalizado de PostScript by ey ey a en Ce Ce eo Ce ee Ce a oe Ce a Figure 165 Choose individualized size in the CutePDF Virtual Printer General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 You will get the following table Propiedades de Documento de CutePDF Writer Fresentac Aa AE L Ea MC a mN Configuraciones avanzadas del documento CutePDF Writer ilg Papel Salida Tama o del papel Tama o de pagina personalizado de PostScript Dimensiones de tama o de pagina pers
223. ich can be much earlier as would be the Introduction by scanner for example a photo of the year 1890 GDS has in mind the date assigned by the user only and ignores any date of the file In the case of the existence of several Photos and Documents with the same date GDS will detect that situation and will display a panel in which you will be able to order them manually Flace order F gt S OT Gate June STN ZVUUe ImMm I AadcdeEes Flace in ordert TE IMAQes OF Ge Te JUNE OLN ZYYS J IMAGES lt lt To move an image click and maintain the button moving the image to the place you want it k DE e 20040608_ T1600_200 TWL 20040 20040608_ 20040608 ___ Figure 76 Ordering the Images of the same date In this case place the mouse on the move in the site you want press the left button and move it to the right place 7 re Pi iun anma yi pun apa ai ne 2 ow F aT YT ue Place in order the images of date June oth 20S images To move an image click and maintain the button moving the image to the place you want it Figure 77 Changing the position of an image in a collection of the same date The operation can be repeated until all of them are sorted Once done press Accept General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 4 Browser Collection of Photos and Documents This chapter describes the display and operations of the Browser This is expression of the
224. icons Print To See the details of the printing options access Printing of Reports or creation of PDF TIF or TXT files See 14 and subchapters To send an e mail with an attached PDF or TIF file with the contents of this graphic go to the icons bar Send this report via E mail See Sending Reports by Internet 15 1 To get large size prints or files access Printing or file creation of large format reports See 14 3 To see the details of configuration of the file to attach access Configure sending a Graph by E mail See 15 1 1 Pressing in Preferences you can change the characteristics of the graphic Page 101 Preferences Fonts of the Title Ancestors of Fort First line lJ oseph N Jones Font Second line February 3rd 1945 San Francisco CF Font Third Line Font of the tithes of the columns Text at bottom Author GDS Version 7 0 MARSHALL SYSTEM http iy gdapstem net Font Test Bottom Left Erase Dates format jf Show Dates and places C Dates simplied f Dates completed Font of Hame and Surnames Font of Dates and locations Measure 120 20 Restore Apply Accept Close Number of Control Show the Control Number Figure 50 Preferences of the Side Graphic of Ancestors General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 8 7 Descendants List Listing of the descendants of an Individual Descendants o Jones a
225. ies for the Gregorian Calendar Integer of two bytes Signal of Death String of length 1 Midwife long Integer of 4 bytes Oficiant Long Integer of 4 bytes Godfather Long Integer of 4 bytes Godmother Long Integer of 4 bytes Notary Long Integer of 4 bytes Reserved for expansion String of length 77 bytes free in this Version Total Length of the register 2467 bytes GDS5 DA2 File of Other Information of the Individual and marital unions Direct access file AS many registers as necessary Every register is associated with an Individual with the exception of the conjugal union that relates to two Individuals If there is no information on the subject the register does not exist It is created when needed Content Common Format TypeReg Integer of 2 bytes Ctrl1 Integer of 4 bytes Ctrl2 Integer of 4 bytes Date 0 to 9 Strings of length 10 bytes Format DD MM YYYY The first can ser of 1 to 6 for uncertain dates The second can be of 1 to 9 for multiple dates Short Text 0 to 15 Strings of length 100 bytes Long Text String of length 1000 bytes Identification of Type of Union String of length 1 byte Identification of Type of Separation String of length 1 byte Last Update Date String of length 8 bytes Updated automatically Different format for before and after year 2000 Last Update Time String of length 10 bytes Updated automatically Witness First Long Integer of 4 bytes Witness Second Long
226. ight button General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 This way you can create as many Themes as desired without limitation of the number of levels Delete Move and Rename Themes Similarly pressing the right button on the Theme you want to make one of these operations you can delete move or rename any Theme The suppression of a Theme does NOT mean that the Photos and Documents are eliminated from the Photos and Documents Album The Theme disappears and your relation with these Photos and Documents without changing the rest of the relations of the above Photos and Documents since they are not eliminated To remove a Photo or Document proceed from the own Photo or Document See Remove a Photo or Document 9 08 10 The user can define as many Subthemes Themes as desired and then assign any number of Photos and Documenis of the Photos and Documents Album to these Themes This action complements any other action taken in the Photos and Documents Album and will not undo any actions performed by the Photos and Documents As part of Photos and Documents Album a Photo or Document may belong to an unlimited number of albums To work with the Themes of the Photos and Documents Album do the following Assignment and withdrawal of Photos and Documents to Themes You can Associate a Photo or Document to a Theme from the browser or from one single Document or Photo 1 Associate a Photo or Document from the browser Indicate
227. ign any number of Photos and Documents of the Photos and Documents Album to them This action complements any other action taken in the Photos and Documents Album and will not undo any actions performed by the Photos and Documents As part of Photos and Documents Album any Photo or Document may belong to an unlimited number of thematic albums See the Thematic Albums See 9 3 4 3 Other Always from this panel of Photos and Documents Album See the Albums by other concepts See 9 3 3 e Advanced functions From this control there is the possibility of performing three special functions related to a given number of Photos or documents under special conditions General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Specials Pressing on Specials A Assign text to rectangles that have been defined as text but you want to assign them to an Individual of the Database this function converts the rectangles defined as text to an Individual of the Database This is useful when an Individual has been incorporated to the Database after you have had photos or documents of him her and you have defined these rectangles as text B Change of text in Titles C Change of text in Rectangles of Text Advanced search of Individuals in Photos and Documents Search of Photos and Documents that meet certain requirements of the presence of Individuals and dates See Advanced functions of the Photos and Documents Album See 9 10 Page 127 9
228. il For the export of the complete Database to another user of GDS or for making a backup of your data you should go to the chapters of your Database Backup See 18 and Moving to a new PC See 19 For sending your Database to Marshall System by E mail you should address to Sending the Database by E mail See 15 6 For the shipment of Reports and Graphics by E mail you should go to Sending Reports by Internet See 15 1 and Sending an E mail With the Photo or Document attached See 15 2 To build a Web with your Database you should go to Creating a Web with your Database See 15 3 Therefore this chapter describes the communication of GDS to outside but not for the realization of backups of your Database or the other cases mentioned above So here we talk about the following cases Import of a GDS Database to your Database Integration of two GDS Databases See 13 1 Export your Database to a file of text or for use by Microsoft Excel See 13 2 Import and export from and to a GEDCOM file for communicating with other programs of Genealogy The GEDCOM Files See 13 3 see the following sections for the description of these cases General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 13 1 Integration of two GDS Databases Integration of the data of another GDS Database into your own Database To access this function go to the menu File Merge two Databases Assign or change the Database directory folder Ctrl D Pl
229. iles other than the capacity of your computer It is strongly recommended that you never add delete or modify files inside of the Database Directory allowing GDS to keep the Directory by itself Modifying files in the Database Directory may cause GDS malfunction Page 33 4 5 Assigning the Database Directory The place where your data is kept is the Database Directory or Folder of Data Sometimes it is called Database You can have as many Data Directories are you wish but GDS works with a single GDS Database Directory at a time We recommend the use of a single Database Directory since GDS maintains a multitude of families in one so the use of several Data Directories is reserved for the cases in which the data of each one of them have no relation or no indication that is going to have any in the future Access to File Assign or change the Database Directory Folder from the menu The following window appears Election of the Database Directory Folder Click or type the Database Directory Sc Database Directory assigned C CAGDS My Tree 4 Program Files 36 Description of the Data Directory optional C TEMP CO J DEMO BD 70_ES fea DEMO BD 0_E5_Old Remember that you can type the complete path and am lost Search for a GOS will create the directory folder automatically GOS Database in the computer This directory does not exist Create Directory Cancel E Fi
230. ility of the use of the mouse because it makes the viewing of the Photos and Documents a very agreeable activity e During the movement of the mouse over the image always shows the position X and Y of the image e Moving the mouse over the Photo or Document Always passing over of a rectangle defined See below in the chapters Contents and Performance the meaning and use of the rectangles GDS immediately displays the Contents of it In the case of an Individual of the Database indicates the date and place of birth and the age of the Individual when that photo was taken If the Individual is deceased indicate the date of death also the age and that moment e Being in a rectangle that signals to an Individual of the Database and by double clicking with the left button of the mouse GDS will open the panel of this Individual e Pressing the left button and hold and moving the mouse the Photo or Document moves following the mouse movement if the image is occupying more space than the image window This same effect is achieved through the position bars at right and bottom e Pressing the left button simultaneously holding the Shift key and moving the mouse up or down it performs the zoom in and out The starting point of the mouse will be the center of the Zoom e Pressing the right button opens a menu of actions described below This same effect is achieved with the left button clicking in the indications of the name of the file the Zoom or the numb
231. in the Computer or for any reason you lose the database that has been created over time we cannot help recovering it However if you lose the program it is just necessary to download it from our website That is why we recommend that you make regular copies of your database To do this use any procedural safeguards that are within reach Normally there is only need to save all files in the Database Directory You can back up directly from GDS at the moment you close the program as it appears the possibility of doing so from the closing window You can also do it from the Menu File Backup of the Database General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 21 Miscellany 21 1 Documents from your word processor From the panel of Update of the Individual and in any of the tabs displayed in the space of text you can start the creation of a text document using the word processor available in your computer as per example Microsoft Word This document is accessible directly from the Individual Panel Also every Photo or Document may be associated with a document of text in the same conditions as described above See Display Photo or Document 9 7 1 21 2 The voice from the microphone of your PC From the panel of Update of the Individual and in any of the tabs displayed in the space of text you can start the creation of a recording of your voice This recording is accessible directly from the Individual Panel Also every Ph
232. in which the year is not known but it is his her age of death in which case provides one approximate date without the need of the user to perform the calculation manually Page 85 Treatment of Dates between the years 1582 and 1923 Period of incorporation of the Gregorian Calendar in the World From the incorporation of the Gregorian Calendar in some Countries on the 4th of October of 1582 the incorporation in other territories was phased and up to 1923 in which finally joined Greece there was a discrepancy of Dates between different Countries and Territories So while was for some Countries the 15th of October of 1582 for others the same day was the 5th of October GDS manages the dates of the Julian and Gregorian Calendars maintaining control by the application of the Gregorian reform depending of your application in every one of the Countries and Territories To understand the way in which this subject is treated by GDS go to The GDS treatment of the Julian and Gregorian Calendars as well as to Calendars Julian and Gregorian Calendar See paragraphs 21 8 and subsequent If you try to enter a date contained in this interval the panel will have a different format as shown in the following Figure Introduce his her birth date Day Month Year fiz J l 1584 Show d Calendar To discern if the date is included in the change period from the Julian to the Gregorian calendar Choose between the list of 55 Countries or Territories
233. inting with CutePDF Choose Printer Page 263 Choose Cute PDF Writer and click OK HP Photosmart 6510 series Red CutePDF Writer otosmart 6510 series Red Microsoft XPS Document Writer Paginas de a Selecci n Figure 162 Choosing CutePDF as Printer Now press on Printer Preferences Output option to printer POF or TIF f Output to printer Output to TIF Output to POF Printer Copies First Name CutePDOP writer copies h H where CPi Orientation Choose Printer Portrait Paper size Millmeters and quality Al Landscape Ad 210 8 297 mm width 210 Height ede Quality of B00 dots per inch Format of choice Printer preferences Column Rows Left i Max Zoom 15 1 Right f oem ie Dimensions of report 2066290 millimeters Pages to print 210 mm Humber of pages f Print all fi e From fi E fi Print Cancel Hidden Preview Figure 163 Initiating Preferences of the CutePDF Virtual Printer General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Now start the Advanced Options Propiedades de Documento de CutePDF Writer Presentaci n Papel Calidad Orientaci n Vertical Horizontal O Horiz con rotaci n Orden de las paginas Ascendente O Descendente Paginas por hoja 1 s _Upciones avanzadas k Aceptar Cancelar Figure 164 Initiating Advanced Options in CutePDF Indicate Size of page Ind
234. ion rT Contact lt lt lt Back Quit will register later Figure 3 Process of acquisition From here you will have the options for getting the Database license The most used method is by Secure Shopping General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 When the process is finished you will receive either by E mail by a web page or both the Database key Proceed to enter the key in the Enter the license provided space and Save the license As soon the process finishes your Database will be registered permanently Page 29 4 Starting GDS This chapter describes the way of installing setting up and initiate GDS and let it customized for your individual use 4 1 Installing GDS A Access the web www qdsystem net B Access the Downloads section C Download the file to any folder or in your desktop and execute the file or execute the file directly D To start GDS go to Initiating the GDS operation See 4 2 E If the Registration Panel appears go to Registration Panel See 3 3 Take care of having GDS inactive at the moment of installing a new Version Revision 4 2 Initiating the GDS operation GDS is started the same as any program in Windows If you have the GDS icon in the desktop Double click on the GDS icon of the desktop If you do not have the GDS icon in the desktop Go to the Start icon bottom left of Windows Click on All Programs Click on the GDS Version 7
235. ion 7 0 See or update the text document lf there exists a text document assigned to the Photo or Document a symbol appears Clicking on this symbol the editor of texts appears with the associated document It has all the features of the editor of texts that you use Listen the Voice recording lf there exists a record associated with the Photo or Document a symbol appears Clicking on this symbol you will listen to the recording Link to Google Maps If you have defined an address of the image it connects directly with Google Maps showing the map of your location See Google Maps See 21 3 Actions of creation or Update You enter in these functions clicking in Update clicking in the equivalent icon in the icons bar or pressing F2 When you enter situation of Update a list of buttons appear at the right side of the Photo or Document Page 157 f update Define rectangles Assign to a theme Remain pressed and assign to a theme Recording Address Remove red eves Delete recording Delete document Figure 87 Options of Update of Photos or Documents e Exit of Update Click on this for exiting the update of the Photo or Document e Modify Title Click on this to enter or change the Title of the Photo or Document e Modify Date Click on this to enter or change the Date of the Photo or Document e Define Rectangles Wherever there are one or more Individuals represented in the
236. ion of Individuals duplicated in the Database See 13 4 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 13 2 Export of data to a text or excel file From this panel you can Export your Database Complete or partially to an ASCII so other programs can use its data Also you can export the data in such a way that you can open Microsoft Excel to operate on it Function is accessed from the menu File Export Export to a file of text or Excel file viduals Equivalencies Photos and Documents DataSources Surnames What canIdonow Tools File Assign or change the Database directory folder Ctri D Play with the DEMO Database analysis and statistics Ctri E Print Preview Print Ctrl F Update F2 Specify Scanner or TWAIN device Export to a GEDCOM file Export to a text or Excel file To create a Database subset Create a Web Backup of the Database Registry of the Database Edit data of the register Exit GDS Figure 134 Export Data to a text or Excel file Note the following e You decide what the registers that will be exported are e You decide which the fields to Export are e You decide the format Records to Export All the registers A single Individual The Ancestors of an Individual The Descendants of an Individual The Ancestors and collaterals of an Individual The Siblings cousins or second cousins of an Individual The Nephews
237. ion to a Data Source Update Save Exit without update Figure 131 Panel of Update of the information of a Surname Page 215 12 The GDS Database This chapter is addressed to users with some technical knowledge willing to better understand the internal operation of GDS The information of this chapter is not necessary for the normal use of GDS however it can be useful for those users willing to know in detail some aspects of the operations GDS The GDS Database consists in a series of files stored in the Database Directory GDS creates and maintains these files Additionally thanks to the capacity of linking these files with others inside and outside the Database Directory makes the access to them be immediate from the different panels of the system The set of files that form the Database can be classified the following way Basic files GDS5 DAT GDS5 DA2 GDS5 IDX GDS5 ID2 GDS5DEL DAT GDS5DEL DA2 GDS5 ORD ALBUM2 FOT ALBUM TIT ALBUM2 PIE and ALBUM SUB There exists one of each Additional files created by GDS GDS5_xxxx ADL xxxxxxx AD1 xxxxxxx SOU XXXXXXXX IF2 XXxXXXXX FBS If these files exist they can be many The files of lists of Names Names _List LST Last_Names_List LST Dynasties_List LST Lineages_List LST Birth_ Places List LST and Death_Places_List LST exist with only one copy of each one Optional Files MAP of addresses for linking to Google Maps NRP WRF as repository of pending
238. ir thoughts how they have influenced in what we now are if they have had any or have any documentation about them In my case it all started in 1988 when the time came that wanted to have a system of storing all the Data that could be objectified about my family With my skills in computers had the vision that at long term the solution should be with this technique but even if at that time the chances were not very big yet it was clear that the technological evolution would help me faster that my development capacity of the adequate tool In fact the technological development was parallel to the development of GDS The first photo was not incorporated to the system up to the earliest 90s Since then have spent thousands of hours making two parallel and complementary tasks A Collecting information about any individual of my family coming from anybody who could provide it to me and 2 Developing the computer system It was first called Genealogical Documentation System in their MS DOS versions to become renamed as General Family Documentation System GDS when realized that was developing something that was not only a Genealogical system but of a complete repertoire of possibilities that went beyond Genealogy entering into the pure digital storage of information in an orderly basis and easily stored and transmitted At this time the family General Family Documentation System GDS in its Version for Windows XP Vista or 7 is a mul
239. is was a day of rest for the worship of God in detriment of Saturday not only traditional between the Jews but between the Gentiles Since if Jesus Christ had died the fifth day of the Jewish week he resuscitated on Sunday On the other hand another popular religion was satisfied the cult of Mithras a cult of the sun The week of seven days was also present in the ancient Egyptian Calendar Failed modifications in the names of the months Very important Roman emperors changed the Names of some months during their mandate e Caligula called to the month of Germanicus to September e Nero named Claudius to May and Germanicus to June Domitian also called Germanicus to September and Domitianus to October But the changes did not last and their names were restored very soon Even Charlemagne tried to give new names to the months but neither was successful The proposed months were respectively from January to December Wintarmanoth Page 323 Hornung Lentzinmanoth Ostarmanoth Winemanoth Brachmanoth Heuvimanoth Aranmanoth Witumanoth Windumemanoth Herbistmanoth and Heilagmanoth 21 8 3 The GDS treatment of the Julian and Gregorian Calendars GDS maintains the dates attached to people Dates of Birth Death etc according to the calendar under which they are defined In particular distinguish whether the date is noted on the Julian Calendar or the Gregorian Calendar To do this note that whatever date that is befor
240. is action does not guarantee its operation because the installer is not just copying the files but records certain components in the OS The program is installed in C Program Files GDS Or in C Program Files x86 GDS in Systems of 64 bits and other files in the System Directory B System Register is the place where the user options are placed Not normally visible to the user and stored in the called OS registry C The database is the set of files created and maintained by GDS as the user enters people relationships documents photographs etc This database is contained in the Database Directory which is chosen by the user and is expressed in the lower left corner when GDS is operational and has nothing to do with the Program Directory expressed in A above Page 301 Restoration of the situation when for any reason you should restart operation GDS on your computer Starting situation You must have a copy of ALL the files in the Database Directory see paragraph C above You must have a copy of the GDS installer version If not just download it from the web www gdsystem net Pay attention to the version that was installed Note that if you had a Version previous to Version 7 0 the system will work but will not let you update Then you must acquire the migration to Version 7 0 Actions 1 Create a directory folder in the desired location For example C MyTree This Directory will be the new Database Directory and d
241. is her soouse corresponding to the ascendant tree the children from that couple if any and identifying the child that corresponds to the chain of ancestors up to the subject gt Descendant Tree between Juana Maria E Moore and Joseph N Jones Show brothers not ancestors See for printer MW Display spouses Preferences E mit Descendant Tree between Juana Maria E Moore and Joseph N Jones Juana Maria E Moore 1854 Daniel B Jones 1658 John Bill T Jones 1879 Carolyn F Baker 1878 August M Jones 1907 7988 Marilyn B Johnson 1914 72008 Joseph N Jones 1945 GDS Version 7 0 MARSHALL SYSTEM hiipciweww gesystem net Figure 56 Descendant Tree between two Individuals During the development of the Descendant Tree the system asks the user to decide in the cases of consanguinity where two or more siblings or two or more spouses are also ancestors of the Individual that makes the tree The system will explode the tree by the path that the user decides in every case of consanguinity Thus it is possible that the Descendant Tree of an Individual to have several other versions one for every path of consanguinity All the Individuals who are in bold are the ones corresponding to the chain of ancestors The user can access the Individual Panel of any of them clicking his her name with the left button of the mouse The user has the options of show the siblings and or the spouses of the ancestors
242. ish regardless of the chosen dates convention But in the American Convention the short expression will be 03 04 2006 while in the European will be 04 03 2006 5 5 The size of the buttons We chose a size of the buttons enough to be understood so are slightly larger than the traditional General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 5 6 The menu bar and the dynamic icons While GDS is in operation the user there is always a menu bar as well as a series of icons buttons that appear and disappear dynamically This is an Example of GDS just started and with one already defined Database General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Demo Database File Individuals Equivalencies Photos and Documents Data Sources Surnames WhatcanIdonow Tools Window Image Help Internet Abbreviations and Signs AAE y Figure 17 The bar of the initial menu To access a function the user can act with different ways Some features may be started from three different Places This facility is designed to optimize the GDS use for accessing to the appropriate functions at any moment The access of functions can come from e The menu bar See below e The dynamic icons bar Buttons See below e Pressing a control of any panel e Pressing the right button of the mouse while viewing a Photo or Document This section describes the menu bar and the dynamic bar of icons For the functions that can be performed in any panel r
243. isk Page 299 Do the following e Execute the instruction expressed in paragraph D in Moving GDS to a new PC See 19 1 e Connect the Disc with the Database in your new PC e GDS will ask you to assign the Database Directory Assign the same Database Directory as in the other computer Note that the disc may have one letter different from the computer that was in the original e Whenever you want to work with ANY of the computers connect the external disk to the computer and start working normally Always check the letter of the external disk as GDS search the Database address of the last assignment In any case keep in mind to make backups of your Database Read the chapter Backup of the Database See 18 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 20 Frequently asked questions Index 1 Opening GDS cannot find the database that created What can do 2 How can I recover the GDS operation after a failure that requires the reset of the system 3 Howcan assign a photo to the aloum of a person 4 Ido not understand the functioning of the descendant tree 5 IfI have a registered GDS database can use it on my desktop and the laptop at a time 6 Currently have all my genealogical data entered into the program PAF 4 0 of the Mormons Is it possible to import information to GDS 7 How do I delete a photo from the Photo Album 8 By downloading a new revision of GDS Should uninstall the old
244. isk capacity with a minimum of 100MB available The capacity required depends in any case of the magnitude of your files Optional Computer Network GDS works in a network provided that it is supported by your operating The Database can be remote while GDS works in your computer In any case the Database will always be under your control and it is not copied to Marshall System Printer Any one supported by the operating system used Scanner Any scanner that supports the TWAIN standard Sound Card Microphone Software Requisites Windows XP Vista or 7 Internet Explorer Version 5 0 or later or any other web browser to view the Help or any display of web pages Optional Word processor Any of the existing programs in the market GDS has been tested with Microsoft Word Recorder of sounds Normally existing in the operating system Network Support Internet Connection GDS has been tested with Internet Explorer Version 4 0 to 7 0 with Microsoft Outlook and Microsoft Outlook Express Page 21 2 A little bit of theory GDS is designed to hold all the family and genealogical information and is based in the following e The Genealogical studies as basis for the construction of the Ancestors and Descendants trees the family relations between Individuals the descendant trees and the analysis of the Surnames e The consideration of which every individual can be the core of the Ge
245. ist 7 6 3 Search by name and Surname 7 6 4 Search by Number of Control 7 6 5 Search by Number of Sousa Ahnentafel 7 6 6 List of Individuals 7 6 7 New search 7 6 8 Direct relation from the Panel of the Individual 7 6 9 Being named in any GDS report 7 6 10 Being shown in a photograph 7 6 11 Advanced search of Individuals 7 6 12 Getting to the register of an Individual 7 6 13 Selecting a collection of Individuals for some advanced functions Page 63 7 6 1 Search Individual The search of an Individual of the Database can be done by several methods Although the most simple and fast is the search for his her name and surname there are other methods that can be effective and always ensure to find the desired Individual INITIAL SEARCH PANEL Other methods List of the 1234 individuals By his her name Advanced Type a portion or all the first name of the desired individuals By control number First Name Middle Initial The individuals who Surname have image in Panel m no image in Panel but yes in BdD no images in BdD T have images in BdD Birth and Death places Option Lineages Option Houses M Dynasties Lineages ntinue Erase Cancel Figure 21 The Panel of search of Individuals When in the Panel of search of an individual you can use the following methods e Search by name and Surname if his her full name is known or part of it See 7 6 3 e As part
246. istry of the Database Edit data of the register Bat GDS ee Ctri E Ctrl P F2 Impor from a GEDCOM file Figure 137 Import of a GEDCOM file This panel is shown Import Cancel wir GEDCOM file to import Explore Output Directory where the created Database will be placed Explore Figure 138 Initial Panel of Import of a GEDCOM file General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 From this panel you indicate the GEDCOM file that you want to Import as well as the Directory Folder where you target the Import Once the job is done the system performs a series of tests and performs a statistical analysis of the Database Any encountered error is indicated so the user can check and correct some of them Note It is important to understand that the GEDCOM Import of a file can be done in a new Database or in the same current Data Directory GDS detects that you are trying to add the data to the existing Database and asks of your acceptance before proceeding Note If the import files were created by programs other than GDS the file will surely have the information about the Surnames without distinguishing the first of the second or the middle initial GDS will detect that circumstance and will alert you You will have the opportunity of deciding whether to perform an internal GDS algorithm that tries to distinguish what is the first Surname and what is the seco
247. ize Millimeter and quality 44 210 s 297 mm Width 297 Height 210 Orientation C Portrait Landscape Quality of B00 dots per inch Printer preferences Options jv Maintain ratio Margins Millimeters lo Top ho Lett lo Down fo Right Print Cancel Figure 115 Options of printing a Photo or Document Image Size Millinmeters Width 22 E Height aoa fw Full page From this window you can perform the following functions Printer You can choose the Printer to be used Copies The number of copies to be printed Title to Print If you want the Title of the image to be printed either above or below the Photo or Document Orientation Portrait or in the form of landscape Paper size you can choose the paper to use from the Printer Options Options e Maintain ratio Maintains always the form factor e Full Page Try to fill the maximum allowed by the paper used Note that usually the Printers should always leave a blank space for mechanical reasons General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 e Centered Centers the image in the paper Image size Sets the accurate measurement of the image to be printed Margins These are the margins that are up to the white space in Full Page mentioned above The actual margin of the paper will be larger than the margin mentioned here Positioning of the Photo or Document in the paper To place the Phot
248. l Figure 26 Panel of Multiple selection of individuals From this window you can directly go to the Advanced search of Individuals See 7 6 11 as many times as you want and adding Individuals from different searches At the same time you can remove Individuals one at a time At the end you get to the desired list of Individuals for whom you want to perform one of the advanced functions listed in this section General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 7 7 Connecting with other Individuals or Documents 7 7 1 Connecting with other Individuals From the Individual Panel you can access directly to their parents siblings children and spouses by clicking on any of the names that appear in the display Also and if they are in the Database the midwife of the birth the officiant the Godmother Godfather of the Baptism the witnesses of the or the Marriages the Notary of the Marriage Chapters and the Notary of the Will Similarly from any report every Individual who appears in it can be accessed by a single click on the name double click in the case of the Photo or Document 7 7 2 The network of Documents GDS maintains not only one Database of Individuals but a set of Documents that relate to them of some way In particular it is advisable to visit the chapters cited below with the aim of better understanding the mechanism of link with ANY related document 7 7 3 Linking any digital Document to the Panel o
249. l Delete Crop Assign this page to the thumbnail of the document Send an e mail with this image Export the image to a different folder or external disk Properties Close Figure 86 Options of the Photo or Document Actions of display and listening e See the Photo in Full Screen Pressing Ctrl Q or from the icons bar clicking on the corresponding icon All the windows will disappear and the Photo or Document will appear with a level of zoom of 100 in the Screen or the proportion defined If the Photo or Document is larger than the screen clicking holding the button and moving the mouse will move the image in line with your movements To get out of this option press any key or double click with the left button of the mouse The choice of Full Screen is also accessible from the icons bar clicking on the corresponding icon See The menu bar and the dynamic icons See paragraphs 5 6 and subchapters e Fit to Screen Also pressing Ctrl S The Photo or Document is presented of the space so that it fills most of the screen but seeing a whole This is the option under the image is presented the first time that is displayed e Fit to Width Also pressing Ctrl W The Photo or Document is presented with the width of the window You can move or by using the bar of the right or clicking in the appropriate bar The image will follow your movements e Zoom You can choose between the system of increase or decrease by a factor of 1 5 or ch
250. l Marshall System Il S C P c Sant Elies 34 5 2 08006 BARCELONA Spain Communicating with Marshall System via FAX 34 93 414 58 33 Communicating with Marshall System via Internet You can communicate with Marshall System directly from GDS provided you are connected to Internet To send an E mail to Marshall System access to the menu Internet Send an E mail to MARSHALL SYSTEM gt Help internet Abbreviations and Signs Send an e mail Create a Web The Web of MARSHALL SYSTEM Send an e mail to MARSHALL SYSTEM D Send a copy of the Data Base files to MARSHALL Friend Webs Figure 185 Sending an E mail to Marshall System You can also send an E mail to our mail address webmaster gdsystem net e Our Web www gdsystem net General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 15 8 Access the web of Marshall System and other friendly webs From GDS you can access directly the web of MARSHALL SYSTEM as with some friendly webs Go to the menu Internet The Web of MARSHALL SYSTEM Send an e mail Create a Web The Web of MARSHALL SYSTEM l Send an e mail to MARSHALL SYSTEM Send a copy of the Data Base files to MARSHALL SYSTEM Friend Webs Figure 186 Accessing the web of Marshall System Or to the menu Internet Friend Webs Help Internet Abbreviations and Signs Send an e mail Create a Web The Web of MARSHALL SYSTEM Send an e mail to
251. l be assigned automatically In fact it is the same as the name of the file of Photo or Document with the extension DOC You can act totally on Word standard so when you save of the document it shall be permanently associated with this Photo or Document and will be accessible from it and that as of this moment when the Photo or Document is visible this symbol appears in the bottom of it Pressing on this icon the document will immediately appear Page 183 9 7 12 9 Create a voice record associated to the Photo or Document For creating a voice recording associated to a Photo or Document act the following way View the Photo or Document Place it in update mode You can do this with four different ways 1 Press F2 or 2 Access to the icons bar and click on the Update icon or 3 Go to the menu What can I do now Update data of this image or 4 Press the right button of the mouse over the Photo or Document You will see a drop down window Then go to Update To the right of the Photo or Document will appear a set of controls for performing a set of functions Press on Recording Creates a voice recording associated to t i Address Figure 106 Creating a voice record associated to a Photo or Document You will get the standard voice recording program of the system You can make the recording and save it Of course you need a Microphone connected and active This recording will be permanen
252. l get a hand in the mouse as well as the rectangles that were previously assigned Figure 99 Initiating the Assignment of a text to a Rectangle of a Photo or Document At the same time appears to the upper right a new box with the Indication of Add Change Delete or Exit It must be on Add e Move the mouse up to the upper left corner of the face of the Individual press the left button and without releasing it move the mouse up to get a rectangle that covers the space you desire For example the face of an Individual or the shape of an object meg a ee zas 2 DILEXIT MULT Y Figure 100 Assigning a text to a rectangle to a Photo or Document At the moment of releasing the button of the mouse it disappears and the box of Add Change Delete or Exit is changed by the following picture Page 179 Exit of update Text describing Figure 101 Choosing Individual in Database or Text describing At the same time the rectangle is flashing with colors white and red The existing rectangles are fixed in red Choose the Text describing option to describe what is this rectangle in the understanding that it is not an Individual of the Database may be another Individual or an object Click on Exit if you did something wrong A panel will appear in which you will type the description of the rectangle in question In the case that has already entered a text in the past during the session you wil
253. l see the list of texts already entered to facilitate the operation DILEXIT MULTUM Figure 102 Entering a text in a rectangle in a Photo or Document Once you have entered a rectangle you can repeat the operation as many times as desired with the aim of fully describe the spaces of the Photo or Document Once the operation is done you can exit or continue with other updates of the same file To delete a rectangle of one Photo or Document go to the section Remove a rectangle of the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 6 Please note that in the Multipage Documents you can assign rectangles in any of its pages See Display of a Photo or Document See 9 7 3 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 7 12 6 Remove a rectangle of the Photo or Document To remove a given rectangle of one Photo or Document of the Photos and Documents Album act the following way View the Photo or Document Place it in update mode You can do this with four different ways 1 Press F2 or 2 Access to the icons bar and click on the Update icon or 3 Go to the menu What can I do now Update data of this image or 4 Press the right button of the mouse over the Photo or Document You will see a drop down window Then go to Update To the right of the Photo or Document will appear a set of controls for performing a set of functions Define rectangles e Press on Define rectangles You will get a hand in the mouse as
254. l the Ancestors of this generation are different The larger the percentage means higher level of consanguinity e TOTAL Total number of different Ancestors found See the chapters List of Ancestors See 8 3 Graphic of Ancestors See 8 5 and Side Graphic of Ancestors See 8 6 for more information Page 97 8 5 Graphic of Ancestors You can see the Ancestors from one to nine Generations as well as print the graphic store it in a PDF or TIF file or send it by e mail LH Ancestors of Sl Sena e Nae We Parents only Parents and Une less Une more See for printer Do not show Preferences E wit change grandparents generation generation the image Ancestors of Joseph N Jones 12 15 1879 Alella tsan Francisco CF 4 3 ik 1907 San Francisco CF 12 26 1988 San Francisco CF 2 5 13 1878 San Francisco CF TSan Francisco CF 5 8 9 1883 Sarria es 4 1972 San Francisco 6 3 31 1914 San Francisco CF 11 29 2008 3 30 1954 San Francisco CF Figure 47 The Graphic of Ancestors Optionally shows the Photo of the Individual By clicking with the left button on any name appearing in the graph you will access the record of the selected Individual If the Individual has Ancestors clicking the right button a new identical graphic appears with that Individual being the base of the new report Every Individual is identified with his her Sousa Ahnentafel If you have deployed a new graphic cli
255. la Calon al carsisetieieea else E O 321 21 8 3 The GDS treatment of the Julian and Gregorian Calendars 324 21 9 Indication of individual AS dead ccccccseeeeceeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeseueeeseeeeseeeenseeeess 325 21 10 Massive changes in the Database cccccccecccseeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseneeneeeeaes 326 21 11 Equivalencies of Names Surnames and places of birth and death 328 ZZ GIOSSALY TASTE A AENEA EAO E T EE EA 329 DS COPY BIG i a E ER 330 23 T ADOUNC AUNO raa E TNN 331 Page 9 Table of Figures Figure L Display OF the GDS Revister sssiictaincensctcceontesusnsmsdanecstasducmmiceceacteseenmussaaeiaace 26 Figure 2 GDS Registration Panel ccccccsnnneeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeees 27 Fig re 3 Process of ACQUIS MOI ce ceccesecasesesaeieanenacctsdeceneuavernssiesedsesecsene ctstestupueveuaestavednde 28 Figure 4 Initial Panel at GDS Start eeren ra a E sass 31 Fic re 5 Nonce on AMMIV EIS AICS vcsces lt acssedexewanansdiend sienne reniir r EEE naniii 32 USO OG E E E E 33 Figure 7 Choosing the Directory Folder of Data ccccccccccccceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 34 Figure 8 User Options Language eeeeeeeeeeessssssssssssssseeeerererereessssssssssssseeeeerreeeree 3l Figure 9 User Options ONY CMOS x siscccssdencerconceecenstetendensiesccasvasannceedeeeemsielendensiuaueess 38 Figure 10 User Options ASPCCt cccciss eannccesersesdhoure
256. lar special thanks to his wife Mrs Maria Antonia Virosque who has supported the multiple renunciations that the development of GDS has caused General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 All the efforts have been devoted to the creation of a document reflecting faithfully the features of the General family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 At the date of its Preparation the product was in our Release 7 0 00 including all the existing functionality and the corrective bugs encountered during the normal operation of the product The author does not guarantee that all and every one of the implemented functions act exactly as described in this manual however we pledge that if the reader detects any anomaly or incongruity between this manual and the program contact Marshall System in order to allow the program as this manual will be corrected in subsequent editions We appreciate the enthusiastic participation of many users of all versions of GDS who generously contributed for many years to the improvement of the product through constructive criticism detection of errors and suggestions for improvement All of them have been feeding the product throughout most of the more than 200 published reviews Joaquim M Casals de Nadal Barcelona September 2012 Page 333
257. laying the desired portion e Fit to Screen Fits the size of the Photo or Document for occupying the most space in the screen without losing any space of it The level of zoom depends if the image has more or fewer points than the dimension of the screen e Fit on width same but adjusting to the width of Screen to the wider side of the Photo or Document either the high or the width e Fit to height same as the above but adjusting to the top of the Photo or Document e Fit the smaller side same for the smaller side e Fit the larger side same for the larger side General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 7 7 See all the rectangles of the Photo or Document DEMO10 Zoom 154 x 791 Y 492 12 i Image 13 35 p 14 Og Figure 91 Seeing the Contents of all the rectangles of the Photo When a Photo or Document has allocated rectangles shows a drawing with two rectangles in the basis of it Pressing the left button on the drawing all the rectangles with the name of the Individual or the description of the rectangle are shown To exit press any key or double click with the mouse 9 7 8 Moving the mouse over the Photo or Document Moving the mouse over the Photo or Document the Names Dates and Places of birth and death of the Individuals who have been assigned to rectangles are shown See Assign a rectangle of the Photo or Document to an Individual of the Database See 9 7 12 4 It also indicat
258. le Individuals Equivalencies Photos and Documents Data Sources Surnames WhatcanIdonow Tools nd Assign or change the Database directory folder Ctrl D Play with the DEMO Database analysis and statistics Ctrl E Print Preview Print Ctrl P Update F2 Specify Scanner or TWAIN device Import Export gt Export to a GEDCOM file Backup of the Database Export to a text or Excel file Registry of the Database Anne a Database sue ngan Fit data ai theae Create a Web Exit GDS Figure 154 Opening the creation of a Partial Database This will open the following panel General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 reate a Vata pase SUDSET From this panel you can create a GDS Database based on 4 subset of the individuals of the current Database Tou mus assign a directory folder in which you want to create the new Database You must assign de individuals who you want to be exported to the new Database The s lection of individuals can be performed as the sum of one or more selections until you have selected all individuals you want Each selection can contain one or more individuals GDS will not duplicate any individual even if they are common in two or more selections Remember to indicate the export options in order to copy all the desired data Remember that during the export new control numbers are assigned to the individuals The export process does not change anything in your Database
259. le or on the contrary copying the selected files to the Photos and Documents Album without modification See also Adding Photos and Documents from a Directory See 9 8 5 2 From any album of thumbnails you can integrate several Images or Documents of it in one multipage file The original files are not altered or deleted lt is important to understand that to create a multipage file the system accepts files in the single or multipage formats of the reading accepted formats BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF TIFF and sizes of different dimensions Thus the integration of 2 JPG files plus an ICO file of 5 pages plus a TIF file of 2 pages plus a PDF of three pages will create a TIF or PDF file of 12 pages The pages are placed in the order corresponding to the entry of the files The multipage files created have the same characteristics as the Photos and Documents Photos and Documents of the album in the sense that assigns a Title a date up to 1000 Page 205 rectangles a Word Document member a voice record the assignment of link of its place in Google Maps and can be associated with as many as you wish Thematic Albums In addition you can rotate right and left without changing the file as well as having the options of viewing a full page Zoom and maintaining them in chronological order The PDF multipage files show the icon of Adobe so if desired you can view the file directly from Adobe Reader For the display con
260. le of the Photo or Document to an Individual of the Database To link an Individual of the Database to the Photo or Document of Photos it is necessary that the Individual is associated with a rectangle of it In a Photo or Document you can have up to 1000 rectangles which may be associated with the different Individuals or to texts that describe objects or other Individuals not contained in the Database To link an Individual of the Database to a rectangle act as follows View the Photo or Document Place it in update mode You can do this with four different ways 1 Press F2 or 2 Access to the icons bar and click on the Update icon or 3 Go to the menu What can I do now Update data of this image or 4 Press the right button of the mouse over the Photo or Document You will see a drop down window Then go to Update To the right of the Photo or Document will appear a set of controls for performing a set of functions Page 175 Modify date Detine rectangles pressed Figure 95 Accessing to Assign a rectangle to one Photo or Document e Press on Define rectangles You will see a hand in the mouse as well as the rectangles that were previously assigned oon ees A Exit of update Recording Document Figure 96 Initiating the assignment of a rectangle to an individual At the same time appears to the upper right a new box with the Indication of Add Change Delete or Exit It must be on Add e
261. ll create all the tiles of data and we do not recommend to use the same directory used for the GUS programs which is named Program Directory which is CAPragram Files 86 GD5 For example your Database Director may be named GGDS Mw Tree and this is the name that we suggest ityou click on assign Database Directors here below During the use of GOS we will name the word Directory or Folder having the same meaning Cancel Figure 6 Cold Start This panel with this or a different message appears when you start GDS and A There is not yet a Directory Folder of Data allocated or b Having assigned a Database Directory there is not yet any Individual Database e In the case that there is no assigned Database Directory GDS it will suggest that you assign one For this See Assigning the Database Directory See 4 5 e In the case of having already assigned a Database Directory but not yet exist anybody in the Database GDS will guide you if you wish to the addition of the first individual See Add a new Individual See 7 4 4 4 Database Directory lt is the place where your Data is kept You can also call it Data Folder or Database GDS works with a single Database Directory simultaneously but you can have as many as desired alternating from one to another Note All the files that you add to the GDS system are introduced in the Database Directory It has no limitations of space or number of f
262. mas Exit Information about the mariage et Type of union Civil marriage Date of Mariage Religious Place Civil Mariage Civil and Religious Civil Register o Civil Book of Register De facto Religious mariage I i Concubinage Date religious mariage Place religious marriage Casual Church Doubtful event First witness Festart Second witness Third witness Exemptions Divorce Annulation Sacramental Book Separation C Restart Insert File link Create document Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic album Connection to a Data Source Figure 33 Information about Marriage or Conjugal union Durante the entrant of the witnesses as the Notary of the Matrimonial Chapters the system asks if that is an individual of the Database If that is the case starts the search of that Individual to locate him her in its place Page 81 Information about Will Various information in relation to the Will The free information is ASCII text Limited to 1000 characters Creating digital links See 7 8 4 G j Death Parents Contact Information Save Exit without modify Information about the will of Joseph N Jones Date wil OO Notary Escribania Church TO Book of Wills Codicils TO Insert File link Create document Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic album Connection to a Data Source Figure 34
263. mation about Death and Burial Information about Personal data In every panel there is space for writing any information relating to the theme in question In the panels of Additional Information and of Surnames you can also set texts or Images with the same characteristics as a document in Word Also at any place in the blank space connections to ANY internal or external file can be made create a document For Example Word create a direct recording through a Microphone add a link to a Photo or Document linked to a themed album or to a source of Data To perform these Actions go to Creating digital links See 7 8 4 Additional Information Here you can place as much information as you wish as well of Images and textual links to files of any type There is no limitation in the dimension of this information GDS will create an ADL file by every Individual who has Additional Information See the GDS Database This file has the RTF format so all the facilities of this format are acceptable for GDS such as rich format of text and the embedding of Images or files See Creating digital links See 7 8 4 Exa Basicinf Additional Inf Surname Inf Titles Birth Marriage Union Will Death Parents Contact Information t Additional information about Joseph N Jones A You can put all the information you want about the person who is treated You can place links to photos both pertaning the Photo and Document album
264. me of the export file p AMAR SHALL Devel O 0EMO DB 0_ END ata Sources 4L5 File name change Export Cancel Figure 126 Choosing the name of the Data Source file Pressing on Export will create a file ready for being read by Excel that contains all the Data of all Data Sources of the Database Index of this chapter 10 1 Creation of a Data Source 10 2 Access to a Data Source 10 3 Associate a Data Source to a portion of text of the Individual Panel 10 4 Access to the Individuals that are associated to a Data Source 10 5 Associate a group of Individuals to a Data Source General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 10 1 Creation of a Data Source Click on Add Data Source and the following table appears Tithe of the Data Source Author Reference information Test or comment Inzert File link Create document Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic alburn Connexion to multiple individuals Where used Update Save E vit Figure 127 Adding a Data Source In this panel enter a name for the source which is what will identify the source in the future Optionally enter an author This may be an Individual of the Database so GDS will ask for his name and you can choose an Individual of the Database or an external Individual Fill the data as indicated In the space named text or comment you can include links as it is done in the blank spaces
265. mnttenses deawienietawes niaii 39 Procure i le ser pions Prenere ne ersen n PEA keumenendsiaaseaste gt 40 Figure 12 User Options JPG Options sssseeeessssssssssssssssseeerrrereesssssssssssssssseeeereeeeeee 4 Figure 13 User Options Photos at Full Screen cccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 42 Figure 14 User Options Start Options cccccsssssecsssssssssesssssssecccccececessecceeesenssseeees 43 Figure 15 Choosing the background image during the creation of the Web 44 Figure 16 The Windows reSOurces cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeseseeseeeeeeeccceeceeeeeeeeaaaeeseeaeeeeeeees 45 Picure 1 The bar Of the itil MCN iiss cxcose cineessseccecuntecensminnsnesssciaxnneredeseuaiateaesntausenenss 47 Fic re 15 The Mindi al Pane l esn EEr 54 Figure 19 The tabs of the Individual Panel ccc cceeccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 55 Figure 20 The Individual Panel Update of the Personal data eeeeeeeeeeeeee 61 Figure 21 The Panel of search of Individuals cccccceeeeeecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 64 Figure 22 The search of Individuals Panel with previous references 006 65 Picune 25 The istor Tndivid a Seeerei a e 68 Figure 24 Options of the Advanced search of Individuals ceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 70 Figure 25 Advanced search of Individuals in Search by Fields 0 ee eeeeeeeees 70 Figure 26 Panel of Multiple selectio
266. multaneously Note this Function consumes much memory so we recommend using it with caution Some Operating Systems or Computer may malfunction when displaying a large number of images simultaneously Although GDS tries to control the use of the memory cannot guarantee the correct operation with all the Operating Systems Once the Images are in the screen you can go from one to another by pressing Ctrl A Forward or Ctrl F6 Backwards Also if you go to the menu Window you will see the possibility of performing various options with them Whenever one window is active all the functions doable with the Photos and Documents are valid for them See Treatment of the Photo or Document 07 09 12 9 4 4 Selection of multiple Photos and Documents With the purpose of facilitating the classification and file of the Photos and Documents in the Album you can use the Multiple selection of Photos and Documents With this function after you have selected a set of Photos and Documents you can e Assign a Title to them e Assign a date to them e Assign an address to them linked to Google Maps See 21 3 and 21 4 e Assign them to a Theme See the chapter the Thematic Albums 9 3 4 e Export them to another Drive or Directory Folder e Send an e mail with them attached See 15 2 and 15 2 1 e Integrate several Photos and Documents in a single file See 9 9 Each one of these seven functions can be done together or separately Act as follows
267. must also be integrated and in some cases eliminated For this function the system uses the following steps A Knowledge of the Individuals Potentially duplicated B Function of analysis and implementation of the integration of two Individuals Declaration of which two are not duplicated in order that they do not appear again in the list of Individuals potentially duplicated C Dynamic repository of pending actions of Integration Workflow to guide the different pending actions that result as a consequence of previous integrations In the following sections you will see description of the operation of a session of integration after any integration of Data in the Database Note The integration of Individuals is done in any case two by two You can integrate as many as you wish because the system will guide you to the Individuals who have been affected by previous integrations so you can follow your pace even closing the session and reinitiating it later Workflow We recommend great caution to making the integration of two Individuals because the function is irreversible So before you run of GDS is giving you some help mechanisms that allow you to understand in each case whether it is actually an Individual duplicated Page 245 13 4 1 Concept of potentially duplicated Individuals GDS uses the following algorithm for determining if two Individuals are potentially duplicated This algorithm is used for creating the list of In
268. n Aristotle V Jones 6 6 1976 His her father August M Jones 3 11 1907 12 26 1986 His her mother Marilyn B Johnson 3 31 1914 11 29 2006 His her spouse Marilyn G Thomas 2 15 1948 am the one that with this pseudonym hiding the true personality has develaped GDS have spent many hours of my time to the conception and development of the product you have in your hands If you want some fun go to the Additional Information tab Additional information about Joseph N Jones You can put all the information you want about the person who is treated You can place links to photos both pertaning the Photo and Document album as well as external For example this picture below is a photo contained in the Photo and Document Album lt lt Demo264_jpg gt gt The sun lt lt Demo Word DOC gt gt lf you want to keep music GDS can connect with it directly Try clicking below lt lt Apple skin_wav gt gt Song from Joan Serrat Hach and Mozart below tou May nave a midi orocessor iT So Try the Figure 44 The full Display of the Individual record Pressing in Preferences you can change the characteristics of the graphic By clicking on any name appearing in the graph you will access the record of the selected Individual To Print or create a PDF or TIF file either single page or multipage go to the bar icons Print Page 93 To See the details of the printing options access Printing of Reports or creation of PDF TI
269. n See 7 3 3 and 7 3 4 Surname Information See 7 3 5 Information about education titles and professions See 7 3 6 Information about birth See 7 3 7 Information about will See 7 3 8 Information about death See 7 3 9 Information about Individual data Contact information See 7 3 11 From this panel there is direct connection to the following related Individuals e Father e Mother e Children e Siblings e Previous sibling e Next sibling e Spouse or spouses To access one of them move the mouse to the desired Individual and click on him her From this panel there is also direct link to the following reports Full Display See 8 2 List of Ancestors and of consanguinity See 8 3 and 8 4 Graphic of Ancestors See 8 5 Side Graphic of Ancestors See 8 6 List of descendants See 8 7 Descendants Graph See 8 8 Surnames See 8 9 Descendant Tree See 8 10 Familiar relation with another Individual See 8 11 Uncles Aunts Nephews Nieces Cousins Second cousins Photos or documents of this Individual Page 55 7 3 Data in the Individual record 7 3 1 Basic data of the Individual The data shown in this tab all of it extracted from the Database are the following e Name and Surnames Includes the prefix and the suffix if they exist e Gender e Nickname or name given familiarly e Date and place of birth e Date and place of your Death e Free space to introduce any kind of information or link
270. n and Switzerland Zurich Bern Basilea Schaffhausen Gent M hlhausen and Biel Wednesday 12th of January of 1701 came after Tuesday 31th of December of 1700 e The Netherlands Drenthe Thursday 12th of May of 1701 came after of Wednesday 30th of April Year 1752 e England and its colonies Terranova and the cost of Hudson Bay in Canada Atlantic coast of USA Washington and Oregon Scotland Ireland India Thursday 14th of September of 1752 came after of Wednesday 2nd of September This is the cause why it is said that Miguel of Cervantes Saavedra and William Shakespeare died both on 23rd of April of 1616 In reality this last dies 10 days after 3rd of May of the European Calendar In England the days in the Julian Calendar that happened before the catholic Calendar in 1752 are called OS Old Style The initials NS New Style indicate the Gregorian Calendar Year 1753 e Sweden and Finland When were conquered by Russia had to adopt at certain degree the Julian Calendar in the year 1700 decided to cancel the leap days during forty years that was supposed to adjust to the new calendar during that period That was done that year but not in 1704 and 1708 nobody knows why Thus in that decade their dates were not in concordance with any other Country in the World Gregorian or Julian Later in 1712 they decided to return to the Julian Calendar aggregating one day to February a 30th of February to the leap year 1712 Forty year
271. n Modify Data of this Individual See 6 3 e Press the F2 key when the Individual Panel is active General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 7 3 11 Information about Individual data From this panel the contact information of the Individual can be introduced It has the same options than the other update tabs In the case of the Address there is the possibility to connect with Google Maps to show the map of the zone Press on Search Address See Addresses and Maps 21 3 ee WUDQAGLE OT L Jab JOUL JUSED JU x Contact information of Joseph N Jones Contact name Address Address City Zip Postal code State Country Telephone Cellular FA OO e mail Search address Home page Passport number Social Security number Celebration Date Insert File link Create document Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic album Connection to a Data Source Figure 20 The Individual Panel Update of the Personal data There are three methods for updating the data contained in this tab You must initiate the update from the Individual Panel e Click the icon Update See 7 8 1 when the Individual Panel is active e Click on the menu What can I do now and after click on Modify Data of this Individual See 6 3 e Press the F2 key when the Individual Panel is active Page 61 7 4 Add a new Individual Pressing the Add an Individual icon the corresponding panel app
272. n a Photo or Document 00668 180 Figure 103 Removing a Rectangle from a Photo or Document cc ceeeeeeeeeeeees 181 Figure 104 Changing the Contents of a rectangle of the Photo or Document 182 Figure 105 Creating a Word document associated to the Photo or Document 183 Figure 106 Creating a voice record associated to a Photo or Document 184 Pisure 107 Copa Rectan le 1rOm a PNO Oen tual E T 185 Figure 108 Assigning one photo to the Individual Panel from the Browsert 186 Figure 109 Selecting a photo to be included in the Individual Panel 000 187 Figure 110 The Individual Panel with the chosen Photo 2 0 0 0 eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 187 Figure 111 Assigning a Photo to the Individual Panel from the own Photo 188 PreuresWi2 sciser Options a4 SPCC ls eveiaccexeeiwcasetuadectior stern bales iseua ug velecteatio a eeeetienstes 189 Figure 113 User Options Photos at Full Screen ecccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 190 Figure 114 User Options JPG and TIF Options ccc ccccccceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 191 Figure 115 Options of printing a Photo or Document sseseeeeeessssssssssssseseeeeereresees 194 Figure 116 Positioning the Photo in the printer sheet cceeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 196 Figure 117 Specifying Scanner or TWAIN device cceceecccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 198 Pioure113 Format or the Sca
273. n from the Panel of the Individual Being named in any GDS report Being shown in a photograph or document In general if an Individual of the Database is visible you can reach his her panel by clicking on his her name The only exception is in the Photos and Documents that you have to double click instead Page 71 7 6 13 Selecting a collection of Individuals for some advanced functions Several Individuals can be selected or all for the following advanced functions of GDS e Statistics and Analysis of the Database See 8 12 e Export of data to a text or excel file See 13 2 e Export a GEDCOM file See 13 3 2 e Creation of GDS Databases as subset of the current Database See 13 5 e Creating a Web with your Database See 15 3 e Massive changes in the Database See 21 10 e Associate a group of Individuals to a Data Source See 10 5 When you start any of these functions or at the moment of choosing the Individuals with whom you want to perform the desired function the following window appears TS arden ole Era peels ree fis Poel oe Vn cele IVI TO INCIUGE IN The GED YI THE From this panel you can select the individuals to be included in the desired operation ou can make your selection as many times as desired by pressing the selection people control and can remove people from the list by pressing the control of disposal Selection of individuals to include in the GEDCOM file Remove People OK transmit Cance
274. n of individuals cc ecccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees T2 Figure 27 Update of the Basic data of the Individual 0 0 0 0 cccennneteeeeeeeeeeeeees 75 Figure 28 Preview of names or places while updating eoonessssoseenesssssssserersssssssse 76 Figure 29 Update of the Additional Information of the Individual eeeee 78 Figure 30 Update of the data about the Surname cccecececcecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 Figure 31 Update of the Data of Titles and Professions 2 0 0 0 cccccceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 Figure 32 Update of the data about birth and Baptism 2 0 cceenneeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 Figure 33 Information about Marriage or Conjugal UNION ccceceeccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 81 Figure 34 Update of data about Wi ccccesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeecceeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeees 82 Figure 35 Update about data of death and burial ec ececcccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 83 Figure 36 Update of the Personal data cccsssssesesssseeeeeeeeceeeccceceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 84 Picur o MM OGHC HIS Dals erer scent asessuseene lt tsceuse onenopastenaenevsenmeseceinepnnccenesecdssoteecs 84 Figure 38 Introducing Dates during the transition from the Julian to Gregorian calendars 1352 to 1929 Jo icscsssitcadenderaciosausseddicnesdtesauncaisusaistenssinseialannioinieiataaatincseneten 86 Figure 39 Creating Digital HNkS i cecccscccccccccceeeseeecceceeeeseeeseeceeeeeesaaaaseeeeees
275. n pay by VISA or bank transfer Prices The prices are directly given at the moment of preparing the order Note For more information about the system of registration of GDS please refer to the chapter Registration Panel See 3 3 This manual is not delivered in any case as a printed book It is always available in the website mentioned so it can be downloaded for free from it and be consulted or printed This manual is also available directly from the program itself Accessing to Help GDS Manual To view it requires Adobe Reader Page 25 3 1 Registering your personal data in your computer Your computer keeps record of your personal that data that you have entered at the time of the acquisition of a Database key or at any moment afterwards No record of you personal data is kept in your Database sibjnce it is kept in your PC Editing your registry data GDS General Family Documentation System Personal data of the licensee Comentarios Enter the data for registration Those marked with an asterisk are required Change registration data taking into account the need to include content in those preceded by an asterisk Name Sumames Once updated press the key Save the edited data Miname My Sumame i C S S Address My address Zip Code City OOK M y City State Country My State My Country Telephone My telephone e mail My E Mail Repeat the e mail My E Mail Fiscal identification Exit
276. ncestors Sounds 24 2min and 100 max Festart to 24 T Apply Maximum number of generations during the analysis of descendants 24 2 min and 100 max Beg ein el Maximum number of Sumames in the Surmames Display B 32 we 2 C 6192 f 131072 C Be f 1024 f 16384 C 262144 m 128 moop C 32768 f 256 4095 65536 Restat to 4096 Accept Cancel Apply Figure 11 User Options Preferences To change your preferences in the following subjects Names of inserted files GDS generates the files names automatically when creating new documents or photos from scanners or from the creation of Word Documents or voice files But you can opt for choosing the name of them every time a file is created We recommend keeping the automatic option because GDS guarantees the inexistence of conflicts of having duplicated names Tips of the Day at GDS start a suggestions window is open There is a file of options that are shown at random This function may be useful at the beginning of the use of GDS If you wish you can deactivate it from this panel Maximum number of generations in the Ancestors lists GDS supports up to 100 generations of Ancestors In the case of large Databases the calculation of the Ancestors may be too long in time at could be recommended to limit the number of generations to be developed Maximum number of generations in the descendants lists Same as above for the calculation of descendants Also in this
277. nclude fancy visual tools in favor of functionality So do not pretend to compete with the large number of programs that have a much better first look than GDS Should you are interested in knowing the date in which a particular function have been first introduced please contact us and we will respond to you immediately Chronological log of Versions Revisions of GDS up to Revision 7 0 00 September 1 2012 December 28 2011 October 26 2011 October 18 2011 September 13 2011 September 8 2011 August 24 2011 July 10 2011 June 20 2011 May 20 2011 April 30 2011 March 24 2011 January 9 2011 December 2 2010 November 23 2010 November 22 2010 November 17 2010 October 29 2010 October 25 2010 October 14 2010 October 13 2010 October 12 2010 September 16 2010 May 29 2010 Version 7 0 00 Version 6 0 43 Version 6 0 42 Version 6 0 41 Version 6 0 40 Version 6 0 39 Version 6 0 38 Version 6 0 37 Version 6 0 36 Version 6 0 35 Version 6 0 34 Version 6 0 33 Version 6 0 32 Version 6 0 31 Version 6 0 30 Version 6 0 29 Version 6 0 28 Version 6 0 27 Version 6 0 26 Version 6 0 25 Version 6 0 24 Version 6 0 23 Version 6 0 22 Version 6 0 21 a ee ce ee a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee a General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Version 6 0 20 April 28 2010 Version 6 0 19 April 8 2010 Version 6 0 18 February 18 2010 Version 6 0 1
278. nd or middle initial placing the data in the right place in the Database The algorithm is not perfect so certain complex Surnames can be misinterpreted so it is advisable to perform a manual post review For example listing all the imported names and Classifying them by first after by second or middle initial and looking for any error In the case of observed errors the user can fix them manually Note If your desire is to incorporate the data of aGEDCOM file to your own Database and analyze the impact in the Database seeing the potential individuals who are duplicated there are specific functions in GDS to ensure the integrity To understand these possibilities go to Integration of duplicated Individuals in the Database See 13 4 Page 239 13 3 2 Export to a GEDCOM file It will create a file in GEDCOM format corresponding to the Database contained in your Database Directory GDS includes in the GEDCOM file all the information found in the Database with the exception of the Photos and the Documents This function is accessed from the menu File Export Export to a GEDCOM file Update F2 Specify Scanner or TWAIN device Import Export Export to a GEDCOM file Backup of the Database Export to a text or Excel file R Registry of the Database To create a Database subset Edit data of the register Create a Web Exit GDS Figure 139 Export to a GEDCOM file A warning
279. nealogical studies therefore in every moment a particular individual can be analyzed as origin of any genealogical analysis e The storage of any information that can be digitized and it concerns to Individuals This includes photos documents of Text video audio or any information that can be represented by a computer e Use of the fact that any information may be related to several Individuals e All data being stored in the system one time only being the system of linkages and connections that associates the Individuals and documentation the glue between all of them e In particular the Photos and Documents Album is an application that brings together the Photos and Documents with personal information with any other content The Photos and Documents are always displayed in chronological order Every Photo or Document may be related to an unlimited number of Individuals of Places of texts or of Thematic Albums remaining only one copy of it in the Database e The only program that may base two Surnames as the identification of the Individuals Special for Spanish and Portuguese speakers In summary GDS is presented as the container of the complete familiar genealogical and documentation network See the following for more detailed information on some of these points The Sousa system of numbering ancestors See 2 1 The Melgar system of numbering Surnames See 2 2 Consanguinity Analysis of the Ancestors See 8 4 Family relation
280. nealogists historians and other scientists The GEDCOM standard is composed of a grammar several structures and substructures and primitive elements The information is stored in plain files with directly readable characters The way of transmission can be interpreted from the direct reading if the elements of the grammar and the other components are known GEDCOM is designed in such a way that most of the Genealogy programs can interpret even in the case that some components were not existing in a particular program The exhaustive description of the GEDCOM standard is freely distributed It can be downloaded as a PDF file in the following web page http ohpgedview sourceforge net ged551 5 pdf Also to get a complete description of GEDCOM history and its creators the following web page can be accessed http en wikipedia org wiki GEDCOM GDS can import any GEDCOM file creating a new Database or adding its data to your current Database Thus GDS can create a GEDCOM file from any Database Directory and the created file can be used after by any other Genealogy program that have the function of import of GEDCOM files or by another user of GDS Note Do not use the GEDCOM export function to backup your Database since by its own specification the GEDCOM language does not guarantees that all data is placed in the exported file and you may find that when importing that GEDCOM file to create a new Database the result is not complete In fact GDS
281. ng fields Date of death Date of burial Death cause Cemetery Book of register of Death Sacramental book of Death Place of Burial Place of death or Country of Death Indication of individual dead in the Update of the Individual Additionally is considered dead if the present date is above 120 years from his her date of Birth or Baptism Page 325 21 10 Massive changes in the Database This Function is designed for facilitating the massive change of data For example if data were entered with an old denomination and you want all these names with a new one This Function analyzes all the cases in the Individuals selected containing the text to be changed announces the number of Individuals that contain it and if answered affirmatively the changes are made in them You can change the fields of Names Surnames as well as Places and Countries of Birth and Death To make the change is necessary that the word or phrase to change be complete To access this function go to the menu Tools Massive Changes in Names and Places immediately access the Selection of the Individuals to whom you want to do the analysis The only ones subject to be modified See 7 6 11 Advanced search of Individuals The selected Individuals to analyze are shown in the following panel Massive change of texts 2682 individuals From this form you can change a name surname place of birth or death or Country in all the chosen records of the Da
282. ng of length 70 bytes Named as String of length 70 bytes Throne name String of length 70 bytes Surname String of length 70 bytes Second Surname or Middle Initial String of length 70 bytes Suffix String of length 70 bytes Governance period String of length 70 bytes Nickname String of length 70 bytes General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Gender String of length 1 byte 1 for man 2 for woman 0 for unknown Nobiliary Titles String of length 70 bytes Dynasty String of length 70 bytes Lineage or House String of length 70 bytes Date of Birth String of length 10 bytes See Internal dates format Date Alternative of Birth String of length 10 bytes See Internal dates format Place of Birth String of length 100 bytes Country of Birth String of length 100 bytes Date of Death String of length 10 bytes See Internal dates format Date Alternative of Death String of length 10 bytes See Internal dates format Place of Death String of length 100 bytes Country of Death String of length 100 bytes Individual Photo String of length 64 bytes Name of the file of Photo or Document of the Individual Panel Must be in the Photos and Documents Album Main Text String of length 1000 bytes Last Update Date String of length 8 bytes Updated automatically Different format for before and after year 2000 Last Update Time String of length 10 bytes Updated automatically Number in the list of Territor
283. ng that the day and the month must be surrounded by brackets F indicating that the day and the year must be surrounded by brackets G indicating that the month and the year must be surrounded by brackets H indicating that the day the month and the year must be surrounded by brackets mm second month of the year or zero If exists it is used as second month of the year in the between two dates option S second alternative separator Nominal value 1 Post Posthumous 5 puer maid 6 ap ante pater 7 Sp sine prole 8 sn sine nuptiae 9 ap sp ante pater sine prole A ap sn ante pater sine nuptiae B ap sp sn ante pater sine prole sine nuptiae C sp sn sine prole sine nuptiae D spl sine prole legitima E cum prole F ab int G spm YYYY2 second year or zero If exist it is used as second year in the between two dates option See Introducing Dates See 7 8 3 to see the way of entering Dates in GDS Page 227 13 Import and Export Databases GDS allows the Import and Export of Data from and to other sources This chapter describes the functions of Import and Export of Databases and their characteristics However A For the Import and export of Photos and Documents the reader should go to the corresponding chapters Adding Photos and Documents See 9 8 and subchapters for the Import and Selection of Multiple Photos and Documents See 9 4 4 for their export and sending by e ma
284. ng to the files either in format BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF These files have been created directly from GDS or have been imported by any means GDS does not modify the contents of these files except when performing a rotation in a single page document during the update of Photo or Document e B Every image file contains always an associated file with the same name and with the extension IF2 Information File Version 2 The associated IF2 file is created automatically by GDS and is the file that gets modified at the moment an update is done to the image The IF2 file is the one that maintains the characteristics of the image See Contents of a Photo or Document 9 7 2 e C Every image file can optionally contain a text document created by GDS with the format of the word processor of the user by example Microsoft Word This file is created during the General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 update of the image e D Every image file can optionally contain a voice file with the purpose of describing the contents of the image This file is created during the update of the image E A file named ALBUM SUB and an unlimited FBS files each one of them describing a Thematic Aloum These files are created and maintained by GDS and should not be modified by the user e F A file named ALBUM2 FOT created and maintained by GDS Automatically This file retains the Data required for performing the function
285. ngish Shift F3 Cancel Apply Figure 8 User Options Language To choose the language of the interface of GDS You can also switch directly by pressing Shift F1 F2 or F3 such as shown in the panel itself This is done as soon you click on Accept If done by the keys the change is immediate The program may be in execution without the change of language affecting the same If there are open windows all of them are immediately translated to the new language Page 37 GDS remembers the last language used and when restarted it operates in it until a new change is done Conventions JPG and TIF options GOS start options Authorizations Dates and Naming Conventions Naming convention Explore gt i dd mm aaaa Date convention C mmidd yyyy Accept Cancel Apply Figure 9 User Options Conventions To change the Conventions of Surnames and Dates The convention of Surnames is explained in the section The naming conventions See 2 3 The naming convention is to specify the default naming structure and can be also specified for any Individual at any moment so you can have all kind of naming structures in a single Database The Date convention is for the use of European or American way of expressing dates The Date convention does not change anything in the Database and it is purely a way of expressing the simplified dates not a change in the files General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7
286. nned ie eero 198 Figure 119 Accepting a scanned iMage sseesssessssssssssrsecerereeerssssssssssasrsseeseereeeses 199 Figure 120 Importing one or more Photos from another folder cc eeeeeeeeeeeeee 201 Figure 121 Choosing the format of the multipage file to be created 06 202 Figure 122 Introducing a new photo in a text of the Individual Panel 203 Figure 123 The Advanced functions of the Photos and Documents Album 207 Figure 124 Advanced search of Individuals of Photos and Documents 208 Fiore 25 Pane lO Ieist or Data SOULCES aeoe e EES 209 Figure 126 Choosing the name of the Data Source file sssseeeeeeessssssssssssssseeerrereeees 210 Figure 127 Adding a Data SOuUtrCe acct sssaictcachsscds ctvanestacensibieivadeacdataoun a 211 Proure 128 Data Source EXaMpl Esentepe aca 212 Figure 129 Information about Surnames cccccccccccsssseeseceeeeeeeeaaeesseeeeeeeeeeaeaensees 214 Figure 130 Panel of information of a Surname cccseeeeeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 215 Figure 131 Panel of Update of the information of a Surname cccesseeeeeeeeeeeees 215 Figure 132 Accessing to the integration of two Databases cccseecsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 229 Figure 133 Instructions for the integration of two Databases cceeesseeeeeeeeeeees 230 Figure 154 Export Data toa textor Excel Tile vssi
287. nsidering that the margin of error was of only 11 minutes and 9 seconds to the year that is less of a second per day but in order to avoid complications it was defined as of 365 days of duration adding ten days to the year of 355 days Censorino wrote the following text to this respect The confusion was at the end so big that C Caesar the Pontifex Maximus in his third consulate with Lepido as coleague inserted between november and december two intercalary months of 67 days having already recieved the month of February an intercalation of 23 days making the complete year of 445 days At the same time preventing against a repetition of similar errors the elimination of the intercalary month and adapting the year to the solar cycle To do that added ten days to the previous year of 355 days that were distributed between the seven months having 29 days thus January Sextilis and December got two every one and the others only one Page 311 and these additional days were placed at the end of every month in order to not move the dates of the several festivals in each of the months that were celebrated a during long time Thus in the present calendar even if there were seven months of 31 days the four months that originally had that number were still distinguishable to have their nonas in the fifth day of the month Finally in consideration of the fourth day that he considered that completed the year established the norm that to the
288. nt Alburm Figure 66 Access to the Photos and Documents Album from the icons bar From the menu Photos and Documents Open the Photos and Documents Album E i ation 5i File Individuals Equivalencies Photos and Documents Data Sources Surnames What can do now aR ey z 3 Open the Photo and Document Album Ctrl F Rebuild the Photo and Document Album Figure 67 Access to the Photos and Documents Album from the menu e Pressing Ctrl F and finally e from the menu What can I do now General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Equivalencies Photos and Documents Data Sources Surnames Tools Window Image Help Internet Abbreviations and Signs Assign or change the Database directory folder Play with the DEMO Search the help index Search an individual in the Database Add a new individual to the Database Open the Photo and Document Album Open the list of Data Sources Open the list of informations about Surnames Statistical analysis of the Database Rebuild the Photo and Document Album Specify scanner or TWAIN device Merge two Databases Import from a GEDCOM file Export to a GEDCOM file Export to a text or Excel file Connect with the Web of MARSHALL SYSTEM Send an e mail to MARSHALL SYSTEM Create a Web Send a copy of the Database files to MARSHALL SYSTEM Exit GDS Figure 68 Access to the Photos and Documents Album from What can I do now In any of these options
289. nt is assigned and number of pages in the case of multipage document It is necessary to distinguish between the date of the file and the date of the image The date of the file is the date in which the physical file is created in the System while the date of the image is the date that is assigned as the date of the image For example a Photo or Document of 1925 that has been introduced in the system in 1998 will have as date of file as 1998 and date of the image 1925 To all effects the date of the image is what is relevant The same applies to the name of the file and the Title The name of the file has no relevance since what is important for the user is the Title In other words the name of the file and its date of creation are irrelevant for GDS GDS uses the name for identification only but never relates it to any content of the image All references about Individuals or objects are done through the rectangles and never from the name of the file All synchronization of the date of the image is made through the date of the image that has been introduced by the user See 7 9 11 In one window appear the following features e Title of the Photo or Document e Individuals of the Database referenced in this Photo or Document e Rectangles with text in this Photo or Document e Thematic Photo Albums in that this is Photo or Document is associated e Number of pages in the case of a Multipage file General Family Documentation System GDS Vers
290. nths duration of the year and of the months for example the inhabitants of Alba Longa had a Calendar of 10 months of 18 to 36 days every month Labinia had another of 374 days distributed in 13 months the Etruscans had months based in the full moon No Roman Calendar had the week defined Roman Calendar Finally it was agreed to use a common Calendar of 304 days divided in 10 months 6 months of 30 days and 4 of 31 days But it had gaps of time and the pagan pontiffs readjusted them annually in the last month The adjustments were made for political criteria but not astronomical as determining the day of pay and it was a misuse of the adjustment for extended charge of an officer delay or advance voting etc The year began in March Martius from the god of the war Mars who was the first month of spring when the military campaigns of the year were decided The months went from martius up to februarius in this order Martius Aprilis Maius Iunius Quintilis fifth month Sextilis sixth month September seventh month October eight month November ninth month December tenth month Page 321 Ianuarius Februarius The adjustments did not prevent the gap of time and it happened that the winter were dated out of the astronomical real date until Jules Caesar ended with the gap in the reform Ordering one Roman Calendar Preparation of the Julian Calendar Sosigenes of Alexandria was aware of the failed reform of Can
291. nts that meet these conditions General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 10 Data Sources The information of the GDS Database can come associated with its source of Information GDS maintains an unlimited number of Data Sources and you can place any reference to them in any place of the text spaces in the Individual Panel and or in the Panel of Marriage or Conjugal union Thus in any basic information additional Surname Birth Marriage or conjugal union Will Death and Personal data can be supported by the Indication of what is its documental source Even in any one of the above areas you can relate portions of information to various Data Sources Inversely you can access those Individuals that are associated with a particular Data Source as well as to associate several Individuals one Data Source See the following sections for understanding its operation From the main menu click on Data Sources The following table appears To see a Data Source perform double click over the selected T itle i Book of the Family Manan B Boyle Esport Data Sources at Data Add Data Source Exil Ounce Figure 125 Panel of List of Data Sources The set of Data Sources can be printed clicking the icon of printing or you can Export to a XLS file for to be read by Excel To do this click on the Export Data Sources control The window of assignment of address and name of the desired file appears Page 209 Ha
292. o Name Days 1 January 31 2 February 28 629 3 March 3l 4 Abril 30 5 Mayo 31 Page 315 6 June 30 7 July 31 8 August 31 9 September 30 10 October 31 11 November 30 12 December 31 e Day is the fundamental unit of time of the Gregorian Calendar A day is roughly equivalent to 86 400 seconds of the International Atomic Time or TAI remember that the TAI is the one that has to be adjusted to the real motion of Earth s rotation which is delayed with respect to the duration of the same e Week period of 7 days Internationally it is considered that the first day of the week is Sunday The driver of the reform of the Calendar was Ugo Buocompagni ecclesiastical lawyer elected pope on 14 of May of 1572 under the name of Gregory XIII The Commission of the Calendar is constituted notably with Luis Lilius and Christopher Clavius Clavius a Jesuit astronomer the Euclid of his time was a renowned mathematician and astronomer The same Galileo Galilei as required his scientific support of his telescopic observations A crater of the moon bears his name Lilius a physician and astronomer was the principal author of the reform of the calendar He died in 1576 without seen his work completed Finally another individual in this story Alfonso X of Castile the Sapien the value given to the tropical year in the Alfonsine Tables of 365 days 5 hours 49 minutes and 16 seconds is taken as the right for the Commission of the Calendar Ped
293. o is an extraordinary development that is a magnificent heritage of the western culture Notes The Julian Calendar was basically the Egyptian Calendar the first known Calendar that established the year of 365 25 days The Council of Nicaea was the first Grand Council of the Christendom summoned by the Emperor Constantine From the year 45 bC up to 325 aC up to 370 years had passed there has been an advance of nearly three days in the dating In the date of conclusion of the First Council of Nicaea the equinox occurred the 21st days of March and 21st of September while the solstices were the days of December 21st and 21st of June However while the Julian Calendar was in force these events had taken place the days 24th of the respective months as with the summer and winter solstices corresponding to the shortest night and the longest the pagan celebrations of these nocturnal events have been perpetuated though Christianized under the appellations of Saint John the Baptist Night of Saint John and of Christmas Eve but no longer coincide with the respective solstices In homage to Clavius one of the craters of the moon takes his name St Teresa of Jesus died the 4th of October of 1582 and was buried the next day 15th of October During the night it was evening in Alba de Tormes there was the jump of ten days of the reform of the calendar The so called Revolution of October 1917 in Russia in 1917 was in fact in the rest of Eu
294. o Individuals the following way e First of all GDS checks whether if there are a common ancestor or a common ancestor Marriage If it is found reports the relation Thus in this case the relation found is always in the form of tree ascendant rise from the first Individual to the common ancesior or couple and then falling the corresponding descendants to the second Individual After that GDS search for a second possibility of existing other common ancestor or ancestors of another family branch of If found the system also reports this relation These situations happen when there are Marriages between cousins Their descendants are related both from the father as well as the mother e If the system does not find any common ancestor of the two Individuals to relate starts a mechanism of concentric search searching any relation of any kind up to 160 levels If finds any relation via whatever kind of link tries to optimize and simplify it and then once optimized presents it This is a unique system of finding distant relationships between Individuals which may be related to the several by marital unions but they have no consanguinity e The graphic shows with the intermediate Individuals who are Spouses Siblings or Cousins with vertical lines to further clarify the relation To Print or create a PDF or TIF file both single page as multipage go to the bar icons Print To See the details of the printing options access Printing of Reports or cre
295. o facilitate the Access to popular functions saving the user to access the menu bar in all cases Thus with one sole touch of the mouse you can access the Function you want Most of the functions for which there is an icon can be done from the menu bar or in most cases from the active panel itself There are the following icons which are visible only at the moment are useful Print or create a PDF or TIF file Send this report by E mail Search Individual Add Individual eS oo ee i Cc xe Q D 2 a J Statistics of the Database Photos and Documents Album Photo in Full Screen Adjust to the size of the window Adjust to the width of the window Zoom in Zoom out Ble oo om Select Zoom area Magnifying glass Back to normal Help General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 5 7 The background color You can change the background Color This color will remain as standard when you reopen GDS From the menu click Tools Options Aspect 5 8 Choosing the language From the menu Tools Options Language indicating the Language of your choice GDS will immediately change to the chosen language without interrupting the operation You can also click Shift F3 for English Shift F1 for Spanish and Shift F2 5 9 Changing languages without exiting GDS Clicking Tools Options Language from the menu you can change the Language of use in GDS In this version y
296. o or Document in the desired location do the following e Turn off the Full page option When this option is on you cannot drive other than the Centered option but the other controls will not work e Monitor the size of the printed image using the buttons included in Image size Notice that if the form factor is on increasing or reducing the value of any of the Width or Height values the other are changed automatically Once the Photo or Document has the proper dimension to your wishes you can move the Photo or Document in the page by two procedures e Using the margins buttons e Clicking the mouse in the thumbnail and moving the image in any sense to the desired location Note that while moving the image the indicators of margins included in Margins are updated in line with the actual position Page 195 National Park of Ordesa Spain Monday October 11th 2004 Title to print Print title Above the image f Below the image OMAR SHALL Devel OXDEMO DB FO_ENSDEMO261 JPG Printer Copies Hame HF Photosmart 6510 seres Aed copies H Vi here Held Choose Printer Paper size Mlilimeters and quality Ad 210 297 mm width 297 Height 210 Onentation C Portrait f Landscape Quality of BOO dots per inch Printer preferences Options W Maintain ratio Margins Millirnmeters EE Top Jag Lett je Down E3 Right Print Cancel SH Image Siz
297. o or from the Data Directory Let GDS do the job for you Anyway if by accident you have to rebuild the Photos and Documents Album do it GDS will take its time but at the end you will have a neat and clean new Photo and Documents Album Note GDS detects any anomaly in the Photo and Documents Album every time GDS is started and in the case GDS finds a defect starts the process of reconstruction of the Photos and Documents Album automatically See 9 5 Page 151 9 7 The Photos and Documents in GDS This chapter explains the functions and characteristics of the Photos and Documents Index of this chapter 9 7 1 Display Photo or Document 9 7 2 Contents of a Photo or Document 9 7 3 Display of a Photo or Document 9 7 4 Display options of the Photo or Document 9 7 5 Photo or Document at Full Screen 9 7 6 Choosing the type of display at Full Screen 9 7 7 See all the rectangles of the Photo or Document 9 7 8 Moving the mouse over the Photo or Document 9 7 9 Display of the list of Photos and Documents of an 9 7 10 Access to the Panel of an individual of the Photo or Document 9 7 11 Properties of the Photo or Document 9 7 12 Treatment of the Photo or Document Update 9 7 13 Print a Photo or Document General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 7 1 Display Photo or Document Display of a photo document or graphic GDS admits the display of files in format BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF
298. ocumentation based in the information both of individuals as of its relations between themselves That is it is not only supposed to be saving Information about birth Marriage children or death of an individual but GDS allows to add documentation in form of text photo or any form or media provided it is Supported by the operating system used This information may be related to an Individual or several and it is connected with the Database in a way that the access is immediate SO you can save information of texts using your usual word processor photographic information introducing the photographs documents either through a scanner of either connecting the files obtained by other means as is a digital camera or Photographic Internet files collected in At the same way you can connect multimedia files The facilities of the Photos and Documents Album make GDS a system of conservation and file of the family Photos and Documents The system allows the identification of the Individuals or objects contained in the Photos and Documents as well as the link between them and the Individuals identified Also a system of search allows the observation of series of Documents or Photos and Related Documents If fact GDS can be used by itself as one application of logical storage of Photos and Documents even without the specific use as a Genealogical System The possibility of maintaining information Data Sources further clarify the contents of the d
299. oday C One month from today Month and day low Month 7 Day v7 Month and day up Month 7 Day fai Figure 62 Search of Events To understand the logic about the indication of Individuals living or dead See Indication of individual as dead See 21 9 There is the default display of the Events of the day of today that automatically is shown at the start of GDS If you want to delete this option it can be done from the menu of Tools Options Start Options See 5 User Options Page 117 8 14 Statistical Analysis of Names Surnames and places of birth and death From the Function of Statistics See 8 12 as well as from any List of Individuals See 7 6 6 you can activate the Statistical Analysis of Names Surnames and places of birth and death of the whole of Individuals selected The report has the following Aspect First names Carolyn John Monique Marjory August Jack Ariana Margaret Charles Foster Joseph Lindsey Raquel James Joachim Ronald Mandy Mayra Alfred Maud Peyton Armold Johnathan Mario Penelope Aveline Eric Jefferson Mitta Maria Mikel Bill Isidro Marilou Martha Monea Dorotea Elia Ersenio Matea C anmiana mda Surnames 123 times Smith j Johnson Williams Brown Jones Davis Miller Wilson Moore Anderson Taylor Rodriguez Thomas Jackson Harri
300. oes not necessarily have the same name as before 2 Copy ALL the files that are mentioned in section C to this Directory 3 Execute the installer GDS mentioned above 4 Start GDS normally 5 When you are asked to enter your data directory assign the data directory mentioned in 1 3 How can assign a photo to the album of a person The assignment of pictures to people is done by assigning a rectangle of the picture to a person of the database Thus a photograph can be associated to all persons appearing therein In other words a photograph is placed in the photo album of all persons contained in it with the condition of assigning a rectangle the one that fits your face for example to each person How to assign a rectangle to a person A Display the photo B In the icon bar click on the icon Update or press F2 Some controls will appear to the right of the picture C In the controls that appear to the right of the picture click on the rectangle that says Define rectangles Then will appear at the top right of the picture a box with options Add Change Delete and Exit The Add option is enabled D Moving the mouse over the photo appears a hand with a pointing finger Move the mouse to the upper left corner of the rectangle you want to define Press the left button and hold it down Move the mouse until the rectangle is drawn to be described for example the face of the person to be assigned E Release the button Imm
301. of the Browser are applicable In the case that an Individual is identified in more than one page of a multipage document the thumbnail of the document appears as many times as pages that contain a rectangle identifying this Individual When opening that thumbnail the document will be open at the page corresponding in which that Individual is identified At the time of displaying the Document or Photo of the Individual the rectangle that identifies him her becomes visible for a few seconds This is especially useful for the case in which in the Photo or Document several Individuals appear so you can identify him her immediately For the Treatment of Multipage Documents access Multipage Documents See 9 9 9 3 3 The Albums by other concepts How to arrive to the diverse Photos and Documents Albums by other concepts Always from the Panel of Photos and Documents Album 5 Selection by date Make the selection the form indicated Displays the desired list sorted by date See Browser 9 4 6 7 8 9 10 and 12 Selection by special condition Make the selection the form indicated Displays the desired list sorted by date See Browser 9 4 Selection by Text There are three options e 11 One image in particular Enter exactly the name of the file without specifying the folder The Photo or Document is shown Type only the file name without extension e 3 Images with a specific Title Type all or part of the Title It displays
302. of the recording Lower settings for these properties result in higher quality images with less COMpression Higher settings for these properties result in lower quality images with more COMpression The default settings of 24 for luminance and 30 for chrommance provides about a 141 image compression ratio with minimal data loss Chrominance Factor 30 Recover default Luminance Factor 24 Recorndng options for TIF files GOS can write TIF fles without compression of with JPG type compression the case of compression the parameters above are of use f Not compressed f Compressed type JPG Accept Cancel Apply Figure 12 User Options JPG Options See the chapter User Options relative to the Photos and Documents See 9 7 4 Page 41 Photos Full Screen Language Preferences Full screen images display options Real size at 100 f Fit to screen E Fit on Width f Fit to height Fit the smaller side Fit the larger side Accept Cancel Apply Figure 13 User Options Photos at Full Screen See the chapter User Options relative to the Photos and Documents See 9 7 4 Photo or Document at Full Screen See 9 7 5 and Choosing the type of display at Full Screen See 9 7 6 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Start Options Options JPG and TIF options Full screen images Authorizations GDS start options A GDS start or at any Database Directory change
303. ollege titles wills certificates contracts and in general any document that has relevance for the user whether it is single page or multipage GDS reads all files that meets these conditions and understands that the file in question is a file of the Photos and Documents Album However at the moment of creating a file by GDS it is stored using the JPG format if a file with is a single page and PDF or TIF if it is multipage The JPG format is a format of high compression which has become a standard in the market so it was decided to use this format for GDS together with the PDF and TIF formats for the multipage documents The BMP PNG GIF and ICO formats are used for reasons of compatibility and are read only The fundamental idea of the Photos and Documents Album of GDS is that it can display Albums of Photos and Documents particularized by various concepts showing always in chronological order only the Images of interest See The diverse Photos and Documents Albums 9 3 In reality it is not only a Photos and Documents Album but of a system of management of Aloums of Photos and Documents on demand In the course of this documentation the terms image file of image file of photo photo or document file is used interchangeably referring to every one of the files BMP JPG JPEG ICO GIF PDF PNG TIF or TIFF Photos and Documents of the Album The Photos and Documents Album consists of the following components e A Images correspondi
304. onalizadas Unidades Pulgadas Milimetros Alto 297 OO 25 40 O Punt WAtoe Direcci n de alimentaci n de papel Lado largo primero w Tipo de papel Hojas suelas G Alimentaci n por papel continuo Mangenes de impresi n respecta a la direcci n de alimentaci n de papel Direcci n perpendicular 0 00 5080 00 Direcci n paralela 0 00 5080 00 _Aceptar Cancelar Restaurar valores predeterminados Figure 166 Choosing the size of the PDF file with CutePDF Now you can choose the size Width and Height of the file in millimeters CutePDF Writer admits up to 5 x 5 meters We recommend serving the following way The example that we describe corresponds to a graphic wider than high Do the opposite if is taller than wide 1 Choose the width that you want to have the graphic Although you do it larger does not matter since you will adapt to the desired measure later Bigger the better for getting the best quality We choose 420 millimeters Type 420 in the box of width 2 Calculate the corresponding high for that of the best fit to the graphic For this note that in the Panel of the print has appeared as measure of the graphic 206 x 290 mm after assigning CutePDF as Printer Perform the following calculation Width assigned width in the panel of print x height in the panel of print In this case 420 206 x 290 591 26 Add one small amount to ensure that the lower margin is somewhat larger For example 594 En
305. one first 9 If there is a new revision of GDS in the website can install it on my computer 10 have installed GDS on my home PC and also in the office the database is the same If work with in one of these how can work with the other 11 How I can assign a photo to the panel of a person 12 How can order photographs of the same date 13 have placed a brother in the wrong order How do place it on the right place 14 If buy now GDS can later change computers without paying again 15 If buy now GDS can later change computers without paying again 16 What if am wrong and have introduced a person repeatedly 17 Why every time close GDS it alerts me to protect my database 1 Opening GDS cannot find the database that created What can I do Access the menu File Assign or change the Data directory folder I m lost Search for a GDS Database in the computer Let GDS find all your databases then double click on the one you see is yours Once the name is indicated on the Election Panel click Accept 2 How can recover the GDS operation after a failure that requires the reset of the system GDS works on three different places A The program itself B The Register C The Database A The program is installed using the installer which is downloaded from the web www gdsystem net The installation of GDS should always be from the installer It is wrong to copy it from its previous location as th
306. oose the zoom from 20 up to the 500 The option of increasing or decreasing can be accessed from the icons bar Also clicking on the corresponding icon See The menu bar and the dynamic icons See paragraphs 5 6 and subchapters e Magnifier You can watch a part of the photo with the effect of a magnifying glass Printing of the Photo or Document When you click on this option Also accessible from the icons bar clicking on the corresponding Page 155 icon appears the Panel of adjustment of the page From this panel you can choose the option the position and the desired size of the printing of this Photo or Document as well as the pages to print in the case of multipage document See Print a Photo or Document 09 7 13 Assign to the Individual Panel If you click with the right button of the mouse when it is signaling a rectangle assigned to an Individual appear as available the function of Assign to Panel of Individual Clicking in this text the image will be assigned to the panel of the individual corresponding to the rectangle This is one of the options of Assignment of Photo or Document to the Individual Panel The other is that can be done from the browser For more information go to the chapters Browser See 9 4 and the Individual Panel See 7 2 This action together with the following Extract a Rectangle is useful for creating card type Photos placed in the Individual Panel Proceed first to extract a rectangle with the
307. opus which took place two centuries before and collaborated with Jules Caesar for the reform to take the old Roman Calendar and the prepare as a new calendar This adaptation had the stations and their roman festivals in agreement with the relevant astronomical corresponding date The new Calendar was introduced in the year 46 adC with the name of Julius and of Julian long after in honor of Jules Caesar Only in that year counted 445 days instead of the normal 365 in order to correct the gaps of the previous Calendar and was called the year of the confusion For that reason two months were added between November and December one of 33 days and another of 34 besides the intercalated month in February From 44 bC it was agreed that all the years consist of 365 days and every four years would include 366 and is called leap years because two consecutive dates were dated as February 23 last day of the Roman Calendar at that time In that time that 23rd of February was called the sexto calendas martii and as a leap year the additional day 366 it was called bis sexto calendas Therefore the Julian Calendar year thought that the tropic year consisted of 365 25 days while the correct figure is of 365 242189 1 e 365 days 5 hours 48 minutes and 45 16 seconds The difference of 11 minutes every year had created in the 1257 years that mediated between 325 and 1582 an accumulated error of about 10 days which was reestablished by the Gregorian C
308. or Document Clicking the right button of the mouse on the Photo or Document a drop down list shows up Click on Send an E mail with this image e Going to the menu Internet Send an E mail with this image Depending on the size of the Photo or Document in pixels the system will open a dialogue window in which you will have the opportunity to send the image with a smaller size thus allowing a faster sending of the E mail The Photo or Document will lose some quality depending on the chosen size See Reduce the Image size before sending it 15 2 1 GDS will connect with your mail system and will create an E mail with this Photo or Document as attached document At the same time all the data relative to the Photo or Document will be written in the text of the note the Title the date and the explanation of all the mentioned Individuals in the Photo or Document as well as the rectangles of text You will be able to change the note as required Then assign the recipient persons to whom you want to send the note and you are ready for sending tt To send several Photos and Documents simultaneously go to the chapter Selection of multiple Photos and Documents See 9 4 4 Page 277 15 2 1 Reduce the Image size before sending it GDS can change the size of the image that you are sending via e mail in order to have faster transmission and the receiver see it faster The original image is untouched What do you want to do C To main
309. or Document In this case you can proceed from the own Photo or Document clicking with the right button of the mouse and after click on Send an E mail with this Image Alternatively you access the same function from the menu Internet when the image is active Several Photos and Documents Access the chapter Selection of multiple Photos and Documents See 9 4 4 C Graphs and others These are Graphic of Ancestors See 8 5 Side Graphic of Ancestors See 8 6 Descendants Graph See 8 8 Descendant Tree See 8 19 Lists of Individuals 7 6 6 Lists of Names See 7 6 1 Familiar relation between two Individuals of the Database See 8 11 Information of the Individual See 8 2 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 For sending these Reports through E mail you can access the icon bar with the indication Send this report via an e mail i s Se shes oy he ey ae IE a L PP Poel Phe ot l Lar CCH I Fle Individuals Equivalencies Photos and Documents Data Sou List of the 1234 individuals of the Database res fe a ee ee Figure 175 Initiating the sending or a report by E mail Clicking in this icon the system connects with you e mail system and composes an E mail with its content You just need to name the recipients of the e mail and make the changes that you wish To see the options of delivery See Configure sending a Graph by E mail See 15 1 1 Page 275 15 1 1 Configure s
310. or Document at F ll Screen escicn view vice tains 165 9 7 6 Choosing the type of display at Full Screen eecccccecceesesseseeeeeees 166 9 7 7 See all the rectangles of the Photo or Document cccccccssseeeeeeeeees 167 9 7 8 Moving the mouse over the Photo or Document cccccccsssseeeeeeeeees 167 9 7 9 Display of the list of Photos and Documents of an individual 168 9 7 10 Access to the Panel of an individual of the Photo or Document 168 9 7 11 Properties of the Photo or Document cccecsseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 169 9 7 12 Treatment of the Photo or Document Update eeseeeeeeeeeees 171 9 15 gt Printa Photo or Documeit essre R 193 9 8 Adding Photos and DOCUMEN S erisera a 197 9 8 1 Photos or Documents from scanner ccccccecccccceeeeeeeeecceeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeess 197 9 S 2 SPec VS Cal Neh san ea thinks Maite reiakut adnan tacks aatitennees 197 9 8 3 Choosing the format of the scanned file cc ceeeeeseecececeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 198 9 8 4 Showing the thumbnail to accept the scanned 1mae eeeeeeeees 199 9 8 5 Adding Photos and Documents from a Directory Folder 008 199 9 8 6 Choosing multiple Photos ccccccccccccssssesseeeccceeceeaeesseeeceeeeeseueeseseeeeees 201 9 8 7 Choosing the format of the multipage file to be created ee eeeeeeeee 202 9 8 8 Manual introduction of Photos
311. ormation tab Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic album Connection to a Data Source Figure 28 Preview of names or places while updating General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 To See Details of some of the features that develop during the phase of Update see also the chapters Placing siblings in their right order See 7 8 7 Case of two lists of siblings See 7 8 8 Introducing Dates See 7 8 3 Creating digital links See 7 8 4 For adding a new Individual see the chapter Add a new Individual See 7 4 To delete an Individual press Remove this Individual If there are other linked Individuals GDS will notify it you prior to the removal Note lt is important to understand that the assignment of parents and children relationship as well as of spouses work in the following way Once you have entered the Individuals in the Database you will have to indicate the relationships that exist between them If fact GDS creates the connections between the Individuals automatically so you do not have to worry about the integrity of the links We have chosen the following option for connecting Individuals between tem The link is made CHILD to PARENT In this way the rest of connections will be made either automatically or right after the reply of short questions that GDS will make NORM To relate two Individuals BOTH SHOULD HAVE BEEN CREATED in the SYSTEM PREVIOUSLY Usual way
312. orts are capable of being printed or the creation of PDF or TIF file on a large format Individual Graphic Display Graphic of Ancestors Descendant Tree Graphic Side Graphic of Ancestors Descendants Graph Graphic of Relations All these Reports have the option of Preferences in which the user can choose the relevant options as the format of the texts the number of pages and choosing the Printer or the type of file to generate etc Large Formats The Descendants Graph See 8 8 Side Graphic of Ancestors See 8 6 and Graphic of Ancestors See 8 5 have the special feature to be printed in a single page with very large dimensions The others lose quality in the case that is required a very large single page and this is recommended to create a multiple pages report to be collaged later For a large format graphic in PDF format we advise you to go to the section Virtual printer PDF files See 14 4 The reason of doing this is because even if you can create PDF or TIF files with GDS the page sizes allowed by the CutePDF Virtual Printer is much larger Tested with sizes of up to 5 x 5 meters Text Reports The following Reports to be developed in text format will be created as TXT files Report of errors in the links List of Ancestors and consanguinity Statistics of the Database Analysis of the Surnames Information of a Surname List of descendants Lists of Individuals under conditions of search List
313. oto or Document can be associated to a recording in the same conditions as described above See the Display Photo or Document 9 7 1 Page 307 21 3 Addresses and Maps The Indication of Address in the Personal data of the Individual as well as the Address of the Photo or Document can be linked to Google Maps showing the corresponding map and position See Entering Addresses 21 4 21 4 Entering Addresses street City State Zip Code Country Erase Emit Accept Figure 194 Entering addresses for Google Maps From this panel you can introduce the address GDS maintains the list of the Places already entered so you can choose directly from the list just double clicking on the selected one General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 21 5 Display Text Display of a text in ASCII format Any file embedded with the symbols lt lt and gt gt will be executed with the Windows associated program or if itis a TXT file will be displayed directly by GDS 21 6 Display Errors GDS performs an exhaustive check of the chains of the Database at the moment of start A series of anomalies are detected and are indicated in a report The detected anomalies are e Type 1 There is a reference to a register larger than the number of registers of the file e Type 2 The child of this individual does not signal as his her father or mother e Type 3 The first soouse does not signal t
314. ou can switch to English Spanish and Catalan The change is immediately executed without interrupting what you re doing The functionality is identical in every language You can also Access to the change of Language Pressing Shift F3 for English Shift F1 for Spanish or Shift F2 for Catalan Note The change of Language in GDS is so dynamic that can be performed during the execution of any Function Even if you have open windows with Several Reports photos Individual panels or so The change of language it s made also visible in the Reports and any other open panel 5 10 Changing the naming convention without exiting GDS GDS uses the possibility of Convention of Spanish language which is the same that the Catalan and of the Spanish speaking Countries the Portuguese Convention and the Anglo Saxon Convention You can you choose the Convention of Names to be applied to the majority of the Individuals of your Database This change does not affect to the already existing Individuals in the Database However you can change the convention to any new Individual without changing the position of the others Thus in GDS there is no restriction in the coexistence of Individuals with various Conventions of Names in the Same Database See The naming conventions 2 3 Page 51 6 GDS Help 6 1 Help during GDS operation GDS is very intuitive At any moment the user has in front of him all he she can do with very few exceptions In any case
315. oubtful subjects or in discussion The maintenance of information about Surnames complete the information about the families Adding Data should not be performed at once Thus the design of GDS is made thinking that the user will be collecting the information gradually and over long time Any new data both in the basic information of the individual as in any document can be created or updated at any time The introduced modification will be accessible immediately Having no limitation in terms of the size of the Documents Other than the physical capacity of your facility makes GDS system as THE familiar documentary system The General family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 is the successor of the System of Genealogical Documentation GDS Versions 1 0 2 0 2 2 existing in MS DOS versions and of the versions 3 0 4 0 5 0 and 6 0 for Windows GDS Version 7 0 is compatible with previous versions of GDS General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 See the Characteristics of GDS See 1 2 and the Main Functions of GDS See 1 3 to get a general idea See the System Requirements See 1 4 Installing GDS See 4 1 and Cold Start See 4 2 to start your contact with your every day work with GDS If you want to work in other Languages go to Choosing the language See 5 8 Page 17 1 2 Characteristics of GDS The General family Documentation System GDS has the following features A Multilanguage
316. p internet Send an e mail Create a Web The Web of MARSHALL SYSTEM Send an e mail to MARSHALL SYSTEM Send a copy of the Data Base files to MARSHALL SYSTEM Friend Webs Figure 178 Initiating the creation of the web You can also access the function from the menu File Export Create a Web rs ear File Individuals Equivalencies Photos and Documents ices Surnames What can Ido now Assign or change the Database directory folder Play with the DEMO Database analysis and statistics Print Prewiew Print Ctrl P Update F2 Specify Scanner or TWAIN device Import Export to a GEDCOM file Backup of the Database Export to a text or Excel file To create a Database subset Create a Web Registry of the Database Edit data of the register Exit GDS Figure 179 Building a web call from the File menu Page 279 Then a window of advanced selection of Individuals is open From this panel you can select the individuals to be included in the desired operation fou can make your selection as many times at desired by pressing the selection people control and can remove people from the list by pressing the control of disposal Selection of individuals to melude in the Web Remove People OE transmit Cancel Figure 180 Selecting individuals to include in the web Once the selection is done you will be asked about the place you want the web to be created General Family
317. pendent of uppercase or lowercase typing C The letter is equivalent to n the is equivalent to c D Typing accents is irrelevant E The prefixes a o e and van i da the da do the etc See the list above may be typed or not So if it is and surname of the van Voegen to search for an Individual with this surname you can type Voegen van Voegen voe or of the Voeg or any combination in line with what was said The system will try to find all of the Individuals who meet the first letters of the surname without taking into account the mentioned prefixes If the system finds more than one Individual with the requested texts shows the list of all of them in the screen all From this list the user selects the desired one If only an Individual with the General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 requested texts is found then the Individual panel of this Individual is shown up See List of Individuals 7 6 6 In the case that there are equivalent names surnames or places of birth and death the system searches automatically those Individuals who meet the conditions in all the variants of them See 21 11 Equivalencies of Names Surnames and places of birth and death 7 6 4 Search by Number of Control Enter the Number of Control of the Individual if known The Number of Control is the one appearing in the right low corner of the Individual Panel This option is provided only for special cases 7
318. r TIF file with the contents of this graphic go to the icons bar Send this report via E mail See Sending Reports by Internet 15 1 To get forms or files of large size Printing access or creation of large format file reports See Printing or file creation of large format reports 14 3 and in particular Virtual printer PDF files See 14 4 See also List of descendants See 8 7 Page 105 8 9 List of Surnames This report shows an analysis of the Surnames of the Individual requested The analysis is performed according to the order of Surnames proposed by Melgar and it is done up to a maximum of 262144 User option The order proposed by Melgar is the following e First Surname the surname of the father e Second Surname the surname of the mother These two first surnames are the commonly used in the Spanish and Portuguese systems e Third Surname the surname of the mother of the father That is the second surname of the father e Forth Surname the surname of the mother of the mother i e the second surname of the mother e Fifth Surname the surname of the mother of the paternal grandfather It is the third surname of the father or which is the same the second surname of the paternal grandfather e Sixth Surname the surname of the mother of the maternal grandfather It is the third surname of the mother or which is the same the second surname of the maternal grandfather e Seventh Surname the surname of the mothe
319. r in GDS Anyway the experiences so far have shown that the exchange is very complete Note that the PAF program Like all genealogy programs except GDS uses only a Surname so both last names of people are placed in a single field When importing to GDS this situation is automatically detected and you will be asked if you want to try to discriminate the Surnames and place a second one in the corresponding field of GDS middle name This transformation is performed with an internal algorithm that cannot be perfect so you should check a posteriori the names entered to ensure that discrimination was successful This last applies to Spanish Portuguese name structures only and do not affect Anglo Saxon name structure 7 How do delete a photo from the Photo Album Display the picture Right click the mouse on the photo You will see a drop list Click on Delete and agree to eliminate Page 303 8 By downloading a new revision of GDS Should I uninstall the old one first Normally there is no need to uninstall GDS Just the new GDS will overwrite the previous one If the Database format has changed with the new version the conversion is done automatically If your previous version was 3 0 in this case we recommend uninstalling it first 9 If there is a new revision of GDS in the website can install it on my computer Each new revision of GDS is compatible with the previous ones If the format of the database has
320. r of the father of the grandfather e Eight Surname the surname of the mother of the mother of the grandfather e etc There is a mathematical relation between the number and the number of Sousa Stradonitz and the Melgar number The report has two bodies General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 The list of Surnames If there is a file of common Surname it establishes the link to it so it can be seen immediately In the case that during the evolution of the ancestors a change of a surname has occurred either because a simple change or because an ancestor has taken the surname of the mother this anomaly is reported in the report Surnames ot Joseph N Jones There have been found 36 about the 4096 first Surnames searched These Surnames are Jones Johnson Baker Wilson Moore Smith Rodriguez Ward Black Johnson Hart James Knight White Jones Young Clark aes ig we A a JIA MR Ob oo on oe oo hoe 21 Wells 22 James 26 Lewis 30 Walker 31 Morrison Figure 54 The Analysis of Surnames Pressing the left button of the mouse on any surname it jumps up to the report of origin of this surname See below Page 107 The Analysis of the origin of the Surnames one by one This listing shows the Individuals that caused that surname with information about its precedence in the form of the number of Sousa Ahnentafel and the form Example FFMMEFF for father of the father of the mot
321. r panel will be shown See 7 6 6 Alternatively you can select several individuals of the list using the Ctrl click for Individual selection one at a time or Shift click for multiple selection At the moment you have selected the desired Individuals you can press the Enter key or the right button of the mouse to open them all You can sort the list by clicking on the title of any column The first time orders it in alphabetical order A to Z Clicking it again reverses the order Z to A 7 6 3 Search by name and Surname Enter part or the entire name part or the entire surname and or part or all of the second surname or middle initial and click on the Continue button Keep in mind the following facilities that make the search much safer A Both the name as the surnames can be introduced partially or even not enter them Thus the surname Smith can be introduced as S sm or Smith In the first case the system will search all the Individuals with the corresponding surname starting with S in the second case for SM while in the third case the complete surnames Smith If you do not introduce any letter the system will build the search in coincidence of the other two options of the name or of one of them if you just type the name or to surname So if you type the name Joseph and do not type anything in the surname the system will search all the Individuals whose name begins with Joseph regardless of any other data B The entry is inde
322. r with these three features simultaneously and must give up some of them 1 If we give up that the month has a whole number of weeks we can divide the year in four quarters of 91 days or about thirteen weeks and every one of these quarters in three months of 31 30 and 30 days This is the main idea of the Calendar and is the one that gives less change in our current Calendar 2 If we give up that every station had a whole number of months 1 e the number of that is a multiple of four months we can build a Calendar with 13 months of 4 weeks every one 1 e 28 days This solution is the basis of the Calendar that was proposed already in the middle of the nineteenth century by Auguste Comte It is the only one that all the months have the same structure About the name that would get the new month and the place of the year where to intercalate there were wide range of proposals Moon or Sun intercalated between June and July Columbus Between November and December or recover the roman Mercedonio between February and March 3 If we give up all the months had an equal duration or at least similar we can divide the year in four quarters of thirteen weeks and every one of these quarters in three months of 4 or 5 weeks every one 1 e 28 or 35 days C The week and therefore the year starts on monday or sunday Although this question is of much less relevance than the previous is not free of controversy In the majority of the European Co
323. ram Header Line General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 You can choose that there is a line to identify the fields or not Internal dates format You can choose multiple output formats In the case of Excel format you can create specials columns to the side of the columns of the corresponding Dates for which you will allow to sort the Excel file by these dates as you can do in the lists in GDS Otherwise the columns of Dates are not suitable for the classification in Excel This applies for the Dates of Birth and Death the periods of Government Name Date of baptism Date of Will burial date and the Dates of Civil and Religious Marriage Marriage Chapters and Divorce or Separation Dates 13 2 1 Export Options From this panel you can choose the options of the format of the export Hame of the export file D MARSHALL D evel O DEMO DB 0_EN SGD5_Export els File name change Type of export file f Excel file 4ls Text file bet W Include additional columns for ordering Field delimiter Heading row Tabulation I Include 4 heading row Semicolon C Comma Format of the dates f Expand Dates Week daps C DD MM AAA MMOD AAAS 0 Vertical line f Other C Do not modify Export Cancel Figure 136 Export Options to a text or Excel file Type of the output file You can specify that the extension be TXT for a text delimited file or XLS ready for Excel of
324. ration of GDS Demo Database available for helping the user to practice with GDS e Directory Equivalent to Folder e Display any representation in a window in the computer screen e GDS General family Documentation System Group of programs described in this manual e GEDCOM GEnealogy Data COMmunication Language developed by the The Church of Jesus Christ of Later day Saints LDS Church that helps the communication between different genealogy programs e E mail System of delivering mails through Internet e Scanner Device that digitalize any document or photo to be introduced in the GDS Database e Google Maps Registered brand of Google Maintenance of Geographic information by Internet e HTML Standard language used by the Internet browsers e Consanguinity of Ancestors Expression of the endogamic situation of the ancestors e Melgar The person who developed the methodology for ordering the Surnames of an individual e Multipage Document with more than one page e Sousa Stradonitz The two individuals who developed the method of numbering the ancestors of an individual e TWAIN The standard interface of communication of scanners and other devices with the computer e Digital links Associations from a place of a window to a file of any type or a data in a new window e Web Any Internet places Page 329 23 Copyright The programs and files that are included in
325. reate See 14 2 for understanding the printing or creation of file options Sending Reports by Internet Any report can be sent by Internet Access Sending Reports by Internet See 15 1 Page 257 14 2 Configuration of the printer or file to create To access the panel of configuration of the printing options click the Print or create a PDF or TIF file icon of the menu press the Ctrl P keys or click on See for Printer in the active window The following window will appear depending of the type of print report or create file the aspect can be different and more streamlined as well as in the printing of lists of Individuals the Panel is different Printing of lists of Individuals or creation of TXT file See 14 6 Output option to printer PDF or TIF Qutput to printer C Qutputto TIF Output to PDF Printer Copies First Name HP Photosmart 6510 series Red copies m Where Ne04 Orientation Choose Printer Portrait Paper size Millimeters and quality A Landscape A4 210 x 297 mm Width 210 Height 297 297 mm Quality of 600 dots per inch Format of choice Printer preferences Columns Rows m Printer margins in millimeters 1 1 Primaries Force Zoom t t Lait mE Ta oe l Force Zoom Max Zoom 745 A v ks m Dimensions of report Right 4 Down 4 7 E GO VENAR 7 9 MAAALA SYETEU Oni green na Force value 198x
326. rectangle At the moment of releasing the button GDS creates the new Photo or Document which is available in the Photos and Documents Album with all the copied information and collocated in the chronologically correct place Page 185 9 7 12 11 The photo in the Panel of the Individual GDS has the possibility of keeping one of the Photos and Documents of Photos and Documents Album in the Individual Panel To place a photo in the Individual Panel you may proceed in two ways First method When you open the Photos and Documents Album of an Individual See 9 3 2 there is one option named Assign one of these images to the panel of xxx Marking this option and then clicking on any of the images of the browser assigns this particular image to the panel of this Individual Options Multiple Displays Sequential Display C See Photography C Assign images to themes these images to the panel of Joseph H F this option ts selected and you click one of these images it will be assigned to the panel of Joseph N Jones From the image 1 to the 4 Image 1 DEMD30 To select multiple images use the Ctrl andor the Shift keps be Figure 108 Assigning one photo to the Individual Panel from the Browser General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 See Photography Assign images to themes these images to ir the panel of Joseph H Pree ere ere reer rere rrr rrr rrr rr rrr rir
327. rectangles ta to the Photo and Document Album of this Individual an individual of the Database adding all the comesponding images in his her Photo and Document Album To assign text rectangles to an Individual Change the Text in Titles Change the Test in Rectangles Substitute all the Texts in Titles in Images that have a given text Substitute all the tests of rectangles that have a given test by another one Change Texts in Change texts in Titles Rectangles i Figure 123 The Advanced functions of the Photos and Documents Album The above window shows the three available functions Follow the Instructions in every one of them Keep in mind that once the function has been done you will not be able to recover the previous situation so these functions must be performed when you have sure of making the requested changes 9 10 2 Advanced search of Individuals in Photos and Documents Page 207 Pressing this control on Photos and Documents of the album you access to the following panel Add Person Figure 124 Advanced search of Individuals of Photos and Documents From the Add Person Control you seek an unlimited number of Individuals who want to be present in rectangles of the Photos and Documents You can enter a limitation of years and also you can specify that you want that no more than these selected Individuals of the Database are present in the image Clicking Continue will display all the Photos and Docume
328. registers will be the sum of the registers of both Databases All the data of the Secondary Directory is transferred to the Primary Directory with the changes that are explained below The Secondary Database is unchanged GDS Automatically performs a back up of the files that are changed in the Primary Directory as well as a log of all the actions that are performed so the operation is reversible if for any General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 circumstance the user wants to return to the previous situation Recommendations e Do not stop the process while performing the integration You could destroy a file of difficult recovery e For safety make a backup of the Primary Directory before proceeding to the integration Though all the effort has been placed to ensure that the integration is carried out safely Marshall System cannot be responsible of any loss of Data made during the bulk copy of Data Function of Backup of the Database See 18 1 Technical details Follow a description of what GDS does during the integration of the Databases e First the panel invites the user to carefully read the function of Integration This reading is useful for understanding more what the integration of GDS Databases really means e In this panel the user is invited to the possibility of changing the Primary Directory The current Data Directory Please note that this Directory is going to be modified enriched by the Data of
329. rents Contact information Information about Titles of Joseph N Jones Figure 31 Update of the Data of Titles and Professions Page 79 Information about birth and Baptism Various information in relation to the Birth and the Baptism The free information is ASCII text Limited to 1000 characters Creating digital links See 7 8 4 Information about the birth and Baptism of Joseph N Jones Born Saturday February 3rd 1945 at San Francisco CF Count Man midwife Institution Civil Register Book of Register Date of Baptism Minister Church of Baptism Complementary names God father God mother Sacramental Book Insert File link Create document Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic album Connection to a Data Source Figure 32 Update of the data about birth and Baptism During the entry of Obstetrician Officiant Godfather and Godmother the system asks if that Individual is in the Database in which case the search is made on it in order for collocate him her in its place General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Information about the Marriages or conjugal unions Various information in relation to the Marriages or conjugal unions Every Individual can have up to eight of them The free information is ASCII text Limited to 1000 characters Creating digital links See 7 8 4 Src Information of the marriage of Joseph N Jones with Marlyn G Tho
330. rnames Middle Initials or the Places of Death as well as normalizing the texts eliminating the superfluous characters General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 8 15 Life span Graph From the Function of Statistics See 8 12 from the List of Ancestors See 8 3 the Descendants List See 8 7 as well as from any List of Individuals See 7 6 6 you can activate the Life span of the Graph selected set of Individuals The report has the following Aspect Life span graph Javier T Moore 1770 1838 clic to see his her panel There were 38 individuals alive in 1842 with date of birth and or death in the original individuals list 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 Peter B Moore 1720 t1755 John Walker 1722 1785 ee Ee Stella Dean 1730 71801 Oo pamaaanananonan nonnen nnan Feliciana Kim 1730 t1794 aa ee ee Jefferson John R Moore 1748 t1790 ee ee ee ee John White 1749 t1792 Sj Se eee Marjory Torrente 1752 41810 DE ay pros ees ce eee Ignacio R Walker 1754 1801 i mm Marjory Walker 1758 1814 EE PS eg ees ee ee ees Javier T Moore 1770 t1838 e ee ee ee ee Vicenta Weaver 1774 1836 a a SS ee ee ee Anant B Wa Kc a EER E EA EE RE GED oases acs ara Folda a OO eee inmaculada Foster 1782 t1854 raion eR nn John Jones 1790 1850 gs a a ey cee ee ee Ariana Gordon 21795 1864 a ee ee GS eee ee ee ee ce Jes s M
331. rnames of an individual sseeeeeeessesesssssssseseeeereeesees 108 Figure 56 Descendant Tree between two Individuals ec cceceneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 109 Figure 57 Preferences of the Descendant Tree cccccceeceeccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 110 Figure 58 The familiar relation between two individuals cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 111 Figure 59 Preferences of the Relation between two Individuals eseeeeeeeeees 113 Figure 60 Preparation Of Statis UCS arie ierra eine ee 114 Figure 61 Statistical Analysis of the Database ccccccccccceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 115 Fiere 02 Searc MOr E Vents eraren in iaa E E E E 117 Figure 63 Analysis of Names Surnames and places of birth and death 00 0 118 Feo ots Lie Span Orap res acct E E wadoveadieienananelomevaditeaeds 119 Fiore 03 Number OF Alive Gra oe a E E 120 Figure 66 Access to the Photos and Documents Album from the icons bar 124 Figure 67 Access to the Photos and Documents Album from the menu 124 Figure 68 Access to the Photos and Documents Album from What can I do now 125 Figure 69 The Photos and Documents Album cccceeececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 125 Figure 70 Alphabetical list of Titles of Images cccccccecccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 131 Figure 71 Alphabetical list of texts in Rectangles of Images i eeeeeeeee
332. ro Chacon Spanish mathematician writes the Compendium with the opinion of Lilius Clavius supported and it gets to the 14 of September of 1580 when the reform is approved for bring it to the practice in October of 1582 At Thursday Julian 4th of October of 1582 follows Friday Gregorian 15th of October of 1582 Ten days disappear because they had been counted incorrectly in the Julian Calendar The Calendar was adopted immediately in the Countries where the Roman Catholic Church had influence However in Countries that did not follow the Catholic doctrine such as the Protestant Anglican Orthodox and others this Calendar was not implemented up to several years or centuries after In spite of that the Gregorian Calendar is the official the Orthodox churches except the of Finland still use the Julian Calendar or modifications of it different to the Gregorian Calendar Implantation of the Gregorian Calendar in the time Year 1582 e Italy Portugal the catholic zone of Poland and Spain European possessions and Canary Islands after Thursday 4th of October of 1582 came Friday 15th of October e France Lorraine and the Mississippi Valley USA after Sunday 9th of December of 1582 came Monday 20th December e The Netherlands Brabant Zeeland and the Staten Generaal after Monday 17th of December of 1582 came Tuesday 28th December e Belgium Limburg and South provinces after Thursday 20th of December of 1582 came Friday 31 of De
333. rope the 7 of November General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Excerpt from Wikipedia 21 8 2 Julian Calendar Julian Calendar The Julian Calendar is the predecessor of the Gregorian Calendar based in the movement of the sun for measuring the time From its introduction in 46 bC was gradually adopted in the European Countries and their colonies up to the introduction of the Gregorian reform of the Pope in 1582 However in the Countries of orthodox religion remained up to the beginning of the twentieth century in Bulgaria up to 1917 in Russia up to 1918 in Romania up to 1919 and in Greece up to 1923 In spite of that in the Gregorian Calendar is the official in their Countries today except in the Orthodox churches except of Finland that still use the Julian Calendar or modifications of it different to the Gregorian Calendar Background Originally in many ancient cultures used the Lunar Calendar for counting the time The oldest historical evidence indicate that the First Solar Calendar was created in the Ancient Egypt at the beginning of the third millennium bC emerged from the need of accurately predicting the time of the onset of the flood of the River Nile which was annual and a major event in a farming society living This Calendar was of a year of 365 days divided in three seasons months of 30 days and deans of ten days The early Romans had different lunar Calendars everyone with its own number of mo
334. roperties Close Figure 92 Acceding the properties of a Photo or Document Contains information on the properties of the Photo or Document file File name OMAR SHALL Devel O DEMO DB 0 EN DEMO1O IPG File date 16 07 2012 18 52 20 List of places aie Title of the image Width 930 pixels sine Height 634 pixels Individuals of the Database referenced in this image File size 143 331 bytes gt gt Maud Y Jones gt gt Mathilda A Jones Image date February 1978 Rodrigo A Jones gt gt sable W Jones gt gt Anshotle W Jones Rectangles with test in this image gt gt There i no rectangle with text included Thematic albums in which the image iz included Image not included in any thematic alburn Figure 93 The Properties of the Photo or Document Page 169 It is important to distinguish between Date of File and Date of Image While the Date of File is the date in which you created the file or entered in the Photos and Documents Album the Date of the Image is the date that the user has assigned to the Photo or Document i e the date that that photo or document was created This is the date that GDS uses for calculating the age of the Individuals listed in the photo or document and that has been identified with the addition of the rectangles General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 7 12 Treatment of the Photo or Document Update This chapter explains the various
335. ry book of register and sacramental book e Free space for introducing any information or link with any external file There are three methods to update the Data contained in this tab e Click the icon Update See 7 8 1 e Click on the menu What can I do now and after click on Add or change Data of the Surname xxxxx See 6 3 e Press the F2 key 7 3 10 Display Marriage or other unions The data shown in this tab all of it extracted from the Database are the following The Aspect may be somewhat different at the moment of having the Update option open Information the conjugal union between two individuals Civil marriage e Date place civil register and book of register Religious marriage e Date place church witnesses exemptions and sacramental book Articles of marriage e Date place notary and book of register Separation e Date of separation Type of union e Can be religious civil and religious civil de facto concubinage casual and doubtful event Pressing restart cleans the data Separation Page 59 e Can be Divorce Annulation or Separation Pressing restart cleans the data Free space for introducing any information or link with any external file There are three methods to update the Data contained in this tab You must initiate the update from the Individual Panel e Click the icon Update See 7 8 1 when in the Individual Panel e Click on the menu What can do now and after click o
336. s White Martin Thomson Garcia Martinez Clark Lee Lewis Walker Young Allen Hall Hernandez King Lopez Wright Adams Baker Carter Gonzalez Green Hill Mitchel Nelson Scott CP arank l Birthplaces 214 times San Francisco CF Vilanova i Gel Tei Toledo Vilanova i Geltr Buenos Aires Tarragona Alella Alella Barcelona Argentina Barcelona La Garriga Barcelona La Seu d Urgell Manises al Salamanca Tiana Vilanova y Gel Alcoy Alicante Alella Barna Aranjuez Badalona Barna o Vilano Castell Burriac Cuart de Poblet Fuenrreal Hostalrich Logro o Manises al Manises Manresa Navacl s Oviedo Pamplona Paterna Reus Rialp Onna tl Countries of Birth 12 times United States Options of Names and Places Filtering Options Includes second surnames and place of death Texts as they appear in the database C Texts by removing prefixes and normalizing characters Run again with options Exit Does not include second surnames or places of Death Figure 63 Analysis of Names Surnames and places of birth and death Report of the number of Individuals with every one of the Names Surnames etc In the bottom right of the report the following Controls appear You can choose not to have in consideration the seconds Su
337. s thing that would not be official until it was adopted by Charlemagne However up to well into the modern age the way of referring to a particular day was alluding to the saint who was commemorated For Example it was very common to find expressions as we arrived to the day of St Froilan Origin of the name of Julian Calendar El name of Julian Calendar comes from the dictator Jules Caesar in honor to whom the name of July was first adopted and Julian after in order to designate the Calendar established during his consulate Origin of July and August The month of Quintilis was dedicated in honor of Jules Caesar in the year 44 adC and was named July at the initiative of Marco Antonio The month of Sextilis was dedicated to Augustus on the initiative of the Senate in the 23 adC and was called Augustus in English is now August To satisfy the vanity of Augustus the month dedicated in his honor began to last 31 days instead of the usual 30 in that time As a result February lost one day which was normal and after 30 days was 29 and in order not to have three months that had 31 days September passed to have 30 days instead of 31 October 31 November 30 and December 31 Implantation of the week In the year 321 AD the Emperor Constantine I the Great introduced the week of seven days copied of the Jewish lunar Calendar Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday and Saturday In addition decreed that Sunday dies sol
338. s 87 Ficure 40 NG SECM PARIS eurih ceine er oh E a aaa DE 88 Figure 41 Assignment Of Spouse sccscsss sisasinncasevsesdboasenassewses Hoawsecseiawses Uoaisareetawiea deawieced 89 Figure 42 Correcting the order Of a Spouse cccccccccsssseesseeceeeeeceaaeseeseceeeeesaaaaeneeeess 89 Figure 43 Ordering the siblings when some dates of birth are missing 06 90 Figure 44 The full Display of the Individual record cc ccccennnettteeeeeeeeeeeees 93 Fiure 45 The MtO MCCS ONS 2c ect ocho eateeces epeetcns E E anaes 95 Figure 46 The Analysis of consanguinity of Ancestors cceeeccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 97 Figure 47 The Graphic Of ANCEStOTS esssiccsscseseecatcetoucenesenddatseasrevaswncaveeieckauneenssancasess 98 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Figure 48 Preferences of the Graphic of Ancestors ccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 99 Figure 49 The Side Graphic of ANCeStOrS oeren aie a aa 100 Figure 50 Preferences of the Side Graphic of Ancestors seeeeessssssssssssssssseeerreresees 102 Froure ske The IistCof CeSCemG ants ais snsts wisineastaedetone tues susie say aaiteactonadnenruewenuaaeasaae 103 Fico Se The Descendants Grap Mienie a E E E ES 104 Figure 53 The Options of the Descendants Graph seseeeeeeeesessssssssssssssseeeereresees 105 Figure 54 The Analysis Ol SUIMAINES oserei na o REE E 107 Figure 55 The origin of the Su
339. s OF Names cecce cu need General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 1 Welcome We welcome you to the General family Documentation System GDS created for your use and hoping that you will enjoy it for many years As you will see in the various chapters in this manual GDS contains a large amount of functionality but at the same time it s easy of use and is very intuitive The idea is that a not specialized user in IT be able to introduce all his her information available about Individuals families his her Photos and Documents and the relationships between them Also the possibility to access to the information as well as obtain it in a way that would be impossible to be made manually as very sophisticated graphs albums of Photos and Documents both from Individuals events objects or contracts provided of a chronological manner Furthermore from GDS you will be able to send detailed and graphical information linking it to your own E mail system You may also obtain printed formats of high quality in very large format if this is your desire Additionally you can create your own website with the network of Individuals of your Database GDS has been developing since 1988 in its first versions for MS DOS up to the current Version 7 0 for Windows XP Vista and 7 having developed more of 200 releases which are the result of the comments suggestions and detection of anomalies coming from us and a number of our users
340. s can be expressed as uncertainty on days months or years Every one of them is incompatible with the others Later the uncertainty between two complete days is shown The alternative field is not considered to describe the date Between two days Page 225 The second primary separators value is 1 to 9 expressing the difference between the first day and the second Example 23 1241967 signifies December between 23 and 27 1967 Can also be expressed as 12 23 27 1967 When the month jumps to the next the expression adds a month also Example 30 1191967 signifies between the 30th of November of 1967 and 8th of December 1967 Between two months The second primary separators value is M Then dd does not express the day but the second month There is no possibility to express a day Example 05 04M1967 signify April May 1967 Between two years The second primary separators value is Y Then dd does not express the day but the two last digits of the second year There is no possibility to express a day or a month Example 68 00Y1967 signifies between 1967 and 1968 Before Christ lf the date is before Christ the second primary separator value is A Example 12 03A0056 signifies the March 12th 56 b C Century To express the century only the second primary separators value is B for centuries before Christ and D for centuries of our era Then aaaa maintains the first year of the century Example 00 00B 0500 si
341. s later they decided to do a drastical change to arrive to normal Thursday Ist of March of 1753 came after of Wednesday 17 of February Year 1867 e Alaska October of 1867 when Alaska becomes a Federal entity of the United States Year 1873 e Japan Before they used an own lunar Calendar Year 1875 e Egypt Year 1912 6 1929 e China Before they used an own lunar Calendar There is no consensus whether the change was made in 1912 or in 1929 In Hong Kong the lunar Calendar was used up to recent times Very difficult to translate to the Gregorian Calendar e Albania December of 1912 Year 1914 e Turkey up to the Ist of January of 1914 others say up to 1927 due to the reforms to Occident of Mustafa Kemal Atatiirk Turkey was managed before by an Islamic Calendar Year 1916 e Bulgaria the 14th of April of 1916 came after of the 31th of March Year 1918 e Russia and Estonia Thursday 14th of February of 1918 came after of Wednesday 31th of January Other zones of the Soviet Union changed two years later Year 1919 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 e Romania and Yugoslavia Monday 14th of April of 1919 came after Sunday 31th of March Year 1923 e Greece Thursday Ist of March of 1923 came after of the 15 of February Duration of the Gregorian year The Gregorian Calendar distinguishes between e Common year the of 365 days e Leap year the of 366 days e Secular year the one finishing in 00
342. s of Photos and Documents Album e G A file named ALBUM TIT created and maintained by GDS Automatically This file retains the data needed for the search for Titles e H A file named ALBUM2 PIE created and maintained by GDS Automatically This file retains the data needed for the search of the texts of the rectangles of the Photos and Documents Note the user should not attempt to operate or maintain any of the files mentioned here GDS is in charge of creating them and keeps them updated Any management by the user may create an undesirable effect to the operation of GDS If for any circumstance any of the files were modified or destroyed GDS detects it at time of start in which case tries to reconstruct all the operation files automatically If you suspect such a thing could have happened and GDS not detected it go to the menu Photos and Documents Album Rebuild the Photos and Documents album and all the files will be rebuilt with the exception of the ALBUM SUB and the FBS As the number of files in the Photos and Documents album can be very large the function of recreation of the aloum may take a few minutes Page 123 9 2 The panel of the Photos and Documents Album The panel of Photos and Documents Album can be opened by any of the following 4 methods By clicking on the corresponding icon of the icons bar File Individuals Equrvalencies Photos and Documents Data Sources Surnames What can do now WAA A Photo and Docume
343. s of control of individuals that the user has declared that they are not duplicated during the function of Integration of two Individuals GDS5 WRFF File of follow up of Actions pending of Analysis of integration of individuals Workflow Optional file If it exists there is only one Sequential Access by twins of numbers of control of individuals that are pending of Analysis of integration as a result of previous integrations of individuals GDS5 EQU File of equivalent Names Optional file If it exists there is only one Sequential Access by groups of Names or Surnames that are equivalent Image files The Database Directory maintains as many Photos and Documents as you want The supported formats in this Version are the formats BMP JPG JPEG PNG ICO GIF PDF TIF and TIFF GDS can read these formats but if you introduce a new Photo or Document from GDS this will be created in the JPG format if it is a single page document or PDF and TIF if it is a multipage document GDS creates automatically an IF2 file associated to every BMP JPG JPEG PNG ICO GIF PDF TIF or TIFF file that is present in the Database Directory Moreover GDS maintains the ALBUM2 FOT file that controls the order of the Photos and Documents as well as those files having one or more rectangles that link to Individuals of the Database Other files of the Database Any file that had an associated application in Windows can be included into the GDS Database
344. s of the Title Hain Fort Secondary Font Restore Apply Number of Control _ Pesto Show the Control Number Accept lace Figure 57 Preferences of the Descendant Tree General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 8 11 Family relation between two Individuals This graph shows the existing family relation between two referenced Individuals and is presented in a way that can be printed stored in a PDF or TIF file or sent by e mail AET Do not show Preferences E mit Images See for printer fo common ancestors to these fo individuals have been found However they are refated through one conjugal relation relating two families E Joseph N Jones 1945 His her parents s Augus M Jones 190771988 Marin B Johnson 1914 t2008 BS ert August N Jones 1941 gt Her spouse Family change Mita R Carter 1936 EzequielS Carter xx 794x Hisvher parents Peyton Carter Ariana Frazier Ci WS S Mikel S Carter 1902 71992 Hisiher daughter Mayra R Carter Figure 58 The familiar relation between two individuals Page 111 Clicking Preferences you can change the characteristics of the graphic Optionally the user can choose to show or not the Photo of the Individuals of the family chain Placing the mouse over a picture of an Individual and clicking with the left button the Panel of this Individual appears GDS seeks the relation between tw
345. s panel maintains one explanation of the specific function It is the recommended way of Starting the integration Usually starts when you click on Individuals Potentially duplicated Page 249 List of the 25 Individuals potentially duplicated in the Database Fo Search this text Foster Jack Jack Margaret i Female Margaret i Female Isidro i Male zidro i Male Figure 148 List of potentially duplicated Individuals The Individuals Potentially duplicated appear in groups of two or more Individuals Pointing with the mouse two of them the Control of Integration get activated List of the 25 Individuals potentially duplicated in the Database F5 Search this text i Middle Initial Birth date Birthplace Death date OOOF FH Foster We Davis Male 000784 Foster Y i Male E avis EA a E VEO 000758 Margaret i Female Margaret i Female Prepare e mail Chart number of alive Lite pan graph Statistics Integrate twa Individuals Figure 149 Select two duplicated Individuals and call to the Analysis Pressing Control on the two of Integrating Individuals appears the Panel of Analysis See next section General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 13 4 3 Panel of Analysis of two Individuals potentially duplicated This is the panel of Analysis where the integration of the two potentially duplicated Individuals is performed Field Individual 745 Da
346. scade e Mosaic General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 e Previous window e Next window e Close window e Minimize inactive windows e Restore minimized windows e Close all windows but the active Individual e Close all windows e Last advanced Individual selection e The last Individuals selected Image Available only when viewing the display of a Photo or Document For the explanation about every one of these functions see Display Photo or Document 9 7 1 e Zoom e Change the full screen option e Full Screen e Fitton Screen e Fit on width e Print e Update e Assign to Panel of Individual e Delete e Crop e Assign this page to the thumbnail of this document e Send an E mail with this image e Export the image to an external folder or external disk e Properties e Close Help e Help Index See 6 e About GDS e GDS Manual Opens this manual in PDF format It requires Adobe Reader Internet e Send an E mail See 15 7 e Create a Web See 15 3 The web of Marshall System Send an E mail to Marshall System See 15 7 Send a copy of the Database files to Marshall System See 15 6 Friend webs Abbreviations and Signs Displays the list of abbreviations and signs used commonly by the Professionals of the Genealogy Page 49 5 6 2 The dynamic icons bar Buttons The icons bar displays the active icons of the most important functions The reason of the existence of this bar is t
347. sccs oscar caster a 233 Froure 135 Choosing th fields to Export s ccs sien testeedderenss tea es aeioteuans 234 Figure 136 Export Options to a text or Excel file ec ccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 235 Fiure 37 Importo GEDCOM Hle essin r atte aueis 238 Figure 138 Initial Panel of Import of a GEDCOM file eeeeeeeeeeessessssssssssssseeereeesses 238 Figure 139 Export toa GEDCOM MG secrenciani a ET 240 Figure 140 Warning during the Export to a GEDCOM file eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 241 Figure 141 Selection of the fields to Export to a GEDCOM file eeeeeee 242 Figure 142 Panel of Export Options to a GEDCOM file eeeeeeeeessessssssssssssseerrreesees 243 Figure 143 The destinations of the GEDCOM file ssssssnnnenesssssssseerssssssssseerrsssssssses 244 Figure 144 Search of Individuals potentially duplicated 1 ececcceeeeeeeeeeeeees 247 Figure 145 Search of Individuals potentially duplicated 2 ceccceceeeeeeeeseeeees 248 Figure 146 Search of Individuals potentially duplicated 3 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 249 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Figure 147 Panel of integration of two individuals cceeccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 249 Figure 148 List of potentially duplicated Individuals 2 0 0 ceesneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 250 Figure 149 Select two duplicated Individuals and call to the Analysis 250 Figure 150 Panel of Analysis of integration of duplicate
348. so itis a safe operation Directory folder where to place the new Database E c Output Directory folder EJEA E3 Program Files 86 Description of the Data Directory optional Selection of individuals to export to a new GOS Database Select individuals Additional exports ff Export surname information ff Export files linked in the information and photographs of individuals W Export source information files Images W Export images f Only the photo in the person panel of the selected individuals All the photos with links of the selected individuals Export Figure 155 Creation of a Partial Database Follow the Instructions to create a GDS Database that contains only the Individuals that you select in one or several iterations Although there are in duplicated Individuals in the iterations only one copy of each one is copied With the options expressed in the panel determine the type of information which you want to be exported to the new Database This action does not change anything of your Database and the new Database is placed in the Directory Folder of your choice Once you create the new Database you can access it by the natural process of Choosing a Database Directory Page 255 14 Printing of Reports or creation of PDF TIF or TXT files In this chapter you will find the description of the various options of printing and creation of files from the GDS Reports and Gr
349. story circumstances and changes over time When at the display of an Individual if he she holds it as surname a Surname tab appears to show it See in the Panel of the Individual the Information on the Surname At the same time you can work independenily with the same information from the Panel of Surnames To do this open the menu from the list of Surnames that have information and from it you can add remove or modify any Surname information Any variation to it is equivalent to the variation done from the panel of any Individual who had it as Surname To see the information of a Surname double click over the chosen one Last Hame JONES Eliminate the Surname 4dd new Surname Sed Information Information Figure 129 Information about Surnames When double clicking on the Surname its information appears General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Information about the Surname JONES Here you place all information and links relative to the Family name Jones Figure 130 Panel of information of a Surname Clicking on Update appears the Panel of update of the information of the Surname It has the same characteristics as if it had been made from the update of an Individual with this Surname Information about the Surname JONES Courier New Here you place all information and links relative to the Family name Jones Create document Create recording Create Photography Connection to a thematic album Connect
350. sure that gets all of them 4 6 Searching a Database Only for versions previous to Version 3 0 Find all the Databases previous to Version 3 0 in your computer This is of application only when you are installing GDS Version 7 0 and want to use the Database you created in one version prior to the Version 3 0 Do not use when you come from versions 3 0 4 0 5 0 or 6 0 since in those cases the Conversion is automatic See the next section 4 7 Migrating from previous versions GDS converts all of the Databases of previous versions Databases of Versions 1 0 2 0 V1 and 2 2 Versions MS DOS Not for Versions 3 0 4 0 5 0 and 6 0 Ask Marshall System to help you in the conversion Databases of Versions 3 0 and 4 0 Versions Windows For these versions the Conversion is complete because Version 7 0 is fully compatible with all the Databases built with them The Conversion is performed directly from any of them without need of intermediate steps At start GDS Version 7 0 detects that the Database is in Version 3 0 or 4 0 It alerts and performs the conversion After the conversion is done you cannot use the Version 3 0 or 4 0 anymore Databases built in versions 5 0 6 0 and previous releases of the Version 7 0 to the one you have installed GDS is fully compatible from any revision of the Versions 5 0 and 6 0 To use Version 7 0 it is required the acquisition of the migration from any previous version of GDS as yo
351. t 5 If I have a registered GDS database can use it on my desktop and the laptop at a time When registering a GDS database you have the right to use it on your desktop and your laptop When you copy the database to the new computer you should know that GDS must be installed in order to use the same database and have assigned the appropriate folder as Database Directory Please use the following recommendations when using GDS in more than one computer with the same database Always update one at a time and copy the full Database Directory to the second If you change the Database in both you will lose the synchronization and it will be very hard to have both Databases in sync To install your Database on the second computer proceed as follows 1 Copy the entire contents of your database from the first to the second 2 Install GDS in the second 3 Start GDS in the second and assign the directory of your newly created database 6 Currently have all my genealogical data entered into the program PAF 4 0 of the Mormons Is it possible to import information to GDS With your PAF program you can export a GEDCOM file Then you will import this file into GDS The GEDCOM Language is a standard language for the import and export genealogical data between genealogy programs However by its design it does not guarantee that all data is exportable or importable so it may be that some data that is contained in the PAF file will not appea
352. t To view a Photo or Document of the Photos and Documents Album click on any of the thumbnails contained in the browser The image will appear trying to occupy the maximum of the screen adjusting its size in consequence At the moment the Photo or Document is visible and gets the focus of the system the icons row gets the following scheme General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 sand Documents Data Sources Surnames Whatcanidonow Tools Window Image Figure 88 The icon bar of the Photos or Documents From these icons you can change the way in which you can see the Photo or Document Full Screen Apellidos D The First icon EM used to display the Photo or Document at Full Screen with a series of options e Real Size at 100 the Photo or Document is represented in its actual size in points If the Photo or Document has fewer points than the points of your screen then it does not fill completely the Screen and the empty space is the color defined in the User Options relative to the Photos and Documents See The background color 5 7 If the Photo or Document has more points than the screen whether horizontally vertically or at both sides it is not retouched and you will see only a portion of the image Pressing the left button of the mouse at any point of the Photo or Document without releasing it you can move the image at any Address with the purpose of displaying the desired portion e Fit to Scre
353. t GDS indicates the version and revision i e Revision 7 0 00 You see the Version Revision of your GDS in the Menu Help About GDS If you have installed a version revision that is previous than the one available proceed to the free download of the new review and install it This operation does not change the registration or your database which remains unchanged The system installed is compatible with the old and may have fixed the bug that happened to you B If your version matches that available on the Web simply follow the instructions GDS to send to Marshall System the indication of error We will attempt to correct it and tell you how to proceed The quality of GDS is based on the tremendous support that continually we receive from our users Just think that if there is an error Marshall System would appreciate a lot that you tell it to us We pride ourselves on responding quickly to any request thank and apologize for the inconvenience 16 What if I am wrong and I have introduced a person repeatedly Just kill the duplicated person in the database If there is data you want to keep move it to the Original person If you have already assigned links to the individual the person removing the system will ask if you agree to eliminate these links Other Individuals are not altered 17 Why every time I close GDS it alerts me to protect my database GDS does not save a copy of your data If you suffer a breakdown
354. t can do now The Preparation of Statistics panel appears Statistics and lists over the entire database Statistics of Names Last Names Places Search the individuals potentially repeated Statistics and lists of individuals based on selection from the Database Selection of individuals Statistics Mame Last Mame etc Partial Graph of Lives as per selected Graph number of people aliwe Figure 60 Preparation of Statistics Clicking in the Analysis of the Database GDS performs a full analysis of the Database providing the following information e Number of registers e Individuals without Name Surname and Middle Initial e Individuals without date and place of birth e Individuals without parents children or spouses assigned e Individuals without any links in the Database e Individuals whose surname does not match the surname of the father or whose second Surname does not match the first of the mother e Various Statistics about differences between average ages of men and women e Direct access to the list of Individuals Potentially duplicated e Access to the statistics of Names Surnames and places of birth and death General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 La Number of FeQleaters esennnuue 1234 Deleted registers 0 Registers Used nee eeenannanee 1234 Without Fi Without Without Middle Initial Without date of birth Without place of
355. t corner of the rectangle you want to extract under the face of the person on the right release the mouse button You will get an extract from the previous image This is a copy and the photo above is unchanged Notice that this picture contains the same title the same date and identifies the person correctly Step 2 Assign to a person panel Use the first method explained at the beginning of this section 12 How I can order photographs of the same date Upon completion of the update of data from a photograph GDS will detect if there are photos with an identical date In that case the photo album of the same date appears automatically Simply press the left mouse button on the photo you want to change places and without releasing the button move it where you want to be located releasing the button afterwards At the time the album is rearranged To exit simply click on Apply or close the panel 13 have placed a sibling in the wrong order How do I place it on the right place There are two cases That in the list of siblings all of them have date of birth In this case the siblings are automatically sorted when they are introduced them However if once introduced there is a change in the date of birth of one or more of them the system remains disordered until it starts again and GDS checks all lists of siblings If GDS finds an unordered list orders it automatically In any case the user can perform the c
356. t the disposal of the user for its update and qualification You will have to decide at the moment of starting the acquisition whether you want to make a single page or a multipage file If you decide to acquire a single page file it will be stored in the JPG format On the contrary if the document is saved as multipage you will choose between PDF or TIF format Clicking on Explore from xxx in the Photos and Documents Album GDS connects to the scanner or TWAIN device selected Once the operation of scanning is completed the scanner returns control to GDS appearing the Panel of acceptance of the scanned Photo From this panel you have some functions available and then accept or reject the Photo or Document If you accept the Photo or Document it is shown ready for Update See Display Photo or Document See 9 7 1 for details on how to update the Photo or Document The Photo or Document is automatically placed in the Photos and Documents Album in its proper place in the format JPG PDF or TIF as single or multipage file depending on the choice you made Automatically creates the IF2 file GDS associated with the Photo or Document See Database See 12 For the Treatment of Multipage Documents access Multipage Documents See 9 9 9 8 2 Specify scanner GDS supports the input from any TWAIN compatible device If you have installed more than a TWAIN device specify the chosen one from the main menu of GDS or from the Photos and Documents Album
357. t the width See 9 7 4 Ctrl F1 Help Index See 6 Right and Left Keys To visualize the next or previous Photo or Document of the photos of a given Photos and Documents Album Page Up and Page Down Keys To visualize the next or previous page in a multipage document Esc Close the active window Page 53 7 The Individual and the Individual network 7 1 The individual record GDS maintains one register for every Individual This is seen in the Individual Panel The Personal information Panel represents all the information of the Individual register as well as the links to the members of his her immediate family See Getting to the register of an Individual 7 6 12 Also from this panel you can generate the reports relative to this Individual 2 Joseph N Jones Personal information panel Full display Basic Inf Additional Inf Birth List of ancestors Joseph N Jones a Gender Male s Bom Saturday February 3rd 1945 at San Francisco CF Curent age 67 years old 1965 20 years old Graphic of ancestors Side Graphic I am the one that with this pseudonym hiding the true personality has developed GDS I have spent many hours of my time to the conception and development of the product you have in your hands If you want some fun go to the Additional Information tab Descendants Descendants Graph Sumamez Family relation Uncles Aunts Father Jon Poma M yee En Date of data 14
358. ta of the Individual First Name Surname Father Surname Mother Gender Basic text Titles and professions Date of last update Time last update Matches First Name Surname Father Surname Mother Gender Basic text Jack Jack Davis Davis Y Male Male Free format data Free format data Jan G Davis 778 Margaret A Douglass 779 Roberto G Davis 744 Marjory F Young 745 Maria C Davis 748 Roberto C Davis 752 Jack C Davis 753 xabier C Davis 754 Adrian C Davis 755 Ronald C Davis 756 Purificaci n Y Stevens 747 11 47 2012 14 7 2012 7 59 36 9 05 02 Discrepancies Decide Exist in 1 but not in 2 From 1 to 2 Father Time last update mma aa Ele Individual 2 781 Comparison Eyplanation t a a eee Equals Please note these two Equals individuals have Equals common ancestors Equals Equals Unequals Unequals In 1 not in 2 In 1 not in 2 Unequals Unequals See both individuals See the relationship Exist in 2 but not in 1 From 2 to 1 between the two Declares that these two individuals are not repeated Execute Exit Figure 150 Panel of Analysis of integration of duplicated Individuals From this panel you can see the two Individuals see if they have family relation effectively stating that they are not duplicated or run out of the integration The four tables below indicate the data that are identical in t
359. tabase containing the text indicatet by the new text ou can also delete existing text in the space of any tab with the exception of the tabs Additional Int and Surrane Inf fou should be aware that the process is imeversible and therefore tin doubt make a backup of the Database before proceeding M Name Change rom w Last Name change from to Change Location from to Change Country from to Clear Tert Figure 196 Massive changes of Texts General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 As an example in the Figure below shows that we wanted to change the text Penelope by Penny The system has found 12 Individuals with this name but has not found any Individual with the text Penny If accepted the system will change the individuals found leaving the others unchanged Therefore as of that time there will be 12 Individuals with the name Penny and none with the name Penelope Massive change of texts 1234 individuals From this form you can change a name surname place of birth or death or Country in all the chosen records of the Database containing the text indicatet by the new test ou can also delete existing text in the space of any tab with the exception of the tabs Additional Int and Surname Inf Tou should be aware that the process is meversible and therefore if in doubt make a backup of the Database before proceeding M Mame Change Penelope Last
360. tain the original size of 1072 x 722 To resize the image to the following size Fits in a window of 640 x 480 Fits ina window of 800 x 600 C Fits in a window of 1024 x 768 Accept Cancel 2 Figure 177 Reducing the image size before sending it by E mail From this panel you choose the option of maintaining or not the original size of the file to be sent by E mail When the files are very large the transmission time can be too long to be practical as well as the fact that some servers do not allow sending too long attached files Choosing to reduce the size of the file makes the transmission time more adequate but you have to consider the fact that you may lose quality if you choose to reduce the file too much See the chapter Sending an E mail with the Photo or Document attached 5 2 1 and Selection of multiple Photos and Documents 9 4 4 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 15 3 Creating a Web with your Database GDS can create a set of files that will compose a web of your Database or part of it The user will be able to locate the created files in a web server assigning an adequate URL address that will be the entry point of the web With the options available during the creation of the web the user can choose the Individuals who will be included as other specific options The process of creation of the web has several phases The access is done from the menu Internet Create a Web image Hel
361. take a few seconds in the end When finished and in the case it finds individuals who match of these conditions it shows the following intermittent message in the icons bar This action can be inhibited from the Options menu Have notice of anniversaries Click here to view the notice You can click on it at any time and the following figure is shown Page 31 Aniversaries Today is the aniversary of Clic on a name to see his her panel ANIVEISanes Melissa M Taylor 65 years old Ronald G Thomas 58 years old Weddings Ashton C Anderson 40 Civil wedding aniversa Maud Lawrence 40 Civil wedding aniversary W Show at start More options Exit Figure 5 Notice on Anniversaries Clicking on any Individual in the list the Individual Panel is shown Clicking the More Options control appears Function of Search of Events see 8 13 witha more thorough analysis of the anniversary including births baptisms marriages and deaths and onomastics This panel can be disabled from appearing at the beginning of the program But you can always reactivate it directly from the screen or from the menu Tools User Options See 5 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 4 3 Cold Start Starting GDS Thanks for using the General Family Documentation system GOS The first activity that you will hawe to perorm is to assign the Database Director The Database Directory is where GOS wi
362. tal Camera or from any other folder of the system Select a real or virtual disk drive and then to the folder that contains the documents that you want to import to GDS Then select one several or all the documents using the Shift andor Ctrl keys ou can also use the control of Select all documents or Clean the selection Once accepted GDS will copy these documents and warrant that the name of the files will not be duplicated creating new manes as necessary The documents will be copied to GDS Photo and Document Album and will be accessible as not classified images for your update of title date rectangles Etc 5 d D ades 107 0712 JPG Select all documents Sq 4 ca emporal Fotos 2 UF UST Clean the FJ Album Mure foto elie OF 09 2 JPG selection Gabriela 1 JPG IMGO02 70 201 20713 2254 jpg la foto 1 JPG la foto 2 PG la foto JPG There exist 17 documents in this folder that can be ultimes fotos Abril Pol pdf selected for import to GDS You have selected one document to be imported to GDS Import to GOS Cancel import Figure 120 Importing one or more Photos from another folder When you accept the import one by one GDS copy the Photos and Documents selected to the Data Directory and creates the additional files of control automatically The initial Photos and Documents remain unchanged At introduction the Photos and Documents do not have any assigned date nor Title nor associated
363. tangle go to Remove a rectangle of the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 6 Assignment of a text to a rectangle of the Photo or Document You can describe the Photo or Document in rectangles This See Assign a text to a rectangle of the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 5 Creation of a Word document associated with the Photo or Document You can associate a document created directly from GDS This document will be permanently associated and accessible from the own Photo or Document See Create a Word document associated to the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 8 Set the address of the photo Pressing in the controls accessed address to the panel of Assignment of addresses See 21 3 The photo is thus associated to the place where it has been made and can connect with Google Maps General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Creation of a Voice recording associated with the Photo or Document You can associate a Voice recording to the Photo or Document created directly from GDS This recording will be permanently accessible from the own Photo or Document See Create a voice record associated to the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 9 Crop a rectangle from the Photo or Document New partial photo You can extract a rectangular portion of the Photo or Document GDS creates a new file with its associated files preserving the coherence of Title date and associated rectangles that correspond to the Photo or Document original S
364. te and will meet with the same situation you had with the last copy of your Database General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 19 Moving GDS to a new PC 19 1 Moving GDS to a new PC To move GDS do the following operations e A Copy ALL the files of your Database Directory to a safe place For example a CD ROM a removable disk or a memory stick The name of the Database Directory is the one that appears in the lower left corner when GDS is working and should not be confused with the Directory of Programs where the GDS is installed e B Create a new directory Folder in your new PC It is not necessary that the name be the same as the one you have in the old computer e C Copy ALL the files copied in the section A to this new directory e D Access the web www gdsystem net from the new PC and download the latest revision of GDS Execute the downloaded file This will install the new GDS in your system Make sure the version you download is the right version For example if you have the review 7 0 00 check that you download Version 7 with an equal or higher number or revision Should you do not have Internet connection in one of the computers you can download GDS in another computer and copy the file downloaded to the new and execute it The file downloaded is the installer that can be moved to anywhere for installation e E GDS will ask you to assign the Database Directory Assign the one you created in paragraph B
365. ted images It will open the window of Assignment of Dates The date set shall apply to all the Photos and Documents selected The date is shown after the Title in the blue margin on top of the window of the Photo or Document e Assign address This opens the dialog of the Address Assignment belonging to the Photo or Document See Addresses and Maps 21 3 and Entering Addresses 21 4 This will allow viewing through a link to Google Maps the location map of the Photos and Documents e Assign these images to a theme of the thematic album This opens the dialogue of Assignment to a Thematic Album See the Thematic Albums 9 3 4 Page 147 Export images e Export images to a different folder or external disk In the export of Photos and Documents the user chooses the Directory Folder in which wants he she the Photos and Documents selected to be exported GDS introduces a prefix to the names of the Photos and Documents exported so that 1 It guarantees not to overwrite any existing file and 2 Preserves the chronological order of the files that existed in the Photos and Documents Album giving names of file with sequential prefixes The Original name of the file is retained after of the prefix E d Dades Double click ower the selected folder Al Windows AFls FJApli JJ Arbol JJ Archivos_pet_de Outlook _ Arey BlackBerry Dades per aval Un Laser dbd93bd66561 91 92b568bd7 4 Del escritora del ordenador Sol Folder where we
366. tents and update of Photos and Documents go to Contents of a Photo or Document See 9 7 2 and a Treatment of the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 9 10 Advanced functions of the Photos and Documents Album This chapter describes the Advanced functions of the Photos and Documents Album Index of this chapter 9 10 1 Specials 9 10 2 Advanced search of Individuals in Photos and Documents General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 10 1 Specials Pressing the Control Specials of the Photos and Documents Album you will access three functions that modify the information of anumber of Photos and Documents by special conditions Assignment of rectangles to Database substitution of its text or substitution of the text of Titles Recommendations From this panel three functions can be made of massive change of data in Photos or Documents of the Database Change of the Titles of Photos or Documents having a given Assignment of rectangles to Database Text by another of your election Change of given Texts of rectangles in Images by a different To assign all the rectangles that were assigned as text to a Test person Who Was not in the Database but hershe hat been Finally assign to an Individual of the Database the rectangles introduced that have a given Test as if this assignation had been done te since the beginning In this case the modified Images go directly This function associates a given text existing in
367. ter 594 in the field of High 3 Click OK three times as a response to the three panels of CutePDF that appear subsequently Page 267 You ll see the printing panel with the desired printing data Output option to printer POF or TIF 6 Output to printer Qutputto TIF Output to POF Printer Copies First Name CutePDF Writer copies j H Where CPi Orientation Choose Printer Portrait Ls Paper size Milimeters and quality A Landscape A2 420 4594 mm Width 420 Height 594 Descendants of Joseph N Jones and Marilyn G Thomas Quality of 600 dots per inch Format of choice Printer preferences Columns Rows Printer margins in millimeters 1 0 39 Force oom t a Force Z ee M Top m Force Zoom Max Zoom 30 2 Right fi Down f P IE C Dimensions of report 4188598 millimeters Pages to print Number of pages f Print all fi From fi i fi Frint Cancel Figure 167 Ready for print with the CutePDF Virtual Printer Check that the number of pages is 1 If not force it lowering the rows or columns section of Format of choice Clicking on Print the File is generated You will be asked for the name of the file and the Folder you want it to be stored Guardar en r MARSHALL e l ct Eg Momir E GDS_KeyGenerator v7 14 01 2011 11 45 GDS Versi Xavi 14 01 2011 11 45 GDS70_Proves_loaquim 14 01
368. that GDS will modify several Individuals at the time It is your responsibility to ensure that you choose the right set of Individuals Pressing on Link to Multiple Individuals GDS will let you choose a set of options on the Individuals to be made the link Once on the election is done GDS will place in the first place of the basic text of the Individual the link to this Data Source displacing the existing contents of the quoted text to the right The system will optionally allow entering a text to the left and another to the right of the link for better identification of the cause and origin of the link Note This action is especially useful in the case of integration of Databases If the Database that you are about to integrate with the current one comes from a given source you can connect all Individuals of this Database to that Data Source before proceeding to the integration This way all the incorporated Individuals of your Database will be identified as coming from a particular source See Integration of two GDS Databases 13 1 Link to multiple Individuals from the Import of a GEDCOM file At the moment of proceeding to the import of a GEDCOM file there exists the possibility of connecting all the imported Individuals with a Data Source that is generated automatically during the import function See Export to a GEDCOM file See 13 3 3 Page 213 11 The Panel of Surnames Any Surname can be associated to its description Its hi
369. the Database but is referenced in an unlimited number of folders of the Thematic Aloum To Remove a Photo or Document of a thematic album does not mean to delete the file but only the reference to it in the thematic tree The operation of Thematic Albums is therefore independent of the rest of operations performed with the Photos and Documents Album GDS also maintains dynamically the alphabetical list of the Themes This list can be seen in the right window of the panel The access to the Albums is equivalent such as described in the following section CUMENT ALBUM O t Thematic albums Alphabetical list of themes Thematic index Search 33 gt RF g Astronomy 1 Portraits 17 scenda in e B Children 4 stronarny ri i ni Children 4 at Portraits oen Portraits 17 Tourism 5 Figure 72 The structure of the Thematic trees Display of the Photos and Documents of a Thematic Album Click with the mouse on the album you want to view It appears the browser or the Photo if there is only one with all the Photos and Documents of this album The Photos and Documents appear in the browser in chronological order Treatment of Themes e Add Subtheme A new theme is added as Subtheme of the selected one e Remove Theme This Theme is deleted and in consequence the references to the Photos and Documents that were under him are lost This does NOT mean the removal of the Photos and Documents of the album It only ref
370. the following information The name of the file Zoom level of the current in percentage The X and Y position of the mouse Changing according to the movements of the mouse An icon of existence of a text document associated with the Photo or Document Appears when such a document exists An icon of existence of a file of voice associated with the Photo or Document Appears when there is such a file of voice If it is a PDF file an icon indicating it as explained above Clicking in it opens the Adobe Reader with this file Adobe Reader must be installed in the system An icon that indicates rectangles defined Clicking and holding the left button shows the rectangles An indicator of which there is an Address defined for this Photo or Document Pressing in this icon is connected with Google Maps and the position is shown in a map Action What to do with a Photo or Document We must distinguish between 1 actions of display and listen 2 actions of creation or update 3 submission by e mail and 4 print To act from this panel right click on the menu Image or press the right button of the mouse General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 when the mouse is over the Photo or Document You will see a drop down panel From this panel you can perform the following actions foom Change the Full screen option Full screen Ctrl Q Fit on Screen Ctrl Fit on Width Ctrl W Print Update Assign to Panel of individua
371. the order of a spouse Page 89 7 8 7 Placing siblings in their right order GDS orders the siblings chronologically by date of birth If in the list of siblings one or more of them have not indicated the date of birth GDS places a question mark to the right side of the indication of the list of siblings Clicking the question this picture shows up From this panel you can change the order in the list of siblings Observe that it may happen that not all of them come trom the same parents To change the order click the mouse without release and move it to the desired position Tou can do this operations repeatedly as many times as necessary until the desired order i in place To apply the changes click on the control named Proceed with the changes Daniel B Jones Pep B Jones Cornelia B Jones ania B Jones Remedios B Jones gt TETT EB J nner e es fC Proceed with the changes Restore initial values Figure 43 Ordering the siblings when some dates of birth are missing Using the mouse you can place them in order When you close the box GDS remakes the list as the user has indicated 7 8 8 Case of two lists of siblings Assigning the father or the mother of an Individual GDS puts him her in the proper order according to the date of birth If a sibling has no date of birth GDS asks to the user by the place where to be placed See 7 8 7 Placing siblings in their right order
372. the size of these files To see in detail the different tabs of other information go to Updating other Information See 7 8 2 7 3 5 Information about the Surname The data shown in this tab all of it extracted from the Database are the following Information about the First Surname Free space for introducing any information about the Surname of the Individual The information of Surname once introduced from the Panel of an individual will be used by all Individuals using the same Surname so it is common to all of them There are three methods to update the Data contained in this tab e Click the Update icon See 7 8 1 e Click on the menu What can I do now and after click on Add or change Data of the Surname xxxxx See 6 3 e Press the F2 key Note the Information about the Surname can be acceded and updated directly from the menu Surnames Any change done either from an Individual or from the menu is stored in the same Page 57 place 7 3 6 Information about education titles and professions The data shown in this tab all of it extracted from the Database are the following Information about the Titles and Professions of the individual Free space for the introduction of information or connect to any external file There are three methods to update the Data contained in this tab e Click the Update icon See 7 8 2 e Click on the menu What can I do now and after click on Modify Data of this Individual See 6 3
373. the system of connection which allows an unlimited number of individual documents and or shared between them forming a network with an easy access The Documents can be created with the editor normally used by the user Creation and maintenance of common information of the Surname for use of all the Surname Individuals who have that as their one Creation and maintenance of standardized information about Titles and Professions birth and baptism marriage or conjugal union will death and burial as well as personal data Automatic creation and maintenance of the Photos and Documents Album in such that to gradually introduce the Photos and Documents with their relevant data one thus creating a Database that will be accessed by individual Sorted by date by certain dates by title or for information in the own Photo or Document Function of Analysis and Statistics of the Database with the aim of knowing an important series of data as well as detect errors in the Introduction of data as per example duplicated names or other mistakes Import and export of GEDCOM files to communicate with any other program of Genealogy Maintenance of Data Sources and their connection with any information section of Individuals Maintenance of the information about the Surnames Export to a file of text with delimiters for use by other programs Example of Microsoft Excel Integration of two GDS Databases Facilities for the identifica
374. tilingual system English Castilian and Catalan the only in the world for the treatment of two Surnames For the storage of persons of Spanish and Portuguese speaking naming convention compatible with the Anglo Saxon naming convention using the techniques so friendly and thoroughly explained by the founder of the Catalan Society of Genealogy Heraldry Sigilografia Vexillology and Nobility Hon Mr Armand de Fluvia i Escorsa in his publication In the recerca dels avantpassats In the search of our ancestors Manual of Genealogy GDS is being used is being used in Catalonia the rest of Page 331 Spain and all the Spanish speaking Americans Countries as well as by users in the United States There are users who starting in the first MS DOS versions have been updating their system up to the last version since have always ensured that any new Version or revision be compatible with the previous ones without losing the valuable Data that day after day year after year the users have introduced Personally have some 2700 Individuals in my Database as well as more than 19500 Photos and Documents I m continually introducing data photos and documents It is my intention to outline the most relevant features of GDS The reader can always go to my web page http www gdsystem net in which additional information can be found and if desired download the program as well as a DEMO Database to become familiar with the system The reader can cr
375. tion and link with external files Identification of Type of Union String of length 1 byte Not used Identification of Type of Separation String of length 1 byte Not used Last Update Date String of length 8 bytes Updated automatically Different format for before and after year 2000 Last Update Time String of length 10 bytes Updated automatically Reserved for expansion String length 100 TypeReg 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Marriage 1a8 TypeReg Integer of 2 bytes Value 100 Ctrl1 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to one of the spouses Ctrl2 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to the other spouse Date 0 String of length 10 bytes Date Civil Marriage See Internal dates format Date 1 String of length 10 bytes Date Religious Marriage See Internal dates format Date 2 String of length 10 bytes Date Marriage Chapters See Internal dates format Date 3 String of length 10 bytes Date of Separation See Internal dates format Date 4 a Date 9 String of length 10 bytes Not used Short Text 0 Strings of length 100 bytes Place Civil Marriage Short Text 1 Strings of length 100 bytes Civil Register Short Text 2 Strings of length 100 bytes Book of register Short Text 3 Strings of length 100 bytes Place Religious Marriage Short Text 4 Strings of length 100 bytes Church Religious Marriage Short Text 5 Strings of length 100 bytes First Witness Short T
376. tion of duplicated Individuals and guided integration for obtaining one single and consistent Database Creation of your own web from your Database Creation of the HTML page of an individual Sending photos and Reports both graphs as of Text by E mail Connection with your scanner or any TWAIN device Creation of multipage PDF or TIF files to communicate with other Individuals or create Reports of large size List of Individuals and its printing creation of a file or sending by E mail with classification options and choosing the information to include Support of the Julian and Gregorian Calendars Indication of the anniversaries of birth baptism marriages and death both of today as per request of a range of dates Massive changes of texts in the name Surnames and places and Countries of birth and death General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Function of equivalence of names Surnames and places of birth or Death Creation of GDS Databases subsets of the current Database Life span Graph by Periods of Time Chart of number alive for Periods of Time 1 4 System Requirements Hardware Requisites PC Compatible with minimum 512MB of main storage We recommend increased capacity of memory for the case of use of multiple Photos and Documents Video card that allows display with 1024x768 pixels minimum GDS works with 1024x768 pixels and any higher resolution Mouse D
377. tions of descendants who want to deploy See also User Options See 5 and subchapters To Print or create a TXT file both single page as multipage go to the bar icons Print To See the details of the printing options access Printing of Reports or creation of PDF TIF or TXT files See 14 and subchapters To send an e mail with an attached TXT file with the contents of this list go to the icons bar Send this report via E mail See Sending Reports by Internet 15 1 8 To see the details of configuration of the file to attach access Configure sending a Graph by E mail See 15 1 1 Page 103 8 8 Descendants Graph Graph of Descendants from an Individual It can be deployed up to a limit of 100 Generations f Children and One less One seal See for printer Do not show Preferences Exit grandchildren generation generation images Descendants of Joseph F Johnson and Monique F Wilson 4 Monique Johnson Wilson F 1883 11972 1889 T1954 Juli n Margaret nson Sullivan c D 1943 Figure 52 The Descendants Graph Pressing the key is equivalent to one more generation Pressing the key is the equivalent of one less generation Press 1 to 9 to obtain the graphic with 1 to 9 generations You can also inhibit the development of the descendants of certain Individuals developing only the maternal or paternal line as well as inhibiting Individuals with the function of Individuals to not develop in
378. tly associated with this Photo or Document and will be accessible from it and from this moment when the Photo or Document is visible this symbol appears in the bottom of it General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 7 12 10 Crop a rectangle from the Photo or Document New partial photo You can create a new Photo or Document consisting in a rectangle extracted from it GDS does all the work automatically giving a name to the file retaining the Title the date and the rectangles that exist in the area cropped from the original The original Photo or Document remains unchanged so this operation can be duplicated by drawing different rectangles of the same Photo or Document without damaging it Act the following way Moving the mouse on the Photo or Document press the right button of the mouse appearing a drop down window foom d Change the Full screen option Full screen Ctrl Q Fit on Screen Ctrl 5 Fit on Width Ctrl W Print Update Assign to Panel of individual Delete Crop Assign this page to the thumbnail of this document Send an e mail with this image Export the image to a different folder or external disk Properties Close Figure 107 Crop a Rectangle from a Photo Press on Crop As of this point move the mouse up to the upper left corner of the rectangle that you want to extract press the left button and without releasing it move the mouse up to compose the desired
379. to be changed when you change the version the system automatically detects that condition and converts it In this case the database converted to the new version cannot be used again with the previous version 10 have installed GDS on my home PC and also in the office the database is the same If work with in one of these how can work with the other By the time a database is registered you can copy it to another computer You agree that GDS is used only by one user at a time However if you maintain two databases one must take care not to add or update data simultaneously since in doing so the subsequent synchronization will be impossible Our recommendation is to keep data in one of them and on a regular basis copy them to the other In other words you better keep a database master and another slave 11 How I can assign a photo to the panel of a person There are two methods to assign a photo to one person panel First method The procedure is as follows Requirement That there is a photograph that has a rectangle assigned to the person you want to assign this photograph To assign a rectangle to a person see the question How do you assign a photo to the album of a person For example it may be a picture in which there are several appointees rectangles assigned to several people from the database and one such person is the person you want to assign the picture Open the photo Move the mouse to a location th
380. tomatically the number of resulting pages as well as the size of the document that at the end will have after collating all the pages Note that in the previous figures there is one difference between the single page printing to print in a multipage fashion In the case of a single page you can force the Zoom just for the case that you want to print multiple graphs of different sizes forcing the Zoom makes the dimension of the characters the same in all of them If you do not force the Zoom GDS will always try to use all the space of the page with the margins that the user imposes Also you can force margins in the Printer as well as indicate if you want to print out separators of pages lines of points for cutting and Indication of what is the number of the printed page as well as its column and row All these changes modify the size that the document will have once printed By this system you can make large panels with the graphs that the user has created You can hyde or show the Preview If you hyde it the process is faster Create a file In the case that you wish to create a file select the option PDF or TIF In this case the Panel shall be amended as in the Figure below m Output option to printer PDF or TIF Output to printer C Outputto TIF Output to PDF m Output to file PDF or TIF Destination folder D MARSHALL Devel70 DEMO DB 70_EN Output_PDF gt gt Name of the output PDF or TIF file m Orientation
381. u need a new License number The successive revisions of Version 7 0 free and do not require any further acquisition You can jump from one revision to another without installing intermediate revisions Accessing the web www gdsystem net and downloading and installing new revision the system automatically will be updated to the new revision This can be done as often as necessary due to the high frequency of announcement of new revisions with corrections and new functions from previous releases Thus the upgrade of one revision of the Version 7 0 to another is free See also Page 35 Installing GDS See 4 1 Searching a Database See 4 6 4 8 The GDS DEMO Marshall System provides a Demo Database along with GDS It is discharged and is installed directly from the Web www gdsystem net The contents is of 1234 Individuals and 35 photos The Demo Database will familiarize you with GDS It has no limitations other than the fact of that you cannot add individuals You can however update and perform all the other functions with the aim of helping understanding all the processes of GDS If it breaks do not worry reinstall it When your computer of erase it from the computer We recommend that the Demo Database be installed in the Directory C GDS DEMO DB 70_EN which is the default used when you install it Note All the Names of the Demo Database are fictitious However they maintain a coherent relation The Demo Database is taken
382. ual e Go to the section of the rectangle Extracting a Photo or Document See 9 7 12 10 and once this operation is done perform the operation described in the photo in the Panel of the Individual See 9 7 12 11 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 9 7 12 13 User Options relative to the Photos and Documents Accessing the menu Tools Options you access to the Panel of User Options From that panel access you can access to the specific options of the Photos and Documents and the Photos and Documents Album clicking on the following tabs Tab of Aspect TEI nm pes M JPG and TIF options Full screen images GDS start options Authorizations System Aspect Options Font for commands Font for individual panel labels Restore Font types Texts font color Fonts of the Image Rectangles Restore Font of the Print Display Restore Global Background color Restore Background colors Background color of images Restore Text Background color Background color of the Image Rectangles Background Color of fields under update Aspect of the thumbnaile of the Photo and Documents Album Aspect of the Thumbnails 3D Flat Accept Cancel Apply Figure 112 User Options Aspect From this window you can choose the background color of the not occupied portion of the screen when a Photo or Document is viewed in Full Screen Page 189 Tab of Full Screen Images JPG and TIF options
383. ugh it will suggest one in particular General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 Path of the web Specify the path of the Web Ds E3 d Dades ea Alex _ All Windows AP ls j Apli _ Arbol SJ Archivos_pet_de Outlook _ Arey BlackBerry _ Dades per aval On Laser dbd 936d 66561 1 B2b5bSbd 74 Del escritorio del ordenador Sal Dropbox Fiesta Centenario Jos Marna de Nadal Vilardage Formato word lGdsLAM GRAFICOS Instalador VMWare Player Investigacion y Ciencia YCE Jamaica 2007 _08 Junk Continue gt gt Cancel You will also be able to choose the color of the background image and other options Once the process is finished you will receive the following message Page 285 End of the process ah The Web with the title Web of Name M Surname has been build LP having created 5 files It is now your responsibility to move all these files created in the directory D TestWeb to your Web server For your information the page ts P4 htm Do you want to see your Web now Then you will be asked to send this information by E mail a a General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 15 5 Connecting to Internet If you write the name of a web page in any of the spaces of text of the Individual Panel GDS will connect directly to it just clicking in any place of the name Obviously the computer has to be conne
384. ument you want is opened 7 8 5 Assigning parents The Assignment of the Father or Mother is done by searching in the Database the corresponding Individual First GDS suggests the surname or the second surname or middle initial of the Individual as in the majority of the cases this is the one used In any case the user can change this surname if different from the suggested one Father August M Jones Unassign the parents Marilyn B Johnson Mother Kind of relation Legitimate Illegitimate Doubful legitimation C Adoptive C Legitimated Natural Recognized C Legitimated after subsequent marriage C Doubtful filiation C Multigeneration descendant via father s line C Multigeneration descendant via mother s line Figure 40 Assigning parents In the case of adding a number of siblings GDS asks to the user if he she wants to add a sibling with the same surnames to the already added If the user responds affirmatively the surnames surnames are already fixed and the assignment of parents is done automatically From this panel you can indicate the type of child The special case of multigenerational descendant refers to the case that we know that an Individual is a descendant of the other but not the entire genealogy is known so you can define this situation as multigenerational This results that in the Descendants Graph the two Individuals are not linked by a continuous line but are relate
385. umentation System GDS Version 7 0 6 4 Hot keys During the operation of GDS you can use the following direct accesses as the substitute of accessing by the menu or by other procedures The Function to be performed is the same whatever is the way you have accessed it The direct accesses are performed pressing two keys simultaneously Only certain functions have defined hot keys chosen for your use and convenience If you find they are useful for your use just remember the combinations of hot keys that interest you and forget the others Ctrl D Database Directory See 4 4 and 4 5 Ctrl E Display of Statistics See 8 12 Ctrl P Print See 14 and its subchapters also 9 7 13 F2 Activates the update of the Individual or of the update of the Photo or Document See 7 8 and 9 7 12 Ctrl B Search an Individual See 7 6 Ctrl Ins Add a new individual See 7 4 Ctrl F Photos and Documents Album See 9 and its subchapters Shift F1 Spanish See 5 9 Shift F2 Catalan See 5 9 Shift F3 English See 5 9 Ctrl M Mosaic Cirl A Previous window Ctrl F6 Next window Crtl F4 Close window Cirl C Cascade Cirl l Minimize all windows Cirl R Restore minimized windows Cirl N Close windows but the active Cirl T Close all windows Crtl L Last advanced selection of Individuals Ctrl Q Full Screen See 9 7 5 Ctrl S Adjust the size to fit the window See 9 7 4 Ctrl W Adjust the size to fi
386. untries and in the ISO8061 the first day is considered as Monday For America and for the Christian and Jewish religions the first day is Sunday Excerpt from Wikipedia 21 8 1 Gregorian Calendar History of the Gregorian Calendar The Gregorian reform was born of the necessity of carrying the practice one of the agreements of the Council of Trent the adjustment of the Calendar to delete the gap produced from a previous council the I Council of Nicea of 325 in which had been fixed the astral time to be held in the Easter and in relation to this the other religious mobile festivals What mattered then was the regularity of the liturgical Calendar for which it was necessary to introduce certain corrections in the civil In the background the problem was to adapt the civil Calendar to the tropic year The German Jesuit Christopher Clavius Along with Lilius was the most prominent member of the Commission of the Calendar The largest crater of the Moon has his name In the First Council of Nicaea determined that Easter were commemorated the Sunday General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 following the full moon after the spring equinox In the northern hemisphere and fall equinox in the Southern Hemisphere That year 325 the equinox had occurred the 21st of March but with the passage of time the date of the event had been advancing up to the point that in 1582 the gap was already of 10 days and the equinox was dated in
387. ve Its name occupy the same space occupied by your database on pour current disk begins with GOS Backup followed by the date and time in the form pear month day hour minutes seconds which The backups pou made before will not be erased To do that you must use the corresponds with the date and time of execution control Hemove old copy D Open the folder and see that there ts a subfolder with the name of your data directory While performing the copy you can not use GDS E Copy the entire folder to your work disk FI Open GOS and assign that folder as Data Directory G IF there is a folder with the same name in the work dosk means that it is the curent version In that case have the option to delete the folder or change its name to ren iove avoid confusion with which the one you copied Run Backup sea old i Backup rea E c Destination Disk Figure 193 Backup Panel Choose the disk in which you want to create your Backup and press on the Run Backup Control GDS will create a folder with indication of the date and hour of execution and with the name of the Database Directory in a subfolder containing all the files of it Thus you can keep as many Page 297 backups of your Database as desired To recover the Database follow the Instructions shown in the panel or see the instructions below Alternative way of safeguarding the Data If you do not want to use the Backup function described above
388. ve surname the comment is shown to facilitate your identification in the list Adams Mayra f Adams Buffalo NYY John f Adams Buffalo N Y Luisa Adams Buffalo NYY John Adams Arabella Bill Alexander Isidro Alexander New York NY Charles i Alexander New York NY Matea Allen Mirta f Allen Penelope Allen Jack Allen Marilyn Allen Aveline Allen John Carlos Allen Armold Allen Alfred Allen Carolyn Alvarez Lindsey Anderson Lidia Anderson November 1910 August Anderson Wednesday October 1st 1911 Jefferson John Anderson Monday September 17th 1915 Jestis Anderson Penelope Anderson Female Figure 23 The list of Individuals Selecting an Individual with the mouse and double clicking with the left button it goes to e In the case of search of Individual the Individual Panel See 7 2 e In the case of assignment of the father or of the mother Assigns this Individual as father or mother See 7 8 5 e In the case of assignment of the spouse Assigns that Individual as the spouse See 7 8 6 e In the case of assignment of a rectangle of a Photo or Document Assigns the specified Individual to the rectangle See 9 7 12 4 e In the case of search of family relations Signals this Individual as the one to be related to the already selected See 8 11 e In the case of List of Individuals from the Statistical Analysis of the Database the Individual Panel See 8 12 e In the case of Where is use
389. voice record or from the record of a relative A photo can be associated with a Microsoft Word and a file of voice etc GDS operates in English Castilian and Catalan The user defines the language with the touch of a couple of keys changing language without interrupting the execution About the author Joaquim M Casals de Nadal is an Electronics Engineer and B Sc Majoring in Computer sciences He has been part of the team of IBM in Spain the United States and the Manufacturing European HQs having developed between others appointments the General Management of the IBM Computers Plant in Valencia Spain the General Management of the Industry Sector for Spain and the Regional Management for Catalonia Aragon and the Balearic Islands having been a member of the Management Committee of IBM Spain Later he was General Manager of the Baan Co for Spain and Portugal CEO of company Tridion Spain and Portugal and General Manager of the Tectura Co for Spain At present his activity is mainly addressed as a private Business Consultant as well as Business Angel for newly created high technology companies in Spain The creation and development of GDS has been at any moment of his occupation an amateur hobby The author acknowledges the support of the many Individuals who have helped the development of GDS both with their reviews as for their suggestions a large number of which have been incorporated to the system over the years In particu
390. which case you can choose to delete an Individual in particular or maintain him her but do not to develop his her descendants Individuals can be highlighted in the graphic Images can be added to the graphic The graphic can be split by the right and or the left by placing a text with one arrow indicating that the graphic is truncated This operation can be done in several Generations at a time Pressing in Preferences you can change a great number of parameters as the characteristics of the fonts and display options of display the title and the signature of the graphic the format General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 of the dates etc Preferences Fonts of the Title Descendants ot Font First line Erase Joseph F Johnson and Monique F Wilson Font Second line Erase Text at bottom Author GDS Version 70 MARSHALL SYSTEM http aaa gdsyshe Font Test Bottom Left Erase W Show the frame Options for describing individuals Individuals to mark Mark Free Fant Contents of names I Prefix W First Name if Surmame Father i Sumame Mother Dates format M Show Dates i Simplified Complete Masimum length of titles Type the masimum number of characters of the titles to be shown fram 0 ta ZA o Font of Hame and Surnames Font names spouses Font of Dates Font of graphic to graphic aow Iw Suffix D Week da
391. with any external or internal file e The father mother children and the spouse or spouses e The siblings e The previous and posterior sibling of the same family if exists e One Individual photo chosen from all the photos of this Individual in the Photos and Documents Album See 9 7 11 11 and successive e The Number of Control which is the internal number assigned by GDS to the Individual at the moment of its addition in the Database It does not have any other value than to serve as identification in the Database but it does not have any relation with the network of Individuals e The date and time of the last update of the record e lf alist of ancestors has been solicited already from this or any other Individual of the Database the numbers of Sousa corresponding to this Individual in that list is shown assuming that this Individual is an ancestor of the one who has generated the list Also the generation or generations that this Individual is ancestor in the list is also shown See the Sousa system of numbering ancestors 2 1 From this tab there is access to the mentioned Individuals Father mother children siblings and spouses by direct relation Also from this tab there is access to the information of marriage or marriages There are two methods to update the Data contained in this tab e Click the icon Update See 9 7 12 e Click on the menu What can I do now and after click on Modify Data of this Individual See
392. with other updates of the same file This action links properly all the Individuals of the image to their Photos and Documents Album and automatically always in the chronologically right place To delete a rectangle of a Photo or Document go to the section Remove a rectangle of the Photo or Document See 9 7 12 6 Please note that in the Multipage Documents you can Assign rectangles in any of its pages See Display of a Photo or Document See 9 7 3 9 7 12 5 Assign a text to a rectangle of the Photo or Document In a Photo or Document you can define up to 1000 rectangles which may be attached to the Individuals of the Database or to texts that describe objects or other Individuals not contained in the Database To associate a text to a rectangle of the Database act as follows Show the Photo or Document Place it in update mode You can do this with four different ways 1 Press F2 or 2 Access to the icons bar and click on the Update icon or 3 Go to the menu What can I do now Update data of this image or 4 Press the right button of the mouse over the Photo or Document You will see a drop down window Then go to Update To the right of the Photo or Document will appear a set of controls for performing a set of functions Modify date Define rectangles Define rectangles of this image M Hema pressed General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 e Press on Define rectangles You wil
393. xt 2 Strings of length 100 bytes Book of Wills Short Text 3 Strings of length 100 bytes Codicils Will Short Text 4 a Short Text 15 Strings of length 100 bytes Not used Long Text String of length 1000 bytes free description and link with external files Identification of Type of Union String of length 1 byte Not used Identification of Type of Separation String of length 1 byte Not used Last Update Date String of length 8 bytes Updated automatically Different format for before and after year 2000 Last Update Time String of length 10 bytes Updated automatically Reserved for expansion String length 100 General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 TypeReg 3 Death and burial TypeReg Integer of 2 bytes Value 3 Ctrl1 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DAT that corresponds to this Individual Ctrl2 Integer of 4 bytes Not used Date 0 String of length 10 bytes Date of the Burial See Internal dates format Date 1 a Date 9 String of length 10 bytes Not used Short Text 0 Strings of length 100 bytes Cause of death Short Text 1 Strings of length 100 bytes Place of burial Short Text 2 Strings of length 100 bytes Cemetery Short Text 3 Strings of length 100 bytes Book of register Death Short Text 4 Strings of length 100 bytes Sacramental Book of death Short Text 5 a Short Text 15 Strings of length 100 bytes Not used Long Text String of length 1000 bytes free descrip
394. y Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 23 1 About the Author The General Family Documentation System GDS Joaquim M Casals de Nadal Electronics Engineer B Sc Majoring in Computer Sciences do not think am unlike any other individual if declare that have always been intrigued by the finding of the weakness of the human memory and the utility of this weakness in the everyday life Many of my relatives my mother in particular have spent many hours with me in conversations related to the Individuals of her time they have presented their experiences have described other Individuals many of them relatives of ours have described their opinions their attitudes and behaviors their diseases their qualities and their defects In any case they liked that their description had continuity waiting in vain with their words to be perpetuated in the memory of their descendants Just some descriptions last at most from these words deformed by time and just a fraction of them are conveyed to other Individuals and so forth to the next generation The recipients of the information am not an exception have such a selective memory variable with time and out of our control which destroys or distorts the information passing the filter of our subjectivity and that in the long run loose the field of the real and transmissible The result is that with very few exceptions we just know the existence of our ancestors We do not know the
395. yet the technology of computers If fact GDS calculates the new Sousa numbers every time you perform the calculation of ancestors of an individual so that in fact it makes possible the study focused in any individual of the Database The search of the number of Individuals by Sousa may have become obsolete As a matter of fact the majority of users of GDS do not use this methodology EXAMPLE 102 FMMFFM Means that this individual is the Father of the Mother of the Mother of the Father of the Father of the Mother of the individually referenced which carries a number of Sousa Stradonitz of 102 2 2 The Melgar system of numbering Surnames The order proposed by Melgar is the following e First Surname the first Surname of the father e Second Surname the first Surname of the mother These Surnames are the first two commonly used in the Spanish system e Third Surname the first Surname of the mother of the father That is the second Surname of the father e Fourth Surname the first Surname of the mother of the mother i e the second Surname of the mother e Fifth Surname the first Surname of the mother of the paternal grandfather is the third Surname of the father or which is the same the second Surname of the paternal grandfather e Sixth Surname the first Surname of the mother of the maternal grandfather is the third Surname of the mother or which is the same the second Surname of the maternal grandfather e Seventh Surn
396. ys Font of other data 7 Pane Titles i Line nobiliar titles Governance period Places Names format Enter the maximum F Nickname number of characters per Show Places Iitu Name Sumames ene By eee Show Places City ees Lineage L Show Countries Second Surname 20 P Nobiliary Titles i Ana iia date M wil Size of images f Inline with the date Rectangles and relict jf Rectangles fv Relief W Relef lines Spouses W Display spouses W Show image of spouse W Show the same data of the spouse Mark concubinages and their children Show divorced spouses with common children W Show multiple spouses horizontally J Long union lines if there ig union date Relative size of the f Below the date Images E Number of Control Show the Control Number Figure 53 The Options of the Descendants Graph Mother lines only IW Line between repeated individuals Individuals to not develop Individual Descendents Free Show number of children Show e mail Show e mail Restore Apply Add Image Remove Image Gap Vertical gap between generations Accept decoonoomeccoecHodnesoscd To Print or create a PDF or TIF file both single page as multipage go to the bar icons Print To See the details of the printing options access Printing of Reports or creation of PDF TIF or TXT files See 14 and subchapters To send an e mail with an attached PDF o
397. ysis of the Ancestors of the Individual It has as many lines as Generations has been encountered with at least one ancestor Joseph N Jones Generation Ancestors Ancestors Ancestors Ancestors number theoretical found unknown different percentage IT 2 2 i 2 g a III 4 4 o 4 0 1 IV E B i E g 16 16 g 16 g WI 32 13 19 13 g WII 64 10 54 10 g VIII 128 6 li 6 g IX 256 4 252 4 0 i x 512 2 510 2 g XI 1024 2 1022 2 g XII z048 2 2046 2 g XIII 4096 2 4094 Z g XIV 8192 2 8190 2 g EV 16384 z 16382 2 g XVI 327668 1 32767 1 i XVII 65536 2 65534 2 g F XVIII 131072 2 131070 2 g KIX 262144 1 262143 1 g KA 524288 1 oz4287 1 g HET 1048576 1 1048575 1 g TOTAL 83 83 Figure 46 The Analysis of consanguinity of Ancestors Presents the following columns e Generation number Number of the generation e Theoretical Ancestors the number of Ancestors that every Individual has in this generation known or unknown duplicated or different e Found Ancestors Ancestors actually found e Ancestors unknown the difference between the theoretical and the found e Different Ancestors How many of the found are different WARNING It may be the case that an ancestor is duplicated in more than one generation In the case that an ancestor appears in more than one generation he she is mentioned only in the first generation that is found e Consanguinity percentage the percentage of Ancestors in one generation who are duplicated If zero means that al
398. ystem for Help in the search of the individual Index Code First Surname Integer of two bytes Proprietary Code of Marshall System for Help in the search of the individual Index Code Second Surname Integer of two bytes Proprietary Code of Marshall System for Help in the search of the individual Index Code Password Integer of two bytes Proprietary Code of Marshall System for control GDS5 ID2 File Index correspondent to the file GDS5 DA2 Direct access file One register per individual The number of register corresponds to the Number of Control of the individual Correspondence with the GDS5 DAT file Content General Family Documentation System GDS Version 7 0 e Index Cirl 0 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Titles Professions of this individual e Index Ctrl 1 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Birth Baptism of this individual e Index Ctrl 2 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the death burial of this individual e index Ctrl 3 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Will of this individual e Index Ctrl 4 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the First Marriage of this individual e Index Ctrl 5 Integer of 4 bytes Number of register in GDS5 DA2 corresponds to the Second Marriage of this individual e Index Ctrl 6 Integer of 4 bytes Number o
399. ytes Size of this Header 40 bytes biWidth Integer of 4 bytes Image width in pixels biHeight Integer of 4 bytes image height in pixels biPlanes Integer of 2 bytes Number of image planes must be 1 biBitCount Integer of 2 bytes Bit per pixel 1 4 8 or 24 biCompression Integer of 4 bytes Compression type biSizelmage Integer of 4 bytes Size in bytes of compressed image or zero bixPelsPerMeter Integer of 4 bytes Horizontal resolution in pixels meter biYPelsPerMeter Integer of 4 bytes Vertical resolution in pixels meter biClrUsed Integer of 4 bytes Number of colors used biClrlmportant Integer of 4 bytes Number of important colors BMPlImage String of 19200 bytes Maxim space occupied by the thumbnail file Number of Pages Integer of 2 bytes Number of pages of the document Reserved String of 98 bytes e Registers of information of rectangle Page Integer of 2 bytes Page inside the document XX_Top_Left String of 2 bytes Coordinate X of the top left of the rectangle in pixels YY_Top Left String of 2 bytes Coordinate Y and of the top left of the rectangle in pixels XX_Bottom_Right String of 2 bytes Coordinate X of the bottom right of the rectangle in pixels YY_Bottom_Right String of 2 bytes Coordinate Y and of the bottom right of the rectangle in pixels Number Control foot String of 4 bytes Number of Control of the individual if the rectangle links to

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Mode d`emploi METTLER TOLEDO MultiRange Terminal de pesage    Dielro 101  Troubleshooting  Kit de test de graisse SKF TKGT 1  2M-BL3 User`s Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file